Table of Contents
- Preface
- Contents
- Menu Map
- Overview
- Machine Features
- Color and Image Quality Functions
- Guides Provided with the Machine
- About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
- 1 Safety Precautions
- Safety Conventions in This Guide
- Environment
- Precautions for Use
- Laser Safety (Europe)
- SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
- Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power
- Compliance and Conformity
- Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)
- Warranty (the United States and Canada)
- Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
- EN ISO 7779
- EK1-ITB 2000
- Legal Information
- Energy Saving Control Function
- Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
- Resource Saving - Paper
- Environmental benefits of “Power Management"
- Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
- Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
- Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped)
- Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
- 2 Installing and Setting up the Machine
- Part Names (Machine Exterior)
- Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
- Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
- Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
- Connecting cable
- Power On/Off
- Default Settings of the Machine
- Setting Date and Time
- Network settings
- Wireless Network Settings
- Energy Saver function
- Quick Setup Wizard
- Installing Software
- Strengthening the Security by the Administrator
- Command Center RX
- Migrating the Address Book
- Application
- 3 Preparation before Use
- Using the Operation Panel
- Assigning a Function to a Function Key
- Using the Operation Panel
- Login/Logout
- Check the counter
- Loading paper
- Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
- Adding a Destination
- Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
- Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
- Using Document Boxes
- 4 Operation on PC
- 5 Operation on the Machine
- Place the Originals.
- Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
- Using Applications
- Copying
- Frequently-Used Sending Method
- Useful Sending Method
- Canceling Scanning
- Destination Operations
- How to Use the FAX Function
- Basic Operation for Document Box
- Custom Box Operations
- Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box
- Moving Documents in Custom Box
- Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes
- Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable Memory
- Joining Documents in Custom Box
- Deleting Documents in Custom Box
- Sending Documents in a Custom Box
- Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged in user.
- Scanning Document Stored in a Custom Box
- Printing Data Saved on the Machine
- Printing Documents from Private Print Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box
- Printing Document from Stored Job Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box
- Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
- Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
- Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box
- Printing Documents in Custom Box
- Printing from the Handheld Device
- Operating Using Removable USB Memory
- 6 Advanced Setting of Functions
- Icons in This Chapter
- [ID Card Copy]
- [Original Size]
- [Paper Selection]
- [Mixed Size Originals]
- [Original Orientation]
- [Collate/Offset]
- [Staple]
- [Paper Output]
- [Density]
- [Original Image]
- [EcoPrint]
- [Color Selection]
- [Color Balance]
- [Hue Adjustment]
- [Sharpness]
- [Contrast]
- [Background Density Adj.]
- [Saturation]
- [Prevent Bleed-through]
- [Zoom]
- [Combine]
- [Margin]
- [Duplex]
- [Continuous Scan]
- [Auto Image Rotation]
- [Job Finish Notice]
- [File Name Entry]
- [Priority Override]
- [Skip Blank Page]
- [2-sided/Book Original]
- [Sending Size]
- [File Format]
- [File Separation]
- [Scan Resolution]
- [E-mail Subject/Body]
- [FTP Encrypted TX]
- [Delete after Printed]
- [Delete after Transmitted]
- [Storing Size]
- [Long Original]
- [Encrypted PDF Password]
- [JPEG/TIFF Print]
- [XPS Fit to Page]
- [Erase Shadowed Areas]
- 7 Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices
- 8 System Menu
- 9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting)
- Overview of User Login Administration
- Managing the Job Account from PC
- Enabling User Login Administration
- Setting User Login Administration
- Authentication Security
- Adding a User (Local User List)
- Change the user properties
- Managing User Printing
- Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
- Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
- Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC
- Local Authorization Settings
- Group Authorization Settings
- Guest Authorization Set
- Obtain NW User Property
- Simple Login Settings
- ID Card Settings
- PIN Code Authorization
- Using User Login Administration
- User Login/Job Accounting
- Enabling Job Accounting
- Setting an account. [Local]
- Adding an Account [Accounting List]
- Restricting the Use of the Machine
- Setting Processing When the Limit is Exceeded
- Editing an Account
- Deleting an Account
- Managing the Account Printing Status
- Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN
- Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA
- Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer
- Using JOB Accounting
- Setting Unknown Number Processing Method
- 10 Maintenance
- 11 Troubleshooting
- General Troubles
- Responding to Messages
- Adjustment/Maintenance
- Clearing Paper Jams
- Jam Location Indicators
- Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
- Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1
- Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1, 2 and 3
- Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2, 3
- Remove any jammed paper in the Document Finisher
- Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit
- Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor
- Clearing a Staple Jam
- 12 Appendix
KYOCERA M8130cidn User Manual
Displayed below is the user manual for M8130cidn by KYOCERA which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.
Related Manuals
ECOSYS M8124cidn
ECOSYS M8130cidn
OPERATION GUIDE
PRINT COPY SCAN FAX
i
> Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing this machine.
This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance, and take
simple troubleshooting measures as needed so that the machine can always be used in the optimum condition.
Please read the Operation Guide before using the facsimile. Keep it close to the facsimile for easy reference.
We recommend the use of our own brand supplies.
Please use our genuine toner containers, which have passed rigorous quality control testing.
The use of non-genuine toner containers may cause failure.
We will not be liable for any damages caused by the use of third party supplies in this machine.
A label is affixed to our genuine supplies, as shown below.
Checking the Equipment's Serial Number
The equipment's serial number is printed in the location shown in the figure.
You'll need the equipment's serial number when contacting your Service Representative. Please check the number
before contacting your Service Representative.
ii
> Contents
Contents
Preface ......................................................................................................................................i
Contents ................................................................................................................................... ii
Menu Map ................................................................................................................................x
[Copy] .............................................................................................................................x
[Send] ........................................................................................................................... xii
[Custom Box] (Store File, Printing, Send) ................................................................... xiv
[Job Box] .................................................................................................................... xvii
[Removable Memory] (Store File, Printing Documents) ............................................. xvii
[FAX] ............................................................................................................................xx
[Sub Address Box] ...................................................................................................... xxi
[Polling Box] ................................................................................................................ xxi
[FAX Memory RX Box] ............................................................................................... xxii
[Status/ Job Cancel] ................................................................................................... xxii
[System Menu] ...........................................................................................................xxiii
Overview ................................................................................................................................ xli
Machine Features .................................................................................................................. xlii
Color and Image Quality Functions ...................................................................................... xlvi
Basic Color Modes ..................................................................................................... xlvi
Adjusting Image Quality and Color .............................................................................xlvii
Guides Provided with the Machine ......................................................................................xlviii
About the Operation Guide (this Guide) ....................................................................................l
Structure of the guide ......................................................................................................l
Conventions Used in This Guide .................................................................................... li
1 Safety Precautions ................................................................................. 1-1
Safety Conventions in This Guide ....................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ........................................................................................................................ 1-3
Precautions for Use ............................................................................................................. 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ......................................................................................................... 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) ...................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ................................................ 1-7
Compliance and Conformity ................................................................................................ 1-8
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ............................................. 1-8
Warranty (the United States and Canada) .......................................................................... 1-9
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ............................................................................ 1-10
EN ISO 7779 ..................................................................................................................... 1-10
EK1-ITB 2000 .................................................................................................................... 1-10
Legal Information ............................................................................................................... 1-10
Energy Saving Control Function ........................................................................................ 1-17
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function ...................................................................................... 1-18
Resource Saving Paper .................................................................................................... 1-19
Environmental benefits of “Power Management" .............................................................. 1-20
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ......................................................................... 1-21
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) ................................................................................... 1-22
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) .......................................... 1-23
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ......................................................................... 1-24
2 Installing and Setting up the Machine .................................................. 2-1
Part Names (Machine Exterior) ........................................................................................... 2-3
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ....................................................................................... 2-5
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ............................................................. 2-6
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ....................................................................... 2-7
Connecting cable ................................................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting LAN Cable .............................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................. 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable .................................................................................... 2-9
iii
> Contents
Power On/Off ..................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Power Off ................................................................................................................ 2-10
Default Settings of the Machine ........................................................................................ 2-11
Setting Date and Time ....................................................................................................... 2-12
Network settings ................................................................................................................ 2-13
Configuring the Wired Network ............................................................................... 2-13
Wireless Network Settings ................................................................................................ 2-15
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................. 2-19
Setting NFC ............................................................................................................. 2-21
Energy Saver function ....................................................................................................... 2-22
Low Power Mode .................................................................................................... 2-22
Energy Saver Recovery Level ................................................................................. 2-22
Sleep ....................................................................................................................... 2-23
Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................... 2-23
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ............................................................................ 2-23
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ........................................ 2-24
Quick Setup Wizard ........................................................................................................... 2-25
Installing Software ............................................................................................................. 2-27
Software on DVD (Windows) .................................................................................. 2-27
Installing Software in Windows ............................................................................... 2-28
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................ 2-34
Installing Software on a Mac Computer .................................................................. 2-35
Setting TWAIN Driver .............................................................................................. 2-37
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................... 2-39
Installing the WSD Driver ........................................................................................ 2-40
Strengthening the Security by the Administrator ............................................................... 2-41
Command Center RX ........................................................................................................ 2-42
Accessing Command Center RX ............................................................................ 2-42
Changing Security Settings ..................................................................................... 2-43
Changing Device Information .................................................................................. 2-44
Setting SMTP and E-mail ........................................................................................ 2-45
Migrating the Address Book .............................................................................................. 2-49
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC .................................................................... 2-49
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine ............................................................ 2-51
Application ......................................................................................................................... 2-54
Installing Applications .............................................................................................. 2-54
Uninstalling Applications ......................................................................................... 2-55
3 Preparation before Use .......................................................................... 3-1
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................. 3-3
Assigning a Function to a Function Key .............................................................................. 3-4
Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................. 3-6
Display the Home screen .......................................................................................... 3-6
Display for Device Information ................................................................................ 3-11
Functions key .......................................................................................................... 3-11
Displaying Keys That Cannot be Configured .......................................................... 3-12
Using the [Enter] Key .............................................................................................. 3-12
Using the [Quick No. Search] Key ........................................................................... 3-13
Help Screen ............................................................................................................ 3-13
Login/Logout ...................................................................................................................... 3-14
Login ....................................................................................................................... 3-14
Simple Login ........................................................................................................... 3-15
Logout ..................................................................................................................... 3-15
Check the counter ............................................................................................................. 3-16
Loading paper ................................................................................................................... 3-17
Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................. 3-17
Selecting the paper feeder unit ............................................................................... 3-18
Loading in the Cassettes 1 (to 3) ............................................................................ 3-19
iv
> Contents
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC .................................... 3-22
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name ............................... 3-22
Making a note of the user name and domain name ................................................ 3-23
Configuring Shared Folder Access Permissions ..................................................... 3-23
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ................................ 3-24
Sharing File and Printers ......................................................................................... 3-27
Configuring Windows Firewall Settings ................................................................... 3-28
Adding a Destination ......................................................................................................... 3-32
Adding a Destination (Address Book) ..................................................................... 3-32
Changing an Address Book Destination ................................................................. 3-36
Deleting an Address Book Destination .................................................................... 3-37
Assigning a Destination to a One Touch Key .......................................................... 3-37
Editing One Touch Key ........................................................................................... 3-38
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key ...................................................... 3-39
Using Command Center RX to Add Destinations to the Address Book .................. 3-40
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) ............................................................. 3-41
Adding to Favorites in Wizard Mode ....................................................................... 3-42
Adding to Favorites in Program Mode ..................................................................... 3-43
Executing Favorites in Wizard Mode ....................................................................... 3-44
Executing Favorites in Program Mode .................................................................... 3-45
Editing a Favorite .................................................................................................... 3-45
Deleting a Favorite .................................................................................................. 3-45
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ................................... 3-46
Adding Shortcuts ..................................................................................................... 3-46
Edit the shortcut ...................................................................................................... 3-46
Deleting a Shortcut .................................................................................................. 3-47
Using Document Boxes ..................................................................................................... 3-48
What is Custom Box? .............................................................................................. 3-48
What is Job Box? .................................................................................................... 3-48
What is Removable Memory Box? .......................................................................... 3-49
The F Code Box, Polling Box, and FAX Memory Receive Box are for storing FAX data.
3-49
Using Machine Operations to Create a New Custom Box ...................................... 3-49
Using Command Center RX to Create a New Custom Box .................................... 3-51
Edit the custom box. ................................................................................................ 3-52
Deleting Custom Box .............................................................................................. 3-53
4 Operation on PC ..................................................................................... 4-1
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen .................................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ....................................................................................... 4-4
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings ...................................................................... 4-5
Printing from PC .................................................................................................................. 4-6
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................. 4-6
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper ...................................................................... 4-7
Canceling Printing from a Computer ....................................................................... 4-10
Storing Data in Machine Memory and Printing Data in Machine Memory ......................... 4-11
On the computer, specify the document box and save the job ............................... 4-11
Using Command Center RX to Print a Job Stored in a Custom Box ...................... 4-12
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) .................................................................. 4-14
Accessing the Status Monitor .................................................................................. 4-14
Exiting the Status Monitor ....................................................................................... 4-14
Status Monitor Display ............................................................................................ 4-14
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................. 4-15
Paper Tray Status Tab ............................................................................................ 4-15
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................... 4-15
Alert Tab .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Status Monitor Context Menu .................................................................................. 4-16
Status Monitor Notification Settings ........................................................................ 4-17
v
> Contents
5 Operation on the Machine ..................................................................... 5-1
Place the Originals. ............................................................................................................. 5-3
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................. 5-3
Loading Originals in the Document Processor .......................................................... 5-4
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ............................................................................ 5-7
Using Applications ............................................................................................................. 5-10
Activating Applications ............................................................................................ 5-10
Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................ 5-11
Copying ............................................................................................................................. 5-12
Copying ................................................................................................................... 5-12
Interrupt Copy ......................................................................................................... 5-13
Canceling Jobs ........................................................................................................ 5-13
Frequently-Used Sending Method ..................................................................................... 5-14
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail .................................................................. 5-14
Sending to a Shared Folder on a Computer [SMB] ................................................. 5-16
Sending to an Folder on an FTP Server [FTP] ........................................................ 5-18
Scanning with a TWAIN/WIA Compatible Application ............................................. 5-19
Useful Sending Method ..................................................................................................... 5-21
Executing WSD Scan .............................................................................................. 5-21
Using File Management Utility to Scan an Original Document ............................... 5-22
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) .................................... 5-23
Sending to the E-mail address of the Logged In User ............................................ 5-23
Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send) .................................................... 5-24
Canceling Scanning .......................................................................................................... 5-26
Destination Operations ...................................................................................................... 5-27
Choosing from the Address Book ........................................................................... 5-27
Choosing from the External Address Book ............................................................. 5-29
Choosing from the One Touch Key ......................................................................... 5-29
Choosing from the Speed Dial ................................................................................ 5-30
Checking and Editing Destinations ......................................................................... 5-30
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ....................................................................... 5-30
Recall ...................................................................................................................... 5-31
How to Use the FAX Function ........................................................................................... 5-32
Basic Operation for Document Box ................................................................................... 5-33
Box List Operations ................................................................................................. 5-33
Document List Operations ....................................................................................... 5-33
Custom Box Operations .................................................................................................... 5-34
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ....................................................... 5-34
Moving Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-34
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes ............................................ 5-35
Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable Memory .................................. 5-35
Joining Documents in Custom Box ......................................................................... 5-36
Deleting Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................... 5-37
Sending Documents in a Custom Box .................................................................... 5-37
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged in user. ............ 5-38
Scanning Document Stored in a Custom Box ......................................................... 5-39
Printing Data Saved on the Machine ................................................................................. 5-40
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................. 5-40
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ......................................... 5-40
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................. 5-41
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box ........................................... 5-41
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box ................................................................ 5-42
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box .......................................... 5-42
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box .......................................................... 5-43
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box .................................... 5-43
Printing Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................ 5-43
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................... 5-45
Printing by AirPrint .................................................................................................. 5-45
Printing by Google Cloud Print ................................................................................ 5-45
Printing by Mopria ................................................................................................... 5-45
vi
> Contents
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ......................................................................................... 5-45
Printing with NFC .................................................................................................... 5-46
Operating Using Removable USB Memory ....................................................................... 5-47
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) ................................................ 5-47
Check the USB Memory Information ....................................................................... 5-48
Removing USB Memory .......................................................................................... 5-48
Printing from Removable USB Memory .................................................................. 5-49
6 Advanced Setting of Functions ............................................................ 6-1
Icons in This Chapter .......................................................................................................... 6-2
[ID Card Copy] ..................................................................................................................... 6-3
[Original Size] ...................................................................................................................... 6-4
[Paper Selection] ................................................................................................................. 6-5
[Mixed Size Originals] .......................................................................................................... 6-7
[Original Orientation] ........................................................................................................... 6-9
[Collate/Offset] ................................................................................................................... 6-10
[Staple] .............................................................................................................................. 6-12
[Paper Output] ................................................................................................................... 6-15
[Density] ............................................................................................................................ 6-16
[Original Image] ................................................................................................................. 6-17
[EcoPrint] ........................................................................................................................... 6-18
[Color Selection] ................................................................................................................ 6-19
[Color Balance] .................................................................................................................. 6-20
[Hue Adjustment] ............................................................................................................... 6-21
[Sharpness] ....................................................................................................................... 6-22
[Contrast] ........................................................................................................................... 6-23
[Background Density Adj.] ................................................................................................. 6-24
[Saturation] ........................................................................................................................ 6-25
[Prevent Bleed-through] .................................................................................................... 6-26
[Zoom] ............................................................................................................................... 6-27
[Combine] .......................................................................................................................... 6-29
[Margin] ............................................................................................................................. 6-31
[Duplex] ............................................................................................................................. 6-32
[Continuous Scan] ............................................................................................................. 6-35
[Auto Image Rotation] ........................................................................................................ 6-36
[Job Finish Notice] ............................................................................................................. 6-37
[File Name Entry] ............................................................................................................... 6-38
[Priority Override] .............................................................................................................. 6-39
[Skip Blank Page] .............................................................................................................. 6-40
[2-sided/Book Original] ...................................................................................................... 6-41
[Sending Size] ................................................................................................................... 6-42
[File Format] ...................................................................................................................... 6-43
[File Separation] ................................................................................................................ 6-48
[Scan Resolution] .............................................................................................................. 6-49
[E-mail Subject/Body] ........................................................................................................ 6-50
[FTP Encrypted TX] ........................................................................................................... 6-51
[Delete after Printed] ......................................................................................................... 6-52
[Delete after Transmitted] .................................................................................................. 6-53
[Storing Size] ..................................................................................................................... 6-54
[Long Original] ................................................................................................................... 6-55
[Encrypted PDF Password] ............................................................................................... 6-56
[JPEG/TIFF Print] .............................................................................................................. 6-57
[XPS Fit to Page] ............................................................................................................... 6-58
[Erase Shadowed Areas] ................................................................................................... 6-59
7 Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices ...................................... 7-1
Checking a Job Status ........................................................................................................ 7-2
Available Status Screens .......................................................................................... 7-2
vii
> Contents
Displaying the Status Screen .................................................................................... 7-2
Status Display ..................................................................................................................... 7-3
Print Job Status Screen ............................................................................................ 7-3
Send Job Status Screen ........................................................................................... 7-4
Store Job Status Screen ........................................................................................... 7-5
Scheduled Job Status Screen ................................................................................... 7-5
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs ..................................................................... 7-6
Checking Job Histories ........................................................................................................ 7-7
Available Job History Screens .................................................................................. 7-7
Displaying the Job History Screen ............................................................................ 7-7
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ......................................................... 7-8
Sending the Log History ............................................................................................ 7-8
Job Operation ...................................................................................................................... 7-9
Pausing and Resuming a Job ................................................................................... 7-9
Canceling a Job ........................................................................................................ 7-9
Device/Communication ..................................................................................................... 7-10
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) .......................... 7-12
8 System Menu .......................................................................................... 8-1
Operation Method ................................................................................................................ 8-2
[Quick Setup Wizard] ........................................................................................................... 8-3
[Language] .......................................................................................................................... 8-4
[Report] ................................................................................................................................ 8-5
[Counter] .............................................................................................................................. 8-8
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings] ................................................................................................ 8-9
[Common Settings] ............................................................................................................ 8-11
[Home] ............................................................................................................................... 8-23
[Copy] ................................................................................................................................ 8-24
[Send] ................................................................................................................................ 8-25
[Document Box] ................................................................................................................. 8-26
[FAX] ................................................................................................................................. 8-27
[Application] ....................................................................................................................... 8-28
[Internet] ............................................................................................................................ 8-29
[Address Book/One Touch] ............................................................................................... 8-30
[User Login/Job Accounting] ............................................................................................. 8-31
[Printer] .............................................................................................................................. 8-32
[System/Network] .............................................................................................................. 8-35
[Date/Timer/Energy Saver] ................................................................................................ 8-60
[Adjustment/Maintenance] ................................................................................................. 8-63
9 User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) 9-1
Overview of User Login Administration ............................................................................... 9-3
Managing the Job Account from PC .................................................................................... 9-4
Enabling User Login Administration .................................................................................... 9-5
Setting User Login Administration ....................................................................................... 9-6
Authentication Security ............................................................................................. 9-6
Adding a User (Local User List) ................................................................................ 9-7
Change the user properties ..................................................................................... 9-11
Managing User Printing ........................................................................................... 9-13
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning ................................................... 9-14
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning ........................................................ 9-15
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC ....................................................... 9-16
Local Authorization Settings .................................................................................... 9-17
Group Authorization Settings .................................................................................. 9-17
Guest Authorization Set .......................................................................................... 9-20
Obtain NW User Property ....................................................................................... 9-22
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................. 9-23
ID Card Settings ...................................................................................................... 9-26
viii
> Contents
PIN Code Authorization ........................................................................................... 9-26
Using User Login Administration ....................................................................................... 9-28
Login/Logout ........................................................................................................... 9-28
User Login/Job Accounting ............................................................................................... 9-29
Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................... 9-30
Job Accounting Access ........................................................................................... 9-30
Setting an account. [Local] ................................................................................................ 9-31
Adding an Account [Accounting List] ....................................................................... 9-31
Restricting the Use of the Machine ......................................................................... 9-32
Setting Processing When the Limit is Exceeded ..................................................... 9-33
Editing an Account .................................................................................................. 9-33
Deleting an Account ................................................................................................ 9-34
Managing the Account Printing Status .................................................................... 9-34
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN .................................................................. 9-35
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ....................................................................... 9-36
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer .................................... 9-37
Using JOB Accounting ...................................................................................................... 9-39
Configuring the Job Accounting Default Settings .................................................... 9-39
Counting by Paper Size .......................................................................................... 9-40
Counting the Number of Pages Printed .................................................................. 9-41
Print Accounting Report .......................................................................................... 9-43
Setting the Counting Method for the Copier/Printer ................................................ 9-44
Login/Logout (Job Accounting) ............................................................................... 9-44
Setting Unknown Number Processing Method .................................................................. 9-46
Setting Unknown ID Job Processing ....................................................................... 9-46
Registering User Property for an Unknown ID User ............................................... 9-46
10 Maintenance ......................................................................................... 10-1
Regular Maintenance ........................................................................................................ 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ............................................................................................. 10-2
Cleaning Slit Glass .................................................................................................. 10-2
Consumable Replacement and Replenishment ................................................................ 10-4
Toner Container Replacement ................................................................................ 10-4
Waste Toner Box Replacement .............................................................................. 10-7
Loading Paper ......................................................................................................... 10-9
Staple Cartridge Replacement (Document Finisher) ............................................ 10-10
11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 11-1
General Troubles ............................................................................................................... 11-2
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................... 11-2
Machine Operation Trouble ..................................................................................... 11-3
Printed Image Trouble ............................................................................................. 11-6
Color printing trouble ............................................................................................... 11-9
Responding to Messages ................................................................................................ 11-10
Responding to Send Error ..................................................................................... 11-22
Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................. 11-25
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................... 11-25
Color Registration Procedure ................................................................................ 11-25
Calibration ............................................................................................................. 11-30
Perform the laser scanner cleaning. ..................................................................... 11-30
Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................ 11-30
Drum Refresh ........................................................................................................ 11-32
Clearing Paper Jams ....................................................................................................... 11-33
Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................ 11-33
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................... 11-34
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................... 11-35
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1, 2 and 3 .............................................. 11-36
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2, 3 ................................................... 11-37
ix
> Contents
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Finisher ......................................... 11-39
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................... 11-40
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor ...................................... 11-41
Clearing a Staple Jam ..................................................................................................... 11-43
Clearing a staple jam of the Document Finisher ................................................... 11-43
12 Appendix ............................................................................................... 12-1
Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................... 12-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ............................................................................. 12-2
Optional Applications ............................................................................................ 12-11
Starting Application Use ........................................................................................ 12-11
Checking Details of Application ............................................................................. 12-12
Character Entry Method .................................................................................................. 12-13
Entry Screens ........................................................................................................ 12-13
Entering Characters .............................................................................................. 12-14
Paper ............................................................................................................................... 12-16
Paper Specifications ............................................................................................. 12-16
Paper Appropriate Paper ...................................................................................... 12-16
Special Paper ........................................................................................................ 12-19
Specifications .................................................................................................................. 12-23
Machine ................................................................................................................. 12-23
Copy Functions ..................................................................................................... 12-25
Printer Functions ................................................................................................... 12-26
Scanner Functions ................................................................................................ 12-26
Document Processor ............................................................................................. 12-27
Paper Feeder (500-sheet) ..................................................................................... 12-27
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) ............................................................................... 12-27
Document Finisher ................................................................................................ 12-27
Glossary .......................................................................................................................... 12-29
Index .............................................................................................................................. Index-1
x
> Menu Map
Menu Map
This is a list of menus displayed on the touch panel. Depending on the settings, some menus may not be displayed.
Some menu names may differ from their reference titles.
[Copy]
or
Function key Description Reference
Page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the
required paper size.
6-5
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. 6-27
Density Adjust density. 6-16
Duplex Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided
copies from two-sided originals.
6-32
Combine Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page. 6-29
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. 6-20
Functions Description Reference
Page
Collate/Offset Offset the output by set or page. 6-10
ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an
insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card,
both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.
6-3
Original Sizes Specify the original size to be scanned. 6-4
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
6-9
Mixed Size Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are
of different sizes.
6-7
Paper Output Specify the output tray. 6-15
Staple Staples the finished documents. 6-12
Original Image Select original image type for best results. 6-17
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. 6-18
Hue Adjustment Adjust the color (hue) of images. 6-21
Color Bal ance Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. 6-20
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. 6-22
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of
the image.
6-23
xi
> Menu Map
Background Density Adjustment Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
6-24
Prevent Bleed-through Hides back side image bleed-through when scanning a thin
paper original.
6-26
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this
function skips the blank pages and scans only pages that are
not blank.
6-40
Saturation Adjust the color saturation of the image. 6-25
Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the
margin width and the back page margin.
6-31
Erase Shadowed Areas When scanning with the document processor open, erase the
extra shaded area.
6-59
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and
then produce as one job.
6-35
Auto Image Rotation Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of
the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations
are different.
6-36
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. 6-39
Functions Description Reference
Page
xii
> Menu Map
[Send]
or
Function key Description Reference
Page
One Touch Key Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch
key.
3-37
Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. 5-27
External Address Book Select a destination registered in the external address book. Command
Center RX
User Guide
E-mail Sending Scanned Document via E-mail. 5-14
Folder You can store the scanned document into the desired shared
folder on a computer.
5-16
5-18
FAX Sending Scanned Document via E-mail. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX Server You can send a scanned document through a fax server. FAX
Operation
Guide
WSD Scan WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this
machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer (WSD
Scan).
5-21
Functions Description Reference
Page
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. 6-19
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be
adjusted.
6-43
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. 6-4
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
6-9
Mixed Sized Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are
of different sizes.
6-7
2-sided/ Book Original Select the type and binding of originals. 6-41
Sending Size Select size of image to be sent. 6-42
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page
by page, and sends the files.
6-48
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. 6-49
Density Adjust density using 9 levels. 6-16
Original Image Select original image type for best results. 6-17
㻿㼑㼚㼐
xiii
> Menu Map
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. 6-22
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of
the image.
6-23
Background Density Adjustment Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides back side image bleed-through when scanning a thin
paper original.
6-26
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this
function skips the blank pages and scans only pages that are
not blank.
6-40
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. FAX
Operation
Guide
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. 6-27
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and
then produce as one job.
6-35
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
E-mail Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. 6-50
Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a document
processor.
6-55
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. 6-51
FAX Delayed T ransmission Set a send time. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX Direct Transmission Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for Polling
Transmission stored in the polling box.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Functions Description Reference
Page
xiv
> Menu Map
[Custom Box] (Store File, Printing, Send)
[Store File]
Function key Description Reference
Page
2-sided/ Book Original Select the type and binding of originals. 6-41
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. 6-49
Density Adjust density using 9 levels. 6-16
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. 6-19
Functions Description Reference
Page
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. 6-4
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
6-9
Mixed Sized Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are
of different sizes.
6-7
Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. 6-54
Original Image Select original image type for best results. 6-17
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. 6-22
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of
the image.
6-23
Background Density Adjustment Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides back side image bleed-through when scanning a thin
paper original.
6-26
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this
function skips the blank pages and scans only pages that are
not blank.
6-40
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. 6-27
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and
then produce as one job.
6-35
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
CustomBox
xv
> Menu Map
[Print]
Function key Description Reference
Page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the
required paper size.
6-5
Collate/Offset Offset the output by set or page. 6-10
2-sided Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. 6-41
Delete after Printed Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is
complete.
3-50
Functions Description Reference
Page
Paper Output Specify the output tray. 6-15
Staple Staples the finished documents. 6-12
Margin Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the
margin width and the back page margin.
6-31
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. 6-39
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. 6-18
xvi
> Menu Map
[Send]
Function key Description Reference
Page
One Touch Key Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch
key.
3-37
5-29
Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book. 5-27
External Address Book Select a destination registered in the external address book. Command
Center RX
User Guide
E-mail Sending Scanned Document via E-mail. 5-14
Folder You can store the scanned document into the desired shared
folder on a computer.
5-16
5-18
FAX Sending Scanned Document via E-mail. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX Server You can send a scanned document through a fax server. FAX
Operation
Guide
Functions Description Reference
Page
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be
adjusted.
6-43
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page
by page, and sends the files.
6-48
Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. 6-49
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX. FAX
Operation
Guide
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
E-mail Subject/Body Adds subject and body when sending a document. 6-50
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
FTP Encrypted TX Encrypts images when sending via FTP. 6-51
FAX Delayed T ransmission Set a send time. FAX
Operation
Guide
Delete after Transmitted Automatically deletes a document from the box once
transmission is complete.
6-53
xvii
> Menu Map
[Job Box]
[Removable Memory] (Store File, Printing Documents)
[Store File]
Function key Description Reference
Page
Private Print/Stored Job In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be
printed until you operate the machine.
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved
to the machine.
5-40
5-41
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document
already printed.
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print
of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining copies.
5-42
5-43
Function key Description Reference
Page
File Format Specify the image file format. Image quality level can also be
adjusted.
6-43
2-sided/ Book Original Select the type and binding of originals. 6-41
Scan Resolution Select fineness of scanning resolution. 6-49
Density Adjust density using 9 levels. 6-16
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. 6-19
Functions Description Reference
Page
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. 6-4
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
6-9
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼍㼎㼘㼑
㻌㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
xviii
> Menu Map
Mixed Sized Originals Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are
of different sizes.
6-7
Storing Size Select size of image to be stored. 6-54
Original Image Select original image type for best results. 6-17
Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines. 6-22
Contrast You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of
the image.
6-23
Background Density Adjustment Removes dark background from originals, such as
newspapers.
6-24
Prevent Bleed-thru Hides back side image bleed-through when scanning a thin
paper original.
6-26
Skip Blank Page When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this
function skips the blank pages and scans only pages that are
not blank.
6-40
Zoom Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image. 6-27
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and
then produce as one job.
6-35
Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a document
processor.
6-55
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
File Separation Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page
by page, and sends the files.
6-48
Functions Description Reference
Page
xix
> Menu Map
[Print]
Function key Description Reference
Page
Paper Selection Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the
required paper size.
6-5
Collate/Offset Offsets the output by page or set. 6-10
2-sided Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets. 6-34
Color Selection Select the color mode setting. 6-19
Functions Description Reference
Page
Paper Output Specify the output tray. 6-15
Staple Staples the finished documents. 6-12
Margin Add margins (white space). Set the margin width.
In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page
margin.
6-31
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. 6-18
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. 6-37
File Name Entry Adds a file name. 6-38
Priority Override Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority. 6-39
Encrypted PDF Password Enter the preassigned password to print the PDF data. 6-56
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files. 6-57
XPS Fit to Page Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected
paper size when printing XPS file.
6-58
xx
> Menu Map
[FAX]
or
Function key Description Reference
Page
On Hook Select to use the speaker of the main unit without using the
handset.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Direct Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory.
Recall When you want to send the fax to the same receiving system,
select [Recall], and you can call the receiving system you
dialed on the destination list.
Add Dest. Enter the other party number using the numeric keypad.
Address Book Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
One Touch Key Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
External Address Book When selecting [On] for Dest. Check before Send, the
confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing the
[Start] key.
Command
Center RX
User Guide
Functions Description Reference
Page
Original Size Specify the original size to be scanned. FAX
Operation
Guide
Original Orientation Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
2-sided/ Book Original Select the type and binding of originals.
FAX TX Resolution Select fineness of images when sending FAX.
Density Adjust density using 9 levels.
Original Image Select the image quality according to the original image type.
Continuous Scan Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and
then produce as one job.
File Name Entry Adds a file name.
Long Original Reads long-sized original documents using a document
processor.
Job Finish Notice Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete.
FAX Delayed T ransmission Set a send time.
FAX Direct Transmission Sends FAX directly without reading original data into memory.
FAX Polling RX Dial the destination and receive documents for Polling
Transmission stored in the polling box.
㻲㻭㼄
xxi
> Menu Map
[Sub Address Box]
[Polling Box]
Function key Description Reference
Page
Sub Address
Box Operate the sub address box. FAX
Operation
Guide
Function key Description Reference
Page
Polling Box Operate the polling box. FAX Operation
Guide
㻲䝁䞊䝗
䝪䝑䜽䝇
㻲䝁
㻲䝁
䝁
㻲䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
㻲䝁䞊
㻲䝁
䝁
䝁
㻲䝁䞊
䝁
㻲䝁䞊
䞊
㻲䝁䞊
㻲䝁䞊
㻲䝁䞊
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
䝁
㻲䝁
䝁
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝗
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䜽
䝪䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑
䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪
䝑
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝑䜽
䝪
䝪䝑䜽
䜽
䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝑䜽
䝑䜽
䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䝪
䝑
䝑䜽
䝪䝑䜽
䜽
䝑䜽
䝑
䝪䝑䜽
䝑
䝑
䝑
䜽
䝑䜽
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
䝇
㻼㼛㼘㼘㼕㼚㼓㻌㻮㼛㼤
xxii
> Menu Map
[FAX Memory RX Box]
[Status/ Job Cancel]
Function key Description Reference
Page
FAX Memory RX
Box Operate the fax memory RX box. FAX Operation
Guide
or
Function key Description Reference
Page
Print Job S tatus Displays the Print Job Status screen. 7-3
Send Job S tatus Displays the Send Job Status screen. 7-4
Store Job Status Displays the Store Job Status screen. 7-5
Scheduled Job Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission 7-5
Print Job Log Displays the Printing Job Log screen. 7-7
Sending Job Log Displays the Sending Job Log screen. 7-7
Storing Job Log Displays the Storing Job Log screen. 7-7
FAX Job Log Displays the FAX Job Log screen. FAX
Operation
Guide
Scanner Displays the original scanning status or error information. 7-10
Printer Displays error information, queued or printing status. 7-10
FAX Memory RX Box Configure settings for FAX Memory RX Box. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is
displayed. Also, you can stop sending/receiving FAX.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Toner Status Remaining amount of toner. And you can check the status of
waste toner box.
7-12
Paper St atus You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining
amount of paper in each paper source.
7-12
xxiii
> Menu Map
[System Menu]
Quick Setup Wizard
Language
Removable Memory Displays usage, capacity of the USB memory connected to
the machine.
7-10
USB Keyboard The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed. 7-11
Bluetooth Keyboard The status of the Bluetooth Keyboard is displayed. —
Staple Checking remaining staple. 7-12
Network Connection Status The network connection status appears. 7-11
Option Network Connection Status The connection status of an optional network interface kit
appears.
7-11
Wi-Fi Direct The connection status of the Wi-Fi Direct is displayed. 7-11
Wireless Network The connection status of the Wireless Network Interface Kit is
displayed.
7-11
Wi-Fi The connection status of the Wi-Fi is displayed. 7-11
SSD Displays the status of optional SSD. 7-11
NFC Displays the NFC connection status. 7-11
or
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
FAX Setup Configures fax settings in a wizard format. FAX
Operation
Guide
Energy Saver Setup Configures energy saving settings in a wizard format. 2-25
Network Setup Configures network settings in a wizard format. 2-25
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display. 8-4
Function key Description Reference
Page
xxiv
> Menu Map
Report
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Report
Print
reports to
check the
machine
settings,
st atus, and
history.
Settings
for printing
reports can
also be
configured
.
Report
Print Status
page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information
including current settings, available memory space, and
optional equipment installed.
8-5
Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples
installed in the machine.
8-5
Network
Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the
information including network interface firmware version,
network address and protocol.
8-5
Service
Status More detailed information is available than on the Status
Page. Service personnel usually print the service status
pages for maintenance purpose.
8-5
Accountin
g Report Print Accounting Report. 8-5
Sub
Address
Box List
Printing a Sub Address Box List. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX
List(Index) You can print the list of destinations (Index) registered in the
Address Book.
FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX
List(No.) You can print the list of destinations (FAX Number)
registered in the Address Book.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Outgoing
FAX
Report
The Outgoing FAX Report is printed as a report. FAX
Operation
Guide
Incoming
FAX
Report
The latest incoming FAX information is printed as a report. FAX
Operation
Guide
Optional
Network
Status
Print Report Optional Network Status. 8-6
Admin
Report
Settings
Outgoing
FAX
Report
Print Outgoing FAX Report. FAX
Operation
Guide
Incoming
FAX
Report
Print Incoming FAX Report. FAX
Operation
Guide
xxv
> Menu Map
Counter
User Property
Cassette/MP Tray Settings
Report
Print
reports to
check the
machine
settings,
st atus, and
history.
Settings
for printing
reports can
also be
configured
.
Result
Report
Setting
Send
Result
Report
Automatically print a report of transmission result when a
transmission is complete.
8-6
FAX RX
Result
Report
When a fax is received, you can be notified by receipt result
report.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Job Finish
Notice
Setting
Attaches sent images to job finish notices. FAX
Operation
Guide
Sending
Log
History
Sending
Log
History
You can also send the log history to the specified
destinations manually.
8-7
Auto
Sending The job log reaches the set number of items, this function
automatically sends the log history to the specified
destinations whenever a set number of jobs has been logged.
8-7
Destina-
tion Set the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail
address can be set.
8-7
Job Log
Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log
histories by E-mail.
8-7
Personal
Informa-
tion
Select whether to include personal information in the job log. 8-7
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Counter Printed Pages Check the number of sheets printed and printed coverage. 3-16
Scanned Pages Check the number of sheets scanned. 3-16
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
User Property User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that
could be changed may be different depending on user access
privilege.
9-11
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Cassette 1 (to 3) Select type of paper in Cassette 1 (to 3). 8-9
Multi Purpose Tray Select type of paper in multi purpose tray. 8-10
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
xxvi
> Menu Map
Common Settings
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default
screen).
8-11
Sound Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations. 8-11
FAX Speaker Volume Adjust the volume of the speaker. FAX Operation
Guide
FAX Monitor Volume Adjust the volume of the monitor.
Original
Settings Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size. 8-12
Auto Detect Original
Size Set the original sizes for the device to detect automatically.
Paper
Settings Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size. 8-13
Media Type Setting Select weight for each media type. 8-14
Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and multi
purpose tray.
8-13
Paper Selection Set the default paper selection. 8-13
Media for Auto (Color) Select a default media type (Color) for auto paper selection
when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection.
8-13
Media for Auto (B&W) Select a default media type (Black and White) for auto paper
selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection.
8-13
Special Paper Action When printing on the special paper, such as Prepunched,
Preprint, and Letterhead, select whether or not to adjust the
paper orientation to the original orientation.
8-14
Show Paper Setup
Message Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper
setting when a new paper is set for each cassette.
8-14
xxvii
> Menu Map
Function
Defaults File Format Set the default type of the files. 8-16
Original Orientation Set the original orientation defaults. 8-16
Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. 8-16
File Separation Select the default file separation setting. 8-16
Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution. 8-16
Color Selection (Copy) Set the default color mode setting (at copy). 8-16
Color Select.(Send/
Store) Set the default color mode (send/store) setting. 8-16
Original Image
(Copy)
Set the default original document type for copying. 8-16
Original Image
(Sending/Storing)
Set the default original document type for sending/storing. 8-16
Backgrnd Density
(Copy) Set the default Backgrnd Density. 8-16
BackgrndDens.(Send/
Store) 8-16
EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default. 8-16
Prevent Bleed-thru
(Copy) Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy). 8-16
Prevent Bleed(Send/
Store) 8-16
Skip Blank Page (Copy) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings (Copy). 8-16
Skip Blank Page (Send/
Store) 8-16
FAX TX Resolution Select the default scanning resolution. FAX Operation
Guide
Zoom Set the zoom defaults. 6-27
Margin Set the default margin. 6-31
Erase Shadowed Areas Set the default Erase Shadowed Areas setting. 8-17
Continuous Scan (Copy) Set the continuous scan defaults. 6-35
Continuous Scan (FAX) Set the continuous scan defaults. FAX Operation
Guide
Continuous Scan (Send/
Store) Set the continuous scan defaults. 6-35
Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. 8-24
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. 6-38
E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default
subject and body) when sending the scanned originals by E-
mail.
6-50
FTP Encrypted TX Set the document encryption default at send. 6-51
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
xxviii
> Menu Map
Function
Defaults JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF
file.
6-57
XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function. 6-58
Detail
Settings Image
Quality Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS file quality. 8-18
PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting. 8-18
High
Comp. PDF
Image
Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF
files.
8-18
OCR Text
Recognitio
n
Set the default OCR Text Recognition. 8-18
Primary
OCR
Language
Set the default language of the text to be extracted. 8-18
OCR
Output
Format
Set the default OCR Output Format. 8-18
Detect
Items to
Skip
(Copy)
Select the default Detect Items to Skip (Copy) setting. 8-18
Detect
Items to
Skip
(Send/
Store)
Select the default Detect Items to Skip (Send/Store) setting. 8-18
Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs
from Document Box, computers, and FAX RX data.
8-18
Preset Limit Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. 8-18
Error
Handling Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the
selected paper sizes and media types.
8-19
Finishing Erro r Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Offset) is not
available for the selected paper size or media type.
8-19
No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing. 8-19
Stapling Li mit Error Set what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during
printing.
8-19
Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not
match paper size or type loaded in the specified paper source
while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or
multi-purpose tray.
8-19
Inserted Paper
Mismatch Set what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size
setting does not match the actual paper size that is fed.
8-19
Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and
White setting is used for printing once the color toner runs out.
8-19
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions. 8-20
Low To ner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator
when to order a toner when the toner is running low.
8-20
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
xxix
> Menu Map
Home
*1 ECOSYS M8130cidn
*2 ECOSYS M8124cidn
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter
characters.
2-10
USB Keyboard Type Select the type of USB keyboard that you want to use. 2-10
Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job. 8-20
Offset One Page Documents Set whether one-page documents are sorted. 8-21
Display Status/Log Set the display method of the Status/Log. 8-21
Function key Configure settings for function key on the operation panel. 8-21
Show Power Off Message Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in
power supply off.
8-21
Layout for ID Card Copy Set the print position of the scanned image when copying the
ID card.
8-22
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Customize Desktop Specify the function icons to display on the desktop. 3-8
Customize Taskbar*1
or taskbar screen*2
Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar. 3-8
Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen. 3-8
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
xxx
> Menu Map
Copy
Send
Document Box
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size
selection method when the zoom changes.
8-24
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is
selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is
performed.
8-24
Paper Size for Small Original Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original
is too small to be detected in the Auto Paper Selection mode.
8-24
Original Size of Undetected Original Set the original size of an undetected original. 8-24
Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a
subsequent copy job is reserved while printing is in progress.
8-24
Auto Image Rotation Action Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the
document to be printed is different from the orientation of the
paper.
8-24
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Dest. Check before Send Select whether to display the confirmation screen of
destinations after pressing the [Start] key when performing
sending jobs.
8-25
Entry Check for New Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the
entry check screen to check the entered destination.
8-25
Send and
Forward Forward Select whether to forward the original. 8-25
Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. 8-25
Color TIFF Compre s si on Select the compression method for sending the color
documents in the TIFF format.
8-25
Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send]
key.
8-25
New Destination Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination. 8-25
Recall Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send
screen.
8-25
Broadcast Tran smission Set whether to enable broadcast. 8-25
OCR Text Recogn ition Action Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action. 8-25
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Custom Box Configure settings for Custom Box. 8-26
Sub Address Box Configure settings for Sub Address Box. FAX
Operation
Guide
xxxi
> Menu Map
FAX
Application
Job Box Quick Copy Job
Retention To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum
number of stored jobs.
8-26
Deletion of Job
Retention This setting specifies that documents, such as Private
Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved
temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they
have been saved for a set time.
8-26
Storage Media Select which storage media to use. 8-26
Polling Box Configure settings for Polling Box. FAX
Operation
Guide
FAX Memory RX Box Configure settings for FAX Memory RX Box. Command
Center RX
User Guide
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
FAX Settings related to the fax function can be configured. FAX
Operation
Guide
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Application Configure settings for Application. 8-28
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
xxxii
> Menu Map
Internet
Address Book/One Touch
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Internet Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an
application.
8-29
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Address
Book/One
Touch
Address Book Configure settings for address book. 3-32
One To uch Key Configure settings for One Touch Key. 3-37
Address
Book
Defaults
Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address
book.
8-30
Address
Book Type This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types
of destination listed when the address book is displayed.
8-30
Edit
Restriction
Address
Book Restrict editing of the address book. 8-30
One Touch
Key Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. 8-30
Print List You can print the list of destinations registered in the Address
Book.
FAX
Operation
Guide
xxxiii
> Menu Map
User Login/Job Accounting
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
User Login/
Job
Accounting
User Login
Setting User Login
Administration This enables user login administration. 9-5
Local User List You can register, edit and delete users. 9-7
ID Card
Settings Keyboard
Login When ID card authentication is enabled,
select whether or not login by keyboard is
allowed.
9-26
Additional
Authenticat
ion
Select whether or not to require password
entry after authenticating by ID card.
9-26
PIN Code Authorization Select whether or not to use PIN Code
Authorization.
9-26
Simple
Login
Settings
Simple
Login Select whether or not simple login is
enabled.
9-23
Simple
Login
Setup
Register users to use simple login. 9-23
Local Authorization Select whether or not to use Local
Authorization.
9-17
User
Account
Lockout
Settings
Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy
is enabled.
9-6
Lockout
Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to
which the account lockout is applied.
9-6
Locked out
Users List Displays a list of locked out users. 9-6
Group
Authorizati
on Set.
Group
Authorizati
on
Set restrictions of the machine usage by
each individual group registered in the
authentication server.
9-17
Group List Register the groups that are restricted the
machine usage.
9-18
Guest
Authorizati
on Set.
Guest
Authorizati
on
When User Login Administration is enabled,
set the functions that guest users who
cannot log in to the machine are allowed to
use.
9-20
Guest
Property Register guest user information and
functions that are restricted.
9-20
Obtain NW User Property Set the required information to obtain the
network user property from the LDAP server.
9-22
xxxiv
> Menu Map
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
User Login/
Job
Accounting
Job
Accounting
Setting
Job Accounting Enable job accounting. 9-30
Job Accounting Access Set the job accounting access. 9-30
Print Accounting Report The total pages counted of all relevant
accounts can be printed as an accounting
report.
9-43
Total Jo b Acc ounting Counting the Number of Pages Printed Total
Accounting.
9-43
Each Job Accounting This counts the number of pages for each
account and resets the counts by account.
9-43
Accounting List You can register, edit or delete accounts. 9-46
Default
Setting Apply Limit This specifies how the machine behaves
when the counter has reached the limit of
restriction.
9-39
Copier/
Printer
Count
method
You can select the management method for
the number of pages used for the copier and
printer, either combined or individually.
9-39
Counter
Limit When you add a new account, you can
change the default restrictions on the
number of sheets used.
9-39
Count by
Paper Size This counts the number of pages by paper
size.
9-39
Unknown User Settings This specifies the behavior for handling the
jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user
names or User ID.
9-46
xxxv
> Menu Map
Printer
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Printer Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands
oriented to other types of printers.
8-32
Color Setting You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black
and white.
8-32
EcoPrint EcoPrint saves toner when printing. 8-32
Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in
size, as the same size when printing.
8-32
Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode. 8-32
Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999. 8-32
Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape]. 8-32
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters
that can be printed in a line for an A4 page (80 characters at
10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10 pitch).
8-32
Form Feed Timeout When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically
prints paper. Set this waiting time.
8-32
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line
feed code (character code 0AH).
8-32
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the
character return code (character code 0DH).
8-33
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed. 8-33
User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is
displayed.
8-33
MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to
be given to that MP tray in the paper feed.
8-33
Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper
when the paper source and type are specified.
8-33
Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the
paper source while printing.
8-33
Resolution Set the resolution used for printing. 8-33
KIR Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting. 8-33
Gloss Mode Glossiness of printed matter can be increased. 8-34
Printing Job Terminator Set the condition to be regarded as the job end if the print job
has not been processed to the end due to the usage
environment or for other reasons.
8-34
xxxvi
> Menu Map
System/Network
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
System/
Network Network Host Name Check the host name of the machine. 8-35
Wi-Fi Direct Settings Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct. 8-35
Wi-Fi Settings Select whether to use Wi-Fi Settings. 8-36
Wired
Network
Settings
TCP/IP
Setting Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol. 8-41
LAN
Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to
be used.
8-43
Bonjour Protocol
Settings Select whether to use Bonjour. 8-43
Available
Network
(Wi-
FiDirect)
Select whether or not Wi-FiDirect is enabled. 8-43
Available
Network
(Wi-Fi)
Select whether or not Wi-Fi is enabled. 8-43
Available
Network
(Wired
Network)
Select whether or not Wired Network is
enabled.
8-43
IPSec Select whether to use IPSec. 8-43
Protocol
Settings NetBEUI Selects whether to receive documents using
NetBEUI. *1
8-44
LPD Selects whether to receive documents using
LPD. *1
8-44
SMTP (E-
mail TX) Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP. 8-44
POP3 (E-
mail RX) Select whether to receive E-mail using
POP3.
8-44
FTP Client
(Transmissi
on)
Select whether to send documents using
FTP.
8-44
FTP Server
(Reception) Select whether to receive documents using
FTP. *1
8-44
SMB Client
(Transmissi
on)
Select whether to send documents using
SMB.
8-44
WSD Scan Select whether to use WSD Scan. *1 8-45
WSD Print Set whether to use our proprietary web
services. *1
8-45
xxxvii
> Menu Map
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
System/
Network Network Protocol
Settings DSM Scan Select whether to use DSM scan. 8-45
LDAP Select whether to use LDAP. 8-45
SNMP Select whether to communicate using
SNMP. *1
8-45
SNMPv3 Select whether to communicate using
SNMPv3. *1
8-45
HTTP Select whether to communicate using HTTP.
*1
8-46
HTTPS Select whether to communicate using
HTTPS., *1*2
8-46
IPP Selects whether to receive documents using
IPP. *1
8-46
IPP over
SSL Selects whether to receive documents using
IPP over SSL. *1*2
8-47
RAWPort Selects whether to receive documents using
RAWPort. *1
8-47
ThinPrint Select whether to use ThinPrint. 8-48
Enhanced
WSD Set whether to use our proprietary web
services. *1
8-49
Enhanced
WSD over
SSL
Set whether to use our proprietary web
services over SSL. *1*2
8-49
eSCL Selects whether to receive scanned
documents using eSCL. *1
8-49
eSCL over
SSL Selects whether to receive scanned
documents using eSCL over SSL.
*1*2
8-50
Security
Settings SSL Select whether to use SSL for
communication. *3
8-50
IPP
Security Select the IPP security level. This setup is
available when SSL is [On]. *3
8-50
HTTP
Security Select the HTTP security level. This setup is
available when SSL is [On]. *3
8-50
SMTP
Security Select the communication protocol
according to the type of security employed
by the SMTP server.
8-50
Security
Settings POP3
Security
(User 1-3)
Select the communication protocol
according to the type of security employed
by the POP3 server.
8-50
Ping Checks if communication with the
destination by entering the host name or IP
address of the destination is possible.
8-50
Restart Network Restarts the network. 8-51
Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet
from an application.
8-51
xxxviii
> Menu Map
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
*2 In "Security Settings", set "Restart Network" to [On].
*3 After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
Changing Device Information (2-44)
[TCP/IP Setting] (8-41)
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
System/
Network Optional Network Configure settings for the Optional Network. 8-53
Wireless Netw ork Configure settings for the Wireless Network
Settings.
8-53
Primary Network (Client) Select the Network Interface to be used
when the machine is connected to a
transmission function or external Address
Book operated as the client side.
8-54
Interface
Block
Setting*3
USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB
host).
8-54
USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface
connector (USB Device).
8-54
USB Storage This locks and protects the USB memory
slot.
8-54
Option Interface (Slot 1
and 2) This locks and protects the optional interface
slots.
8-54
Bluetooth Settings Set the Bluetooth keyboard. 8-55
Security Level Specify the security level. 8-55
Restart Restart the CPU without turning the power
switch off.
8-55
RAM Disk Settings Create a RAM disk and set its capacity. 8-56
Data
Security SSD Initialization Initialize data saved on an optional SSD. 8-57
Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in
the machine to the factory defaults.
8-57
OCR Dictionary Installation Install the OCR Dictionary. 8-58
Optional Function You can use the optional applications
installed on this machine.
8-58
Remote Services Settings Select whether to use Remote Services
Settings.
8-59
FAX
Server
Settings
FAX Server Select whether to use FAX Server. 8-59
Address Settings Set a prefix, suffix, and domain added to
Destination
8-59
File Format Select the default file setting. 8-59
Address Book Defaults Set an external Address Book to be used. 8-59
NFC Configure NFC settings. 8-59
xxxix
> Menu Map
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Date/
Timer/
Energy
Saver
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the
machine.
8-60
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. 8-60
Ti me Zone Set the time difference from GMT. 8-60
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically
reset settings and return to the default setting.
8-60
Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time
to wait before Auto Panel Reset.
8-60
Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode. 8-60
Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following
functions individually.
8-60
Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep. 8-61
Energy Saver Recove r y
Level Select the method of recovery from energy saver. 8-61
Auto Error Clear In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error
after a set amount of time elapses.
8-61
Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time
to wait before automatically clearing errors.
8-61
Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal
mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode and then
left unused.
8-62
Unusable Time This feature sets a time period during which the machine will
not control received faxes.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Ping Timeou t Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in
"System/Network".
8-62
xl
> Menu Map
Adjustment/Maintenance
System Menu Settings Description Reference
Page
Adjust-
ment/Main-
tenance
Density
Adjust-
ment
Copy Adjust copy density. 8-63
Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in
Document Box.
8-63
FAX Adjust overall scan density when sending a FAX to be darker
or lighter.
FAX
Operation
Guide
Sharpness
Adjust-
ment
Copy Sharpen or blur overall image outlines of text/fine lines during
copying.
8-63
Send/Box Adjust sharpness of the text/fine line when sending the
scanned images to the specified destination or storing them in
the Document Box.
8-63
Contrast Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies. 8-63
Send Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents
are sent or saved in a document box.
8-63
Back-
ground
Density
Adjust-
ment
Copy
(Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment
during copying.
8-63
Send Box
(Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending
images or storing them in the Document Box.
8-63
Toner Save
Level
(EcoPrint)
Copy Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) at the time of
copying.
8-63
Printer Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) at the time of
the printing.
8-63
Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by
the machine to determine whether the original is color or black
and white in Auto Color Selection Mode.
8-63
Correcting Black Lines Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which
may appear on the image, when the document processor is
used.
8-64
Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel. 8-64
Color Registration Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan,
magenta and yellow to correct color drift.
8-64
Tone Curve Adjustment Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original
tone.
8-64
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. 11-30
Auto Drum Refresh Set the execution duration of auto drum refresh. 11-32
Calibration Adjust color drift and hue of printed images. 8-64
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout. 8-64
xli
> Overview
Overview
This machine provides standard copy and print functions, and a scanned image can be sent to an E-mail recipient as an
attachment or to a computer on the same network. On products with a FAX function, it is also possible to use the fax
function.
NOTE
• For each of the functions, refer to the following:
Security: Strengthen security (xliv)
Application: Application (2-54)
Command Center RX: Command Center RX (2-42): Command Center RX User Guide
Document Box Function: Using Document Boxes (3-48)
Copy Function: Copying (5-12)
Printer Function: Printing from PC (4-6)
Transmission Function: Frequently-Used Sending Method (5-14)
USB Memory: Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) (5-47)
FAX function: FAX Operation Guide
• Please read this information before using your machine.
Safety Precautions (1-1)
• To prep ar e the de vice for use, includ ing setting up ca ble co nnec tions and installing software, refer to
the following.
Installing and Setting up the Machine (2-1)
• To learn how to lo ad p aper, set up shared folders, and add addresses t o the addres s book, refer to the
following.
Preparation before Use (3-1)
You can apply the various
machine securitylevels to
your specific needs.
You can expand the
machine functions
according to your needs.
Operations from your PC
Copy functions
Printer functions
Fax functionsUSB memorySend functions
Document Box functions
Original Electronic data Fax dataUSB memory
Output Data
Application
SecurityInput Data
Command Center RX This function serves a variety of purposes,
including saving data in the machine and on a
USB memory stick.
You can check the status and change
the settings of the machine from a
Web browser on your computer.
xlii
> Machine Features
Machine Features
The machine is equipped with many useful functions.
Advanced Setting of Functions (6-1)
Here are some examples.
Optimize your office workflow
Access to frequently used functions
with just one touch (Favorites)
You can preset frequently used functions.
Once you register frequently used
settings as favorite, you can call up the
settings easily. Using this favorite brings
the same results even if operated by
another person.
Recalling Frequently Used Functions
(Favorites) (3-41)
Interrupt other running jobs and
execute your copy job immediately
Inter (Interrupt Copy)
You can interrupt other running jobs and
execute your copy job immediately.
When other users are copying a large
number of sheets, this function allows you
to interrupt those jobs and make your
copies immediately. When the interruption
copy ends, the machine resumes the
paused print jobs.
Interrupt Copy (5-13)
Scan originals of different sizes at a
time (Mixed Size Originals)
It is useful when preparing conference
materials.
You can set the different sized originals at
one time so you don't need to reset the
originals regardless of size.
[Mixed Size Originals] (6-7)
Optimize your office workflow
Scan a large nu mb er of origin als in
separate batches and produce as one
job (Continuous Scan )
It is useful when preparing many-page
handouts.
When a large number of originals cannot
be placed in the document processor at
one time, the originals can be scanned in
separate batches and then copied or sent
as one job.
[Continuous Scan] (6-35)
Send one time with multiple sending
options (Multi Sending)
You can send a same document to the
multiple destinations using a different
method.
You can specify multiple destinations of
different send methods such as E-mail,
SMB, and Fax.
You can reduce your workflow by sending
a job at once.
Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) (5-23)
Save frequently used d ocu ments in
the machine (Documen t Box)
You can save the frequently used
document in the machine and print it
when needed.
Using Document Boxes (3-48)
1 to 10
1
1 to 30
1
11 to 20
11
21 to 30
21
xliii
> Machine Features
Save energy and cost
Save energ y as needed
(Energy Saver function)
The machine is equipped with an Energy
Saver function that automatically goes to
Sleep Mode.
Energy Saver function (2-22)
Reduce paper use
(Paper Saving Printing)
You can print originals on both sides of
the paper. You can also print multiple
originals onto one sheet.
[Combine] (6-29)
[Duplex] (6-32)
Skip blank pages when printing
(Skip Blank Page)
When there are blank pages in a scanned
document, this function skips the blank
pages and prints only pages that are not
blank.
[Skip Blank Page] (6-40)
Create attractive documents
Prevent image bleed-throu gh
(Prevent Bleed-through)
Hides background colors and image
bleedthrough
[Prevent Bleed-through] (6-26)
when scanning thin original.
Off
xliv
> Machine Features
Strengthen security
Password-protect a PDF file
(PDF Encryption Functions)
Use the PDF format's password security
options to restrict document viewing,
printing and editing.
[Encrypted PDF Password] (6-56)
Protecting the Data on an SSD
(Encryption/Overwrite Deletion)
You can overwrite the unnecessary data
that remains on the SSD automatically.
To prevent an external leakage, the
machine is able to encrypt data before
writing it to the SSD.
[Data Security] (8-57)
Prevent loss of finished d ocu ments
(Private Print)
Temporarily saving print jobs in the main
unit document box and outputting them
when in front of the device can prevent
documents from being taken by others.
Printing Documents from Private Print
Box (5-40)
Strengthen security
Log in by ID card
(Card Authentication Kit)
You can log in simply by touching an ID
card. You don't need to enter your user
name and password.
Card Authentication Kit(B) <Card
Authentication Kit> (12-3)
Strengthen security (Settings for
Administrator)
Various functions are available for
administrators to strengthen security.
Strengthening the Security by the
Administrator (2-41)
OK !
xlv
> Machine Features
Use functions more efficiently
Expand functions as necessary
(Applications)
The functionality of the machine can be
expanded by installing applications.
Applications that help you perform your
daily more efficiently such as a scan
feature and an authentication feature are
available.
Installing Applications (2-54)
Inst all the machine without conce rning
the network cables (Wireless Network)
If there is a wireless LAN environment, it
is possible to install the unit without
worrying about the network wiring.
Wireless Network Settings (2-15)
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (2-19)
Setting NFC (2-21)
Use USB memory
It is useful when you need to print
documents outside your office or you
cannot print documents from your PC.
You can print the document from the USB
memory by plugging it directly into the
machine.
Original scanned at the machine can be
saved in the USB memory also.
Printing from Removable USB Memory
(5-49)
Use functions more efficiently
Specify image file format
(File Format)
You can select the various file formats
when sending/storing images.
[File Format] (6-43)
Scan the long original s
(Long Original)
You can scan the long originals such as
Contract and Data log.
[Long Original] (6-55)
Perform remote operation (Command
Center RX)
You can access to the machine remotely
to print, send or download data.
Administrators can configure the machine
behavior or management settings.
Command Center RX (2-42)
xlvi
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Color and Image Quality Functions
The machine is equipped with various color and image quality functions. You can adjust the scanned image as desired.
Basic Color Modes
For details on modes that can be selected when sending/storing, refer to the information below.
[Color Selection] (6-19)
Color mode Description Reference image Reference
page
Before After
Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether a
document being scanned is color or black
& white.
6-19
Full Color Scans a document in full color. 6-19
Grayscale Scans a document in grayscale. 6-19
Black & White Scans a document in black & white. 6-19
xlvii
> Color and Image Quality Functions
Adjusting Image Quality and Color
To adjust the image quality or color of an image, use the following functions.
I want to... Sample image Function Reference
Page
Before After
Adjust the color precisely.
Adjust the density. Density 6-16
Adjust the image quality precise ly
Emphasize or blur the image
outline.
Example: Emphasize the image
outlines
Sharpness 6-22
Adjust the difference betwee n
dark and light parts of the image. Contrast 6-23
Darken or lighten the background
(the area with no texts or images)
of a document.
Example:Lightening the
background
Background Density
Adjustment
6-24
Prevent bleed-through in 2-side d
originals. Prevent Bleed-thru 6-26
Adjust the scanned image
Decrease the file size and
produce the characters clearly. File Format
[High Comp. PDF]
6-43
xlviii
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Guides Provided with the Machine
The following guides are provided with the machine. Refer to each guide as needed.
The contents of the guides are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement of machine
performance.
Printed guides
Guides (PDF) on the DVD (Product Library)
Start using the
machine quickly Quick Guide
Explains how to use basic functions of the machine, how to use convenient features, how
to perform routine maintenance, and what to do when problems occur.
For safe use of the
machine Safety Guide
Provides safety and cautionary information for installation environment and use of the
machine. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Safety Guide (ECOSYS M8124cidn/ECOSYS M8130cidn)
Indicates the space required for machine installation, and describes the cautionary labels
and other safety information. Be sure to read this guide before using the machine.
Use the machine
thoughtfully Machine’s Operation Guide (this Guide)
Explains how to load paper and perform copy, print and scan operations, and indicates default
settings and other information.
Use the fax functions FAX Operation Guide
Explains how to use the fax function.
Use the ID card Card Authentication Kit (B) Operation Guide
Explains how to perform authentication using the ID card.
Strengthen security Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide
Explains how to introduce and use the Data Security kit (E), and how to overwrite and encrypt
data.
Easily register
machine information
and configure
settings
Comman d Center RX User Guide
Explains how to access the machine from a Web browser on your computer to check and change
settings.
Print data from a
computer Printer Driver User Guide
Explains how to install the printer driver and use the printer function.
Directly print a PDF
file KYOCERA Net Direct Print Operation Guide
Explains how to print PDF files without launching Adobe Acrobat or Reader.
Monitor the machine
and printers on the
network
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Explains how to monitor your network printing system (the machine) with KYOCERA Net Viewer.
xlix
> Guides Provided with the Machine
Install the following versions of Adobe Reader to view the manuals on the DVD.
Version 8.0 or later
Scan images and
save with information File Management Utility User Guide
Explains how to use File Management Utility to set various parameters and send and save
scanned documents.
Adjust the print or
scan position PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference
Describes the native printer language (PRESCRIBE commands).
PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference
Describes the PRESCRIBE command functions and control for each type of emulation.
l
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Structure of the guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.
Chapter Description
1Safety Precautions Provides precautions regarding use of the machine and trademark information.
2Installing and Setting up the
Machine This chapter provides information for the administrator of this machine, such as
part names, cable connection, and software installation.
3Preparation before Use Explains preparations and settings that are required in order to use the machine,
such as how to use the operation panel, how to log in and log out, how to load
paper, how to create an address book, etc.
4Operation on PC Explains functions that are available when the machine is used as a printer.
5Operation on the Machin e Explains the basic procedures for using the machine, such as placing originals,
making copies, sending documents, and using document boxes.
6Advanced Setting of Functions Explains convenient functions that are available on the machine.
7Managing Jobs, Consumables,
and Devices Explains how to check the status of a job and the job history, and how to cancel
jobs being printed or waiting to print. Also explains how to check paper and toner
levels, how to check the device status, and how to cancel fax transmission.
8System Menu Explains System Menu and how it relates to the operation of the machine.
9User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login, Job
Accounting)
Explains user login and job accounting.
10 Maintenance Explains daily maintenance procedures, and how to replace and replenish
consumables.
11 Troubleshooting Explains what to do when toner runs out, an error is displayed, or a paper jam or
other problem occurs.
12 Appendix Provides information on media types and paper sizes, and gives a glossary of
terms. Explains how to enter characters, and lists the specifications of the
machine.
li
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions Used in This Guide
Adobe Reader XI is used as an example in the explanations below.
Certain items are indicated in this guide by the conventions described below.
NOTE
The items that appear in Adobe Reader vary depending on how it is used. If the Table of Contents or tools do
not appear, refer to Adobe Reader Help.
Convention Description
[Word] Indicates keys and buttons.
"Regular" Indicates a message or setting.
CAUTION
Refer to
Click an item in the Table of
Contents to jump to the
corresponding page.
Click to move from the current page to the previously
displayed page. This is convenient when you want to return
to the page from which you jumped to the current page.
IMPORTANT
Indicates operational
requirements and restrictions
to operate the machine
correctly, and avoid damage
to the machine or property.
NOTE
Indicates supplemental
explanations and reference
information for operations.
Click the underlined text to
jump to the corresponding
page.
Indicates that personal injury
or mechanical damage may
result from insufficient
attention to or incorrect
compliance with the related
points.
lii
> About the Operation Guide (this Guide)
Conventions used in procedures for operating the machine
In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:
Size and Orientation of Originals and Pap er
Original sizes and paper sizes such as A4, B5, and Letter can be used in both the horizontal and vertical orientations. To
distinguish the orientations when these sizes are used, "R" is added to sizes used in the horizontal orientation. In
addition, the following icons are used to indicate original and paper placement orientations on the touch panel.
*1Original/paper sizes that can be used vary depending on the function and source tray. For details, refer to the following:
Machine (12-23)
Actual procedure Procedure indicated in this guide
Press the [System Menu / Counter] key
Select [ ]
Select [Common Setti ngs]
Select [Sound]
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] >
[Sound]
Orientation Setting Position
(X=Length, Y=W idth) Icons on the touch
panel Indicated size in this
Guide*¹
Vertical Original A4, B5, Letter
Paper
Horizontal Original A4-R, B5-R, Letter-R
Paper
1-1
Safety Precautions >
1 Safety Precautions
This chapter explains the following topics:
Safety Conventions in This Guide ...................................................................................................................... 1-2
Environment ....................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Precautions for Use ........................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Laser Safety (Europe) ........................................................................................................................................ 1-5
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power ............................................................................... 1-7
Compliance and Conformity ............................................................................................................................... 1-8
Other precautions (for users in California, the United States) ............................................................................ 1-8
Warranty (the United States and Canada) ......................................................................................................... 1-9
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning ........................................................................................................... 1-10
EK1-ITB 2000 .................................................................................................................................................. 1-10
Legal Information ............................................................................................................................................. 1-10
Energy Saving Control Function ...................................................................................................................... 1-17
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function .................................................................................................................... 1-18
Resource Saving - Paper ................................................................................................................................. 1-19
Environmental benefits of “Power Management" ............................................................................................. 1-20
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program ........................................................................................................ 1-21
Wireless Connection (Mexico only) .................................................................................................................. 1-22
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped) ........................................................................ 1-23
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped) ........................................................................................................ 1-24
1-2
Safety Precautions > Safety Conventions in This Guide
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect the user,
other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The symbols and their
meanings are indicated below.
Symbols
The symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are indicated
inside the symbol.
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the prohibited
action are indicated inside the symbol.
The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed. Specifics of
the required action are indicated inside the symbol.
Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide are
illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).
Note
An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases because this machine
is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.
WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect
compliance with the related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage may result from insufficient attention to or
incorrect compliance with the related points.
... [General warning]
... [Warning of high temperature]
... [Warning of prohibited action]
... [Disassembly prohibited]
... [Alert of required action]
... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]
... [Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection]
1-3
Safety Precautions > Environment
Environment
The service environmental conditions are as follows:
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.
• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.
If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged.
During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health. If, however, the
machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely large number of
copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is suggested that
the room be properly ventilated.
Temperature 10 to 32.5 °C
Humidity 10 to 80%
1-4
Safety Precautions > Precautions for Use
Precautions for Use
Cautions when handling consumables
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
Keep parts which contain toner out of the reach of children.
If toner happens to spill from parts which contain toner, avoid inhalation and ingestion, as well as contact with your eyes
and skin.
• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of water. If
coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the contents of
your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining tenderness,
contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.
Do not attempt to force open or destroy parts which contain toner.
Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner
container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.
Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40 °C while avoiding sharp changes of temperature
and humidity.
If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi Purpose
(MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.
1-5
Safety Precautions > Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser Safety (Europe)
Laser radiation could be hazardous to the human body. For this reason, laser radiation emitted inside this machine is
hermetically sealed within the protective housing and external cover. In the normal operation of the product by user, no
radiation can leak from the machine.
This machine is classified as Class 1 laser product under IEC/EN 60825-1:2014.
Caution: Performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
Regarding CLASS 1 laser products, information is provided on the rating label.
1-6
Safety Precautions > SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)
1. Safety of laser beam
This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the product is
safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a protective housing and
sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.
2. The CDRH Act
A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological Health
(CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in the U.S. without
certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown below indicates
compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States. On this
machine, the label is on the right.
3. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.
4. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.
ECOSYS xxxxxxxx
1-7
Safety Precautions > Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection
of Power
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional switches and
are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.
Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l'appareil hors tension. Les interrupteurs
sur l'appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l'appareil hors tension.
1-8
Safety Precautions > Compliance and Conformity
Compliance and Conformity
Hereby, KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. declares that the radio equipment type ECOSYS M8124cidn and ECOSYS
M8130cidn are in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following internet address:
https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/service/dlc.html
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.
CAUTION - The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includingThe
above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Can interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all
persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter.
1059B-2R6A0881 is the module's certification number.
The above statements are valid only in the United States of America and Canada.
NOTE - Use shielded interface cables.
Other precautions (for users in California, the
United States)
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Module name Software Ver. Frequency band in
which the radio
equipment operates:
Maximum radio-frequency power
transmitted in the frequency band in which
the radio equipment operates:
IB-51(option) 2.2.6 2.4GHz 100mW
IB-36(option) 2014.12 2.4GHz 100mW
1-9
Safety Precautions > Warranty (the United States and Canada)
Warranty (the United States and Canada)
ECOSYS M8130cidn/ECOSYS M8124cidn
COLOR MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the "Customer") of a new
KYOCERA MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.
In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the
Authorized KYOCERA Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the KYOCERA Dealer is
not able to provide service, write to KYOCERA at the address below for the name and address of
the Authorized KYOCERA Dealer in your area, or check KYOCERA's website at
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com for KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. or
www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.ca for KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress,
(b) have used parts or supplies which are not genuine KYOCERA brand parts or supplies, (c) have
been installed or serviced by a technician not employed by KYOCERA or an Authorized KYOCERA
Dealer, or (d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.
This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of KYOCERA.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED
WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR, ANY INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF
THE USE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. and KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada, Ltd.
(both referred to as "KYOCERA") warrant the Customer's new Color Multifunctional Product (referred
to as "MFP"), and the new accessories installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any
defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year, or 200,000 copies/prints from date of
installation, whichever first occurs. In the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective
within the warranty period, KYOCERA's only obligation and the Customer's exclusive remedy shall
be replacement of any defective parts. KYOCERA shall have no obligation to furnish labor.
1-10
Safety Precautions > Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low. It may not be limited to these items. Do
not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/scanned.
• Paper money
• Bank note
• Securities
•Stamp
• Passport
• Certificate
Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.
EN ISO 7779
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung 3. GPSGV, 06.01.2004: Der höchste Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB (A) oder
weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.
EK1-ITB 2000
Das Gerät ist nicht für die Benutzung im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz vorgesehen. Um
störende Reflexionen am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz zu vermeiden, darf dieses Produkt nicht im unmittelbaren Gesichtsfeld
platziert werden.
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Copyright owner is
prohibited.
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are registered trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Excel and PowerPoint are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• AppleTalk, Bonjour, Macintosh, and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype Imaging
Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype GmbH.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered trademarks of
International Typeface Corporation.
• ThinPrint is a trademark of Cortado AG in Germany and other countries.
1-11
Safety Precautions > Legal Information
•UFST
TM MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.
• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or
registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD. in the United
States, Japan and other countries.
• ® 2011 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
• iPad, iPhone and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
• AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.
• iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license by
Apple Inc.
• Google and Google Cloud PrintTM are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Google Inc.
•Mopria
TM is registered trademarks of MopriaTM Alliance.
• Wi-Fi and Wi-Fi Direct are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance.
All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations TM and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.
GPL/LGPL
This product contains GPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html) and/or LGPL (http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.html)
software as part of its firmware. You can get the source code, and you are permitted to copy, redistribute and modify it
under the terms of GPL/LGPL.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:
This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)”
4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without
prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software
developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
1-12
Safety Precautions > Legal Information
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so
as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The
following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the
SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the
holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.
If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used.
This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the
package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e.
this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
1-13
Safety Precautions > Legal Information
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1. Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a special format as
well as the UFST Software.
2. You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles and
versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary business or
personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype Imaging. Under the terms of
this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three printers. If you need to have access to the
fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multiuser license agreement which can be obtained from
Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights
are granted to you other than a License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3. To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other proprietary
information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable procedures regulating access
to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4. You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup copy. You
agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the original.
5. This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated. This License
may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not
remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this License expires or is terminated, you
shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the Software and Typefaces and documentation as
requested.
6. You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the Software.
7. Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in accordance with
Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in material and workmanship.
Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a particular
purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8. Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and Typefaces is
repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or consequential
damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and Typefaces.
9. Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10.You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior written
consent of Monotype Imaging.
11.Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate.
Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in
FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12.You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms and
conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this Agreement. No
change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized representatives of each party.
By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and conditions of this Agreement.
Knopflerfish License
This product includes software developed by the Knopflerfish Project.
http://www.knopflerfish.org
Copyright 2003-2010 The Knopflerfish Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
1-14
Safety Precautions > Legal Information
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
- Neither the name of the KNOPFLERFISH project nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
1-15
Safety Precautions > Legal Information
Apache License (Version 2.0)
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
“License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
“Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.
“Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are
under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of
fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.
“You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
“Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source
code, documentation source, and configuration files.
“Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including
but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
“Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as
indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
“Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an
original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
“Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or
additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For
the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the
Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code
control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of
discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”
“Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce,
prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such
Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a
perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent
license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license
applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was
submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent
infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date
such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with
or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
(a)You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
(b)You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
(c)You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark,
and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
1-16
Safety Precautions > Legal Information
(d)If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute
must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices
that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text
file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the
License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an
addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be
construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as
a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated
in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any
additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any
separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and
reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and
each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible
for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your
exercise of permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or
otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing,
shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential
damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including
but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other
commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose
to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on
Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold
each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your
accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be
enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and
description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification
within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the
License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS
IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for
the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
1-17
Safety Precautions > Energy Saving Control Function
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain amount of
time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions remain in a waiting state
but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the device within a set amount of
time.
Low Power Mode (2-22)
Sleep (2-23)
1-18
Safety Precautions > Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function
This device includes 2-sided printing as a standard function. For example, by printing two 1-sided originals onto a single
sheet of paper as a 2-sided print, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used.
[Duplex] (6-32)
Printing in duplex mode reduces paper consumption and contributes to the conservation of forest resources. Duplex
mode also reduces the amount of paper that must be purchased, and thereby reduces cost. It is recommended that
machines capable of duplex printing be set to use duplex mode by default.
1-19
Safety Precautions > Resource Saving - Paper
Resource Saving - Paper
For the preservation and sustainable use of forest resources, it is recommended that recycled as well as virgin paper
certified under environmental stewardship initiatives or carrying recognized ecolabels, which meet EN 12281:2002* or
an equivalent quality standard, be used.
This machine also supports printing on 64 g/m2 paper. Using such paper containing less raw materials can lead to
further saving of forest resources.
EN12281:2002 "Printing and business paper - Requirements for copy paper for dry toner imaging processes"
Consult your dealer or service representative for recommended paper types.
1-20
Safety Precautions > Environmental benefits of “Power Management"
Environmental benefits of “Power Management"
To reduce power consumption when idle, this machine is equipped with a power management function that
automatically activates energy-saving mode when the machine is idle for a certain period of time. Although it takes the
machine a slight amount of time to return to READY mode when in energy-saving mode, a significant reduction in
energy consumption is possible. It is recommended that the machine be used with the activation time for energy-saving
mode set to the default setting.
1-21
Safety Precautions > Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program
We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that this
product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.
1-22
Safety Precautions > Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
Wireless Connection (Mexico only)
The operation of this equipment is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) it is possible that this equipment or device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this equipment or device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
1-23
Safety Precautions > Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If equipped)
Security Precautions when Using Wireless LAN (If
equipped)
Wireless LAN allows information to be exchanged between wireless access points instead of using a network cable,
which offers the advantage that a WLAN connection can be established freely within an area in which radio waves can
be transmitted.
On the other hand, the following problems may occur if security settings are not configured, because radio waves can
pass through obstacles (including walls) and reach everywhere within a certain area.
Secretly Viewing Communication Contents
A third person with malicious objectives may intentionally monitor radio waves and gain unauthorized access to the
following communication contents.
• Personal information including ID, passwords, and credit card numbers
• Contents of email messages
Illegal Intrusion
A third party with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to personal or company networks and conduct the
following illegal actions.
• Extracting personal and confidential information (information leak)
• Entering into communication while impersonating a specific person and distributing unauthorized information
(spoofing)
• Modifying and retransmitting intercepted communications (falsification)
• Transmitting computer viruses and destroying data and systems (destruction)
Wireless LAN cards and wireless access points contain built-in security mechanisms to address these problems and to
reduce the possibility of these problems occurring by configuring the security settings of wireless LAN products when
the product is used.
We recommend that customers take responsibility and use their judgment when configuring the security settings and
that they ensure that they fully understand the problems that can occur when the product is used without configuring the
security settings.
1-24
Safety Precautions > Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
Limited Use of This Product (If equipped)
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect medical equipment. When using this product in a medical
institution or in the vicinity of medical instruments, either use this product according to the instructions and
precautions provided by the administrator of the institution or those provided on the medical instruments.
• Radio waves transmitted from this product may affect automatic control equipment including automatic doors and fire
alarms. When using this product in the vicinity of the automatic control equipment, use this product according to the
instructions and precautions provided on the automatic control equipment.
• If this product is used in devices that are directly related to service including airplanes, trains, ships, and automobiles
or this product is used in applications requiring high reliability and safety to function and in devices requiring accuracy
including those used in disaster prevention and crime prevention and those used for various safety purposes, please
use this product after considering the safety design of the entire system including adoption of a failsafe design and
redundancy design for reliability and safety maintenance of the entire system. This product is not intended for use in
applications requiring high reliability and safety including aerospace instruments, trunk communication equipment,
nuclear power control equipment, and medical equipment; hence, the decision as to whether to use this product in
these applications needs to be fully considered and determined.
2-1
Installing and Setting up the Machine >
2 Installing and Setting up
the Machine
This chapter explains the following topics:
Part Names (Machine Exterior) .......................................................................................................................... 2-3
Part Names (Connectors/Interior) ...................................................................................................................... 2-5
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached) ............................................................................................ 2-6
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices ..................................................................................................... 2-7
Connecting cable ............................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Connecting LAN Cable ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Connecting USB Cable ............................................................................................................................ 2-9
Connecting the Power Cable ................................................................................................................... 2-9
Power On/Off ................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power On ............................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Power Off ............................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Default Settings of the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 2-11
Setting Date and Time ..................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Network settings .............................................................................................................................................. 2-13
Configuring the Wired Network .............................................................................................................. 2-13
Wireless Network Settings ..................................................................................................................... 2-15
Setting Wi-Fi Direct ................................................................................................................................ 2-19
Setting NFC ........................................................................................................................................... 2-21
Energy Saver function ...................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Low Power Mode ................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Energy Saver Recovery Level ............................................................................................................... 2-22
Sleep ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-23
Auto Sleep ............................................................................................................................................. 2-23
Sleep Rules (models for Europe) ........................................................................................................... 2-23
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe) ...................................................................... 2-24
Quick Setup Wizard ......................................................................................................................................... 2-25
Installing Software ............................................................................................................................................ 2-27
Software on DVD (Windows) ................................................................................................................. 2-27
Installing Software in Windows .............................................................................................................. 2-28
Uninstalling the Software ....................................................................................................................... 2-34
Installing Software on a Mac Computer ................................................................................................. 2-35
Setting TWAIN Driver ............................................................................................................................. 2-37
Setting WIA Driver ................................................................................................................................. 2-39
Installing the WSD Driver ....................................................................................................................... 2-40
Strengthening the Security by the Administrator .............................................................................................. 2-41
Command Center RX ....................................................................................................................................... 2-42
Accessing Command Center RX ........................................................................................................... 2-42
Changing Security Settings ................................................................................................................... 2-43
Changing Device Information ................................................................................................................ 2-44
Setting SMTP and E-mail ...................................................................................................................... 2-45
Migrating the Address Book ............................................................................................................................. 2-49
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC ................................................................................................... 2-49
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine ........................................................................................... 2-51
Application ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-54
Installing Applications ............................................................................................................................ 2-54
2-3
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
Part Names (Machine Exterior)
1 Document Processor
2Platen
3 Original Size Indicator Plates
4 Optical Lock Cover
5 Slit Glass
6 Operation Panel
7 Inner Tray
8 Front Cover
9 Cassette 1
10 Power Switch
11 USB Memory Slot (A1)
12 Right Cover 1
13 Handles
14 Job Separator Tray
1
3
5
4
6
7
8
913
12
11
10
2
14
2-4
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Machine Exterior)
15 Original width guides
16 Original table
17 Cleaning Cloth Compartment
18 Toner Container (Black)
19 Toner Container (Magenta)
20 Toner Container (Cyan)
21 Toner Container (Yellow)
22 Waste Toner Box
23 Paper Width Guide
24 Paper Length Guide
25 Multi Purpose Tray
26 Paper Width Guide
15
21
20
19
18
22
16
17
23 26
25
24
2-5
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
Part Names (Connectors/Interior)
1 USB Interface Connector (B1)
2 Network Interface Connector
3 Option Interface Slot 2
4 Option Interface Slot 1
5 Cassette Heater switch
5
1
2
3
4
2-6
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
Part Names (With Optional Equipments Attached)
1 Support Tray
2 Finisher Tray
3 Top cover
4 Staple Cover
5 Staple Cartridge Holder
6 Bridge Unit Cover
7 Cassette 2
8 Cassette 3
7 78
6
5
4
31 2
2-7
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Prepare the cables necessary to suit the environment and purpose of the machine use.
When Connecting the Machine to the PC via USB
When Connecting the Machine to the PC or Tablet by network cable, Wi-Fi, or Wi-Fi direct
NOTE
If you are using wireless LAN, refer to the following.
Wireless Network Settings (2-15)
USB
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗
㻺㼑㼠㼣㼛㼞㼗㻌㼏㼍㼎㼘㼑
㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㼍㼏㼏㼑㼟㼟㻌㼜㼛㼕㼚㼠
㼀㼍㼎㼘㼑㼠
㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕
㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
㼃㼕㻙㻲㼕㻌㻰㼕㼞㼑㼏㼠
㼏㼛㼚㼚㼑㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚
2-8
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting the Machine and Other Devices
Cables that Can Be Used
*1 Only on products with the fax function installed. For more information on using the Network FAX, refer to the FAX Opera-
tion Guide.
Connection Environment Function Necessary Cable
Connect a LAN ca bl e to the ma chine. Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1 LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
1000BASE-T)
Connect a USB cable to the machine. Printer USB 2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB
compliant, Max. 5.0 m)
IMPORTANT
Using a cable other than a USB 2.0 compatible cable may cause failure.
2-9
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Connecting cable
Connecting cable
Connecting LAN Cable
1Connect the cable to the machine.
1Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
2Configuring Network Settings
Network settings (2-13)
Connecting USB Cable
1Connect the cable to the machine.
1Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector located on the left side of the body.
2Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
Connecting the Power Cable
1Connect the cable to the machine.
Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-10
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Power On/Off
Power On/Off
Power On
1Turn the power switch on.
Power Off
1Turn the power switch off.
2Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
It takes a few minutes for power off.
CAUTION
If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power
switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the
power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution.
IMPORTANT
• If using the products equipped with the fax functi on, note that turning the machine off at the main
power switch disables fax transmission and reception.
• Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.
2-11
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Default Settings of the Machine
Default Settings of the Machine
Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions
as needed. The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being
installed. Also, configure the following settings if necessary.
NOTE
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
System Menu (8-1)
2-12
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Setting Date and Time
Setting Date and Time
Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine is used.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
2Configure the settings.
Select and set in the order [Time Zone] > [Date/Time] > [Date Format]
NOTE
To make changes after this initial configuration, refer to the following:
[Date/Timer/Energy Saver] (8-60)
The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.
Command Center RX User Guide
Item Description
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from
the list. If you select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings
for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you
perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on
the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed
in Western notation.
Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
2-13
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network settings
Network settings
Configuring the Wired Network
The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the Windows network.
The configuration methods are as follows
For other network settings, refer to the following:
[Network] (8-35)
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter a login user name and password > [Login] > [Network]
> [Wired Network Settings] > [TCP/IP Settings] > [IPv4 Settings]
Configuratio n Method Description Reference Page
Configuring the Connection
from the Operation Panel on
This Machine
Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a wizard-
style screen, without setting individually in System menu.
Quick Setup Wizard (2-
25)
Configuring Connections on
the Web Page
For the equipped network interface, the connection can be set by
using Command Center RX. For the optional IB-50, the connection
can be set by using the dedicated Web page.
Command Center RX
User Guide
IB-50 Operation Guide
Setting the Connection by
Using the Setup Utility of IB-
50
This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-50. You can use it on
Windows.
IB-50 Operation Guide
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator
privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and
password, and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you configure this setting.
The following cases, set the IP address of DNS server on the Command Center RX.
• When using the host name with "DHCP" setting set to [Off]
• When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically
Setting the IP Address of the DNS Server, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2-14
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Network settings
2Configure the settings.
When using DHCP server
[DHCP]: [On]
When setting the static IP address
[DHCP]: [Off]
[IP Address]: Enter the address.
[Subnet Mask]: Enter the subnet mask in decimal representation (0 to 255).
[Default Gateway]: Enter the address.
[Auto-IP]: [Off]
NOTE
When using the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in IP Address.
IMPORTANT
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the machine OFF and then
ON.
[Restart Network] (8-51)
2-15
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
Wireless Network Settings
When the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36 and IB-51) is installed on the machine and the connection
settings are configured, it is possible to print in a wireless network (wireless LAN) environment.
The configuration methods are as follows
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device
with the machine locally. The connection methods are wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-
Fi Direct).
Configuratio n Method Description Reference Page
Configuring the Connection
from the Operation Panel on
This Machine
Use Quick Setup Wizard when configuring the network in a wizard-
style screen, without setting individually in System menu.
Quick Setup Wizard (2-
25)
Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless Network to configure the network in
details from System menu.
[Wi-Fi Settings] (8-36)
[Wireless Network] (8-53)
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool
This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can configure the
connection according to the instructions provided by the wizard.
Setting the Connection by
Using the Wi-Fi Setup
Tool (2-15)
Configuring Connections on
the Web Page
For the IB-36, the connection can be set from the Command Center
RX.
Command Center RX
User Guide
For the IB-51, the connection can be set by using the dedicated web
page.
IB-51 Operation Guide
Setting the Connection by
Using the Setup Utility of IB-
51
This is the setup tool included in the CD of IB-51. You can use it on
both Windows and Mac OS.
IB-51 Operation Guide
NOTE
• The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is an option for some models and the Wireless Network Interface
Kit (IB-51) is a standard option. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representative for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
IB-51 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-10)
• When you want to switch to the network interface other than Wired (default) after installing an optional
Network Interface Kit (IB-50) and a Wireless Interface Kit (IB-36 or IB-51), select the desired setting on
"Primary Network (Client)".
[Primary Network (Client)] (8-54)
NOTE
• To use Wi-Fi Direct, confirm that the Wi-Fi Direct is enabled (Wi-Fi Direct is set to [On]) and Restart Network
from the operation panel, before your computer will be connected to this machine with Wi-Fi Direct.
• To use a wired LAN cable directly connected to the machine, the Auto-IP (Link-local) address will be assigned
to the machine and the computer. This machine applies Auto-IP as the default settings.
• Configure the settings on the operation panel if your computer supports WPS.
[Wi-Fi Settings] (8-36)
[Wireless Network] (8-53)
2-16
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
Wired Connection by Using LAN Cable
1Connect the machine with a computer.
1Connect the machine with a computer via LAN cable when the machine is powered on.
2Turn on the computer.
IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.
2Insert the DVD.
3Display the screen.
4Select [Maintenance].
5[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the auto run screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes (Allow)].
1Click [View License Agreement] and read the
License Agreement.
2Click [Accept].
12
2-17
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
6Configure the settings.
1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2[Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]
3[Easy setup] > [Next]
The machine is detected.
4Select the machine > [Next].
5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter [Login User Name] and [Login Password]
> [Next]. The login user name and password are both Admin.
6Configure the communication settings > [Next].
7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next].
The network is configured.
Wireless LAN Conne ct io n b y Usi ng Wi-F i Dire ct
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter a login user name and password > [Login] > [Network]
> [Wi-Fi Direct Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
2Configure the settings.
[On] > [OK]
3Restart the network.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
4Connect a computer or a handheld device with the machine.
Setting Wi-Fi Direct (2-19)
NOTE
• Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search the machine.
• If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or [Custom] as device
discovery method and specify the IP address or host name to search the machine.
2-18
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
5Insert the DVD.
6Display the screen.
7Select [Maintenance].
8[Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
9Configure the settings.
1[Do not use automatic configuration] > [Next] > [Next]
2[Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]
3[Advanced setup] > [Next]
Select [Express] or [Custom] as device discovery method. Specify the IP address or host name to search the machine.
4Select the machine > [Next].
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the auto run screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes (Allow)].
1Click [View License Agreement] and read the
License Agreement.
2Click [Accept].
12
2-19
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
5Select [Use the device settings.] on [Authentication mode], and enter [Login User Name] and [Login Password]
> [Next]. The login user name and password are both Admin.
6Configure the communication settings > [Next].
7Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next].
The network is configured.
Setting Wi-Fi Direct
Follow the configuration methods below when printing from the Wi-Fi Direct environment.
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter a login user name and password > [Login] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi
Direct Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
2Configure the settings.
[On] > [OK]
3Restart the network.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
4Specify the machine name from the computer or handheld device.
If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
Connecting to Computers or Handheld Devices that do not Support Wi-Fi Direct
The following procedure is an example for connecting to iOS handheld devices.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter a login user name and password > [Login] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi
Direct Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
2Configure the settings.
[On] > [OK]
3Restart the network.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
4[Home] key > [Wi-Fi Direct] (ECOSYS M8130cidn)
[Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Wi-Fi Direct] (ECOSYS M8124cidn)
NOTE
To use Wi-Fi Direct, Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) must be installed in the machine.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or
service representative for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
2-20
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
5Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.
6Configure the handheld device.
[Settings] > [Wi-Fi]
Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button
When your computer or handheld device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the
network using push button.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter a login user name and password > [Login] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi
Direct Settings] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
2Configure the settings.
[On] > [OK]
3Restart the network.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
4[Home] > [Wi-Fi Direct]
5Press the push button on the computer or handheld device and select [Push Button] on
the screen of operation panel simultaneously.
The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
IMPORTANT
You can connect up to three handheld devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting.
When the devices that support Wi-Fi Direct are connected, if you want to connect other
device, disconnect the already-connected devices from the network. The disconnection
methods are as follows:
• Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
• Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
Select [Home] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Connected Device List] > [Disconnect All]
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
[Wi-Fi Direct Settings] (8-35)
• Configuring auto disconnecting time from the Command Center RX
Command Center RX User Guide
2-21
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Wireless Network Settings
Setting NFC
NFC (Near Field Communication) is an international standard for near radio communication that is limited to a data
communication distance of 10 cm. Data communication can be performed by simply holding an NFC capable portable
terminal near the machine.
The configuration methods are as follows
Configuring Settings Using a Web Page
Settings can be configured from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Configuring the Connection from the Operation Panel on This Machine
NFC settings can be configured from the system menu.
[NFC] (8-59)
This section provides an example of how to configure NFC settings from the system menu.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Enter a login user name and password > [Login] > [Network]
> [NFC]
2Configure the settings.
[On] > [OK]
2-22
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Energy Saver function
If a certain period of time elapses after the machine is last used, the machine automatically enters Low Power Mode to
reduce power consumption. If the machine is not used while in sleep mode, the power automatically turns off.
Low Power Mode
If the machine is not operated for a certain period of time, the energy saver indicator will light up and the screen will
become dark to reduce power consumption. This status is referred to as Low Power Mode.
“Low power.” will be displayed on the screen.
Default preset time: 1 minute (factory default)
If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax
data arrives while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform one of the following actions.
• Press any key on the operation panel.
• Touch the touch panel.
• Open the document processor.
• Place originals in the document processor.
The machine will be ready to operate within the following time.
• ECOSYS M8124cidn: within 15.1 seconds
• ECOSYS M8130cidn within 17.6 seconds
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Energy Saver Recovery Level
This machine can reduce power consumption when recovering from Energy Saver Mode. For EnergySaver
RecoveryLevel, "Full Recovery", "Normal Recovery" or "Power Saving Recovery" can be selected. The factory default is
"Normal Recovery".
For more information on Energy Saver Recovery Level settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (2-25)
NOTE
If the Low Power Timer is equal to the Sleep Timer, a Sleep mode is preceded.
2-23
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Sleep
Select the [Energy Saver] key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save a maximum
amount of power except the Energy Saver indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.
If print data is received during Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing. Also when fax data arrives
while the machine is in Sleep, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
To resume, perform the following actions.
• Press any key on the operation panel.
• Touch the touch panel.
• Place originals in the document processor.
The machine will be ready to operate within the following time.
• ECOSYS M8124cidn: within 15.1 seconds
• ECOSYS M8130cidn: within 17.6 seconds
Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more slowly.
Auto Sleep
Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time.
The default preset time is 15 minutes.
To change the preset sleep time, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (2-25)
Sleep Rules (models for Europe)
You can set whether sleep mode operates for each function. When the machine enters sleep mode, the ID card cannot
be recognized.
For more information on Sleep Rules settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (2-25)
Energy Saver indicator
2-24
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Energy Saver function
Sleep Level (Energy Saver) (models except for Europe)
For sleep level, you can toggle between the following two modes: Energy Saver mode and Quick Recovery mode. The
default setting is Energy Saver mode.
Energy Saver mode reduces power consumption even more than Quick Recovery mode, and allows Sleep Mode to be
set separately for each function. The ID card cannot be recognized. To change the preset sleep time, refer to the
following:
To resume, select the [Energy Saver] key on the operation panel. If print data is received during Sleep, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.
For more information on Sleep Level settings, refer to the following:
Quick Setup Wizard (2-25)
NOTE
If the optional network interface kit is installed, Energy Saver cannot be specified.
2-25
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
Quick Setup Wizard
The Machine Setup Wizard is launched when the equipment is turned on for the first time after being installed. Before
using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions as
needed.
The following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.
*1 This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representa-
tives for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
*2 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wi-Fi].
*3 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].
*4 This function is displayed when [DHCP] is set to [On].
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Quick Setup Wizard]
NOTE
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.
For settings that are configurable from System Menu, refer to the following:
System Menu (8-1)
Function Item Description
FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings. FAX functions are available only on products with the fax
function installed.
FAX Operation Guide
Energy Saver Setup Configures energy saver function settings.
1. Sleep Mode Sleep Timer
Sleep Level (models except for Europe)
2. Low Power Mode Low Power Timer
Network Setup 1. Network Network Selection*1
Wi-Fi*2
DHCP*3
IP Address*4
Subnet Mask*4
Default Gateway*4
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
2-26
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Quick Setup Wizard
2Select a function.
3Configure the Custom Box.
Start the wizard. Follow the instructions on the screen to configure settings.
NOTE
If you experience difficulty configuring the settings, refer to the following:
Help Screen (3-13)
Item Description
End Exits the wizard. Settings configured so far are applied.
<< Previous Returns to the previous item.
Skip >> Advances to the next item without setting the current item.
Next > Advances to the next screen.
< Back Returns to the previous screen.
Finish Register the settings and exit the wizard.
2-27
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
Software on DVD (Windows)
You can use either [Express Install] or [Custom Install] can be selected for the installation method. [Express Install] is the
standard installation method. To install components that cannot be installed by [Express Install], use [Custom Install].
For details on installing using [Custom Install], refer to the following:
Install using [Custom Install]. (2-30)
Software Description Express
Install
KX DRIVER This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the machine.
Multiple page description languages (PCL XL, KPDL, etc.) are supported by
a single driver. This printer driver allows you to take full advantage of the
features of the machine.
Use this driver to create PDF files.
○
KX XPS DRIVER This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper Specification) format
developed by Microsoft Corporation.
-
KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-driver
(PCL/KPDL)
This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. There are some
restrictions on the machine features and option features that can be used
with this driver.
FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a computer software
application as a fax via the machine.
-
Kyocera TWAIN Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN-compliant
software application.
○
Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows that enables
reciprocal communication between an imaging device such as a scanner
and an image processing software application. An image can be acquired
using a WIA-compliant software application, which is convenient when a
TWAIN-compliant software application is not installed in the computer.
KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the network.
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing
reporting function.
○
File Management Utility This makes it possible to send and save a scanned document to a specified
network folder.
-
KYOCERA Net Direct Print This makes it possible to print a PDF file without starting Adobe Acrobat/
Reader.
-
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in fonts to be used in
a software application.
○
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
2-28
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software in Windows
Install using [Express Install].
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1. For details on installing using [Custom
Install], refer to the following:
Install using [Custom Install]. (2-30)
1Insert the DVD.
2Display the screen.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the auto run screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes (Allow)].
1 Click [View License Agreement] and read the License
Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
12
2-29
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3Select [Express Install].
4Install the software.
Select the model name of the machine. You can also select [Use host name for port name] and set to use the host
name of the standard TCP/IP port. (A USB connection cannot be used.)
When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be displayed. Select one of
the answer choices and click [OK].
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name. Installation may fail if the
host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine, verify that it is
connected to the computer via a network cable or a USB cable and that it is turned on and click. (Update).
• If the Windows security window appears, click [Install this driver software anyway].
• To install Status Monitor on versions of Windows prior to Windows 8, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET
Framework 4.0 beforehand.
1
2
3
2-30
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
5Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test page, click the "Print a
test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the
printer driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (2-37)
Install using [Custom Install].
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Insert the DVD.
2Display the screen.
NOTE
• Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, select [Cancel].
• If the auto run screen is displayed, click [Run setup.exe].
• If the user account management window appears, click [Yes (Allow)].
1 Click [View License Agreement] and read the License
Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
12
2-31
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3Select [Custom Install].
4Install the software.
1Select the device to be installed.
2Select the driver to be installed.
IMPORTANT
If Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct is enabled, be sure to specify the IP address for the port name. Installation may fail if the
host name is specified.
NOTE
• The machine cannot be detected unless it is on. If the computer fails to detect the machine, verify that it is
connected to the computer via a network cable and that it is turned on and click (Refresh). Click (Update).
• If the desired device does not appear, select [Add custom device] to display the list, and select the desired
device.
1
2
1
2
3
2-32
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3Click [Utility] tab and select the utility to be installed.
4Click [Install].
When you click [Install], a screen asking for your cooperation with data collection will be displayed. Select one of
the answer choices and click [OK].
NOTE
To install Status Monitor on versions of Windows prior to Windows 8, it is necessary to install Microsoft .NET
Framework 4.0 beforehand.
1
23
2-33
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
5Finish the installation.
When "Your software is ready to use" appears, you can use the software. To print a test page, click the "Print a
test page" checkbox and select the machine.
Click [Finish] to exit the wizard.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the printer
driver installation procedure.
If you are installing the TWAIN driver, continue by configuring the following:
Setting TWAIN Driver (2-37)
2-34
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Uninstalling the Software
Perform the following procedure to delete the Software with Product Library from your computer.
1Display the screen.
Perform the procedure below on the computer to select the software.
Click [Search] in charms, and enter "Uninstall Kyocera Product Library" in the search box. Select [Uninstall
Kyocera Product Library] in the search list. Software Uninstall Wizard appears.
2Uninstall the software.
Place a check in the check box of the software to be deleted.
3Finish uninstalling.
If a system restart message appears, restart the computer by following the screen prompts. This completes the
software uninstallation procedure.
NOTE
Uninstallation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [All Programs], [Kyocera], and [Uninstall
Kyocera Product Library] to display the Uninstall Wizard.
NOTE
• The software can also be uninstalled using the Product Library.
• In the Product Library screen, click [Uninstall], and follow the on-screen instructions to uninstall the software.
1
2
2-35
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing Software on a Mac Computer
The machine's printer functionality can be used by a Mac computer.
1Insert the DVD.
Double-click the [Kyocera] icon.
2Display the screen.
Double-click [ OS X x.x] depending on your Mac OS version.
3Install the software.
Install the printer driver as directed by the instructions in the installation software.
This completes the printer driver installation.
If a USB connection is used, the machine is automatically recognized and connected. If an IP connection is used,
the settings below are required.
NOTE
• Installation on Mac OS must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.
• When installing software on a Mac computer, set the machine's emulation to [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)].
[Printer] (8-32)
• If connecting by Bonjour, enable Bonjour in the machine's network settings.
[Bonjour] (8-43)
• In the Authenticate screen, enter the name and password used to log in to the operating system.
• When printing via AirPrint, you do not have to install the software.
12
2-36
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
4Configure the settings.
1Open System Preferences and add the printer.
2Select [Default], click the item that appears in "Name" and then select the driver.
3Select the options available for the machine.
4The selected printer is added.
NOTE
When using an IP connection, click [IP] and then enter the host name or IP address. The number entered in
"Address" will automatically appear in "Name". Change if needed.
1
1
2
1
2
4
3
2
1
2-37
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting TWAIN Driver
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in
the search list. TWAIN Driver setting screen appears.
2Click [Add].
2Configure the settings.
NOTE
In Windows 7, select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].
1 Enter the machine name.
2 Select this machine from the list.
3 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
6 Click [OK].
NOTE
When the machine's IP address or host name is unknown, contact Administrator.
1
2
3
4
5
6
2-38
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
3Finish registering.
NOTE
Click [Delete] to delete the added machine. Click [Edit] to change names.
2-39
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Setting WIA Driver
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in desktop charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box. Select [View
scanners and cameras] in the search list and then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
2Configure the settings.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter "Scanner" in [Program and File Search]. Click [View
scanners and cameras] in the search list and then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
1 Click the [Settings] tab.
2 Enter the machine IP addresses or host name.
3 When using SSL, select the checkbox beside SSL.
4 Set units of measurement.
5 Click [OK].
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
2-40
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Installing Software
Installing the WSD Driver
In Windows 8, Windows 8.1, and Microsoft Windows Server 2012
1From the desktop charms: [Search] > [Control Panel] > [Devices and Printers].
2Install the driver.
Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the "Devices and Printers" screen, the installation is
completed.
In Windows 7
1Display [Network] in the Start menu.
Click [Start] button on the Windows and then select [Network].
2Install the driver.
Right-click the machine's icon and then click [Install].
During the installation, double-click the icon shown on the task bar to display the "Driver Software Installation"
screen. When "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the [Driver Software Installation] screen, the
installation is completed. Installation is complete when "Your devices are ready to use" is displayed on the [Driver
Software Installation] screen.
In Windows 10
1In Windows, right-click the start button and then select the following: [Control Panel] >
[Devices and Printers].
2Install the driver.
Click [Add a device]. Select the machine's icon and then click [Next].
When the machine's icon is displayed in "Printers" on the [Devices and Printers] screen, the installation is
completed.
NOTE
When [Network] does not appear in the Start menu, perform the following procedure.
1Right-click [Start] and click [Property] in the menu that appears.
2Select the [[Start] menu] tab in the "Task bar and [Start] menu properties" screen, and click
[Customize].
3When the "Customize [Start] menu" screen appears, select the "Network" check box and click [OK].
NOTE
If the "User Account Control" window appears, click [Continue].
If the "Found New Hardware" window appears, click [Cancel].
2-41
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Strengthening the Security by the Administrator
Strengthening the Security by the Administrator
In addition to the information provided in this chapter, the administrator of this machine should check the following, and
strengthen the security as needed.
In addition, this machine is equipped with user authentication function, which can be configured to limit the access to this
machine to only those who have a registered login name and password.
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) (9-1)
*1 Optional Card Authentication Kit is required.
*2 Optional SSD is required.
*3 Optional Data Security Kit is required.
I want to... Function Name Reference page
Restrict the users of the machine. User Login 9-3
Authentication Security 9-6
Auto Panel Reset 8-60
ID Card Settings*1 9-26
Restrict the basic functions that can be
used. Local Authorization 9-17
Group Authorization Set 9-17
Guest Authorization Set 9-20
Prevent another user from handling the
documents stored in the machine. Custom Box*2 2-1
Prevent the data stored in the machine
from being leaked. Data Overwrite*3 Data Security Kit (E)
User Guide
Encrypt*3
PDF Encryption Functions 6-56
Completely delete the data on the
machine before di sposing of the
machine.
Data Sanitization 8-57
Protect the transmission from
interception and wiretapping. IPP over SSL 8-47
HTTPS 8-46
LDAP Security Command Center RX
User Guide
SMTP Security 8-50
POP3 Security 8-50
FTP Encrypted TX 8-17
Enhanced WSD (SSL) 8-49
IPSec 8-43
SNMPv3 8-45
2-42
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
Command Center RX
If the machine is connected to the network, you can configure various settings using Command Center RX.
This section explains how to access Command Center RX, and how to change security settings and the host name.
Command Center RX User Guide
Settings that the administrator and general users can configure in Command Center RX are as follows.
*1 The logged in user may not be able to configure some settings, depending on the user permissions.
Accessing Command Center RX
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password to login.
Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with
administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Item Description Administra
tor General
User
Device Information The machine's structure can be checked. ○○
Job Status Displays all job information, including print and scan jobs, storing
jobs, scheduled jobs, and job log history.
○○
Document Box Add or delete document boxes, or delete documents within a
document box.
○○
*1
Address Book Create, edit, or delete addresses and address groups. ○○
*1
Device Settings Configure the advanced settings of the machine. ○-
Function Settings Configure the advanced function settings. ○-
Network Settings Configure the network advanced settings. ○-
Security Settings Configure the security advanced settings. ○-
Management
Settings Configure the advanced management settings. ○-
NOTE
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted.
FAX Operation Guide
2-43
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
Examples: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)
https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
The web page displays basic information about the machine and Command Center RX as well as the current status of the
machine.
2Configure the function.
Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen.
Changing Security Settings
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
NOTE
If the screen "There is a problem with this website's security certificate." is displayed, configure the certificate.
Command Center RX User Guide
You can also continue the operation without configuring the certificate.
NOTE
To fully access the features of the Command Center RX pages, enter the User Name and Password to login.
Entering the predefined administrator password allows the user to access all pages, including Document Box,
Address Book, and Settings on the navigation menu. The factory default setting for the default user with
administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
2-44
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case
letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4Click [Security Settings].
2Configure the Security Settings.
From the [Security Settings] menu, select the setting you want to configure.
Changing Device Information
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
NOTE
For details on settings related to certificates, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2-45
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case
letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4From the [Device Settings] menu, click [System].
2Specify the host name.
Enter the device information, and then click [Submit].
Setting SMTP and E-mail
By configuring the SMTP settings, it is possible to send the images scanned by the machine as E-mail attachments and
to send E-mail notices when jobs have been completed.
To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
In addition, configure the following.
IMPORTANT
After changing the se tt in g , restart the netwo rk or tu rn th e mach in e OFF an d the n ON .
To rest art the network interface card, click [Reset] in the [Management Settings] menu, and t hen click
[Restart Network] in "Restart".
3
1
2
2-46
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
•SMTP settings
Item: "SMTP Protocol" and "SMTP Server Name" in "SMTP"
• The sender address when the machine sends E-mails
Item: "Sender Address" in "E-mail Send Settings"
• The setting to limit the size of E-mails
Item: "E-mail Size Limit" in "E-mail Send Settings"
1Display the screen.
Display the SMTP Protocol screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case
letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4From the [Network Settings] menu, click [Protocol].
1
2
2-47
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
2Configure the Settings.
Set "SMTP (E-mail TX)" to [On] in the "Send Protocols".
3Display the screen.
Display the E-mail Settings screen.
From the [Function Settings] menu, click [E-mail].
1
2
2-48
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Command Center RX
4Configure the Settings.
Enter "SMTP" and "E-mail Send Settings" items.
5Click [Submit].
Description Description
SMTP Set to send e-mail from the machine.
SMTP Protocol Displays the SMTP protocol settings. Check that "SMTP Protocol" is set
to [On]. If [Off] is set, click [Protocol] and set the SMTP protocol to [On].
SMTP Server Name*1 Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server.
SMTP Port Number Specify the port number to be used for SMTP. The default port number
is 25.
SMTP Server Timeout Enter the timeout period in seconds.
Authentication Protocol To use SMTP authentication, enter the user information for
authentication.
SMTP
Security
Set SMTP security.
Turn on "SMTP Security" in "SMTP (E-mail TX)" on the "Protocol
Settings" page.
Connection Test Tests to confirm that the settings are correct without sending the e-mail.
Domain Restriction To restrict the domains, click the [Domain List] and enter the domain
names of addresses to be allowed or rejected. Restriction can also be
specified by e-mail address.
POP3 POP3 Protocol You don't need to set the following items when you only enable the
function of sending e-mail from the machine. Set the following items if
you want to enable the function of receiving e-mail on the machine.
Command Center RX User Guide
Check Interval
Run once now
Domain Restriction
POP3 User Settings
E-mail
Send
Settings
E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size, in Kilobytes, of E-mail that can be sent. When
E-mail size is greater than this value, an error message appears and E-
mail sending is cancelled. Use this setting if you have set E-mail Size
Limit for SMTP server. If not, enter a value of 0 (zero) to enable E-mail
sending regardless of the size limit. Entering 0 (zero) sends the E-mail,
regardless of the size limitation.
Sender Address *1 Specify the sender address for when the machine sends E-mails.
Specify the e-mail address such as an address of the machine
administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered
correctly for SMTP authentication.
Sender address: Up to 128 characters
Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the
end of the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the
machine.
Signature: Up to 512 characters
Function Defaults Change the function default settings in [Common/Job Default Settings]
page.
2-49
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Migrating the Address Book
Migrating the Address Book
By using the machine's utility, you can smoothly migrate address books when the machine is to be replaced.
The Address Book registered on the machine can be backed up or migrated using KYOCERA Net Viewer on the
included DVD.
For details on operating the KYOCERA Net Viewer, refer to the following:
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
Backing Up Address Book Data to PC
1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2Create a backup.
1Right-click on the model name from which you want to back up the Address Book, and select [Advanced] - [Set
multiple devices].
2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
3Select destination device group and click [Next].
1
2
1
2
1
2
2-50
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Migrating the Address Book
4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5Select [Create from device] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target device], and then
click [Next].
6Select the model you want to back up, and click [Next].
NOTE
If the "Admin Login" screen appears, enter the "Admin Login" and "Login Password", and then click [OK]. The
default settings are as follows (Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive)).
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
1
2
1
3
2
1
2
2-51
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Migrating the Address Book
7Click on [Save to file].
8Specify the location to save the file, enter the file name, and then click [Save].
For "Save as type", make sure to select "XML File".
9After saving the file, always click [Cancel] to close the screen.
Please note that selecting [Finish] will write the data to the machine's Address Book.
Writing Address Book Data to the Machine
1Launch the KYOCERA Net Viewer.
2Load the Address Book data.
1Right-click on the model name to which you want to transfer the Address Book, and select [Advanced] - [Set
multiple devices].
1
2
2-52
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Migrating the Address Book
2Select [Custom Mode] and click [Next].
3Select destination device group and click [Next].
4Select [Device Address Book] and click [Next].
5Select [Create from file] and remove the checkmark from [Overwrite settings on target device], and then click
[Next].
Selecting the [Overwrite settings on target device] checkbox will overwrite the machine's Address Book from entry No.1.
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
3
2
2-53
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Migrating the Address Book
6Click [Browse] and select the backup Address Book file, and then click [Next].
7Click [Finish].
The write process of the Address Book data starts.
8Once the write process is complete, click [Close].
1
2
2-54
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Application
Application
The functionality of the machine can be expanded by installing applications.
Applications that help you perform your daily more efficiently such as a scan feature and an authentication feature are
available.
For details, consult your sales representative or dealer.
Installing Applications
To use applications, first install the application in the machine and then activate the application.
The procedure is as follows.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]
2Install the application.
1Select [ ] and/or [Menu] > [Add].
2Insert the removable memory containing the application to be installed into the USB Memory Slot.
3Select the application to be installed > [Install]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].
4Select [Yes] to display the removable memory screen.
Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take some time.
Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.
NOTE
You can install applications and certificates on the machine. The number of applications you can run may vary
according to the type of application.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
When the message "Removable Memory was recognized. Displaying files. Are you sure?" is displayed, select
[No]. If a confirmation message appears on the operation panel of the machine, select [No].
NOTE
• To install another application, repeat steps 2-3 and 2-4.
• To remove the removable memory, select [Remove Memory] and wait until the message "Removable Memory
can be safely removed." appears. Then remove the removable memory.
2-55
Installing and Setting up the Machine > Application
Uninstalling Applications
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]
2Deleting an Application.
1Select the application you want to delete > [ ].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].
2Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
3-1
Preparation before Use >
3 Preparation before Use
This chapter explains the following topics:
Using the Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................. 3-3
Assigning a Function to a Function Key ............................................................................................................. 3-4
Using the Operation Panel ................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Display the Home screen ......................................................................................................................... 3-6
Display for Device Information ................................................................................................................ 3-11
Functions key .......................................................................................................................................... 3-11
Displaying Keys That Cannot be Configured ......................................................................................... 3-12
Using the [Enter] Key ............................................................................................................................. 3-12
Using the [Quick No. Search] Key ......................................................................................................... 3-13
Help Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 3-13
Login/Logout .................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Login ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-14
Simple Login .......................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Logout .................................................................................................................................................... 3-15
Check the counter ............................................................................................................................................ 3-16
Loading paper .................................................................................................................................................. 3-17
Precaution for Loading Paper ................................................................................................................ 3-17
Selecting the paper feeder unit .............................................................................................................. 3-18
Loading in the Cassettes 1 (to 3) ........................................................................................................... 3-19
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC ................................................................... 3-22
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name .............................................................. 3-22
Making a note of the user name and domain name .............................................................................. 3-23
Configuring Shared Folder Access Permissions ................................................................................... 3-23
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder ............................................................... 3-24
Sharing File and Printers ....................................................................................................................... 3-27
Configuring Windows Firewall Settings ................................................................................................. 3-28
Adding a Destination ........................................................................................................................................ 3-32
Adding a Destination (Address Book) .................................................................................................... 3-32
Changing an Address Book Destination ................................................................................................ 3-36
Deleting an Address Book Destination .................................................................................................. 3-37
Assigning a Destination to a One Touch Key ......................................................................................... 3-37
Editing One Touch Key .......................................................................................................................... 3-38
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key ..................................................................................... 3-39
Using Command Center RX to Add Destinations to the Address Book ................................................. 3-40
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) ............................................................................................ 3-41
Adding to Favorites in Wizard Mode ...................................................................................................... 3-42
Adding to Favorites in Program Mode ................................................................................................... 3-43
Executing Favorites in Wizard Mode ..................................................................................................... 3-44
Executing Favorites in Program Mode ................................................................................................... 3-45
Editing a Favorite ................................................................................................................................... 3-45
Deleting a Favorite ................................................................................................................................. 3-45
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) .................................................................. 3-46
Adding Shortcuts .................................................................................................................................... 3-46
Edit the shortcut ..................................................................................................................................... 3-46
Deleting a Shortcut ................................................................................................................................ 3-47
Using Document Boxes ................................................................................................................................... 3-48
What is Custom Box? ............................................................................................................................ 3-48
What is Job Box? ................................................................................................................................... 3-48
What is Removable Memory Box? ........................................................................................................ 3-49
3-2
Preparation before Use >
The F Code Box, Polling Box, and FAX Memory Receive Box are for storing FAX data. ...................... 3-49
Using Machine Operations to Create a New Custom Box ..................................................................... 3-49
Using Command Center RX to Create a New Custom Box ................................................................... 3-51
Edit the custom box. .............................................................................................................................. 3-52
Deleting Custom Box ............................................................................................................................. 3-53
3-3
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
ECOSYS M8130cidn
1[Home] key: Displays the Home screen.
2[Status / Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.
3Function Key: These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be registered.
Assigning a Function to a Function Key
4[Job Separator] indicator: Lights when there is paper in the job separator tray.
5[Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
6[Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk, fax memory or USB memory (general
purpose item).
7[Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
8[Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
9[Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
10 [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
11 [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
12 [Authentication / Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log
out).
13 [Interrupt] key: Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
14 [System Menu / Counter] key: Displays the System Menu screen.
15 [Numeric Keypad] key: Numeric keys. Enter numbers and symbols.
16 Touch Panel: Displays buttons for configuring machine settings.
㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼡㼚㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻚
㻴㼛㼙㼑 㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚
㻯㼛㼜㼥
㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻛
㻶㼛㼎㻌㻯㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠
㻿㼑㼚㼐 㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙
㻌㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻶㼛㼎㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻲㻭㼄
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼍㼎㼘㼑
㻌㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥 㻼㼛㼘㼘㼕㼚㼓㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻸㼍㼚㼓㼡㼍㼓㼑 㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙
㻹㼑㼚㼡 㻲㼍㼢㼛㼞㼕㼠㼑㼟
㻭㼐㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟
㻮㼛㼤
㻵㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
16
15 14 13 12 11 10
987654
3
2
1
3-4
Preparation before Use > Assigning a Function to a Function Key
Assigning a Function to a Function Key
These keys enable various functions and applications, including copy and scan, to be registered. You can assign a
function or application to a function key for easy access to the applicable display screen.
The following functions are allocated to this machine but can be changed and register another function.
• [F1] (Function Key 1): Copy
• [F2] (Function Key 2): Send
• [F3] (Function Key 3): FAX (option)
1Display a screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]
2Configure the settings.
1Select the function key whose setting you want to change.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
3-5
Preparation before Use > Assigning a Function to a Function Key
2Select the function you want to assign to the key.
*1 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
*2 Displayed only when an optional SSD is installed.
*3 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
Function Description Reference
Page
None No function assigned. -
Copy Displays the Copy screen. 5-12
Send Displays the Send screen. 5-14
FAX Server*1 Displays the FAX Server screen. 5-24
FAX*1 Displays the FAX screen. FAX Operation
Guide
Custom Box*2 Displays the Custom Box screen. 3-48
Job Box Displays the Job Box screen. 5-40
Removable Memory Displays the Removable Memory screen. 5-47
Sub Address Box*1 Displays the Sub Address Box screen. FAX Operation
Guide
Polling Box*1 Operate the polling box. FAX Operation
Guide
Send to Me (E-mail)*3 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail address of the logged-
in user is set as the destination.
5-23
FAX Memory RX Box*1 Displays the FAX Memory RX box screen. Command
Center RX User
Guide
Favorites Calls up the registered program. 3-41
Application Name Displays the selected applications. 2-54
3-6
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Using the Operation Panel
Display the Home screen
This screen is displayed by selecting the [Home] key on the operation panel. Selecting an icon will display the
corresponding screen.
You can change the icons to display on the Home screen as well as its background.
Editing the Home Screen (3-8)
ECOSYS M8130cidn
*The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option settings.
Job
No. Item Description
1 Message Displays the message depending on the status.
2 Desktop Displays function. Registered function to favorites are also displayed. Icons that are not
displayed on the first page will appear by changing the page.
3 Screen-switching keys Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages. This is displayed when there are
multiple pages.
NOTE
You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving the finger sideways (i.e.
swiping).
4 Taskbar Displays task icons.
5 [Logout] Logout. This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
6 Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when user login administration is
enabled. Selecting "Login User Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.
㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼡㼚㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻚
㻴㼛㼙㼑 㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚
㻯㼛㼜㼥
㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻛
㻶㼛㼎㻌㻯㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠
㻿㼑㼚㼐 㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙
㻌㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻶㼛㼎㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻲㻭㼄
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼍㼎㼘㼑
㻌㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥 㻼㼛㼘㼘㼕㼚㼓㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻸㼍㼚㼓㼡㼍㼓㼑 㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙
㻹㼑㼚㼡 㻲㼍㼢㼛㼞㼕㼠㼑㼟
㻭㼐㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟
㻮㼛㼤
㻵㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
1
2
3
4
6
3
5
㻿㼑㼘㼑㼏㼠㻌㼠㼔㼑㻌㼒㼡㼚㼏㼠㼕㼛㼚㻚
㻴㼛㼙㼑 㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚
㻯㼛㼜㼥
㻿㼠㼍㼠㼡㼟㻛
㻶㼛㼎㻌㻯㼍㼚㼏㼑㼘
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
㻸㼛㼓㼛㼡㼠
㻿㼑㼚㼐 㻯㼡㼟㼠㼛㼙
㻌㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻶㼛㼎㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻲㻭㼄
㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥
㻾㼑㼙㼛㼢㼍㼎㼘㼑
㻌㻌㻹㼑㼙㼛㼞㼥 㻼㼛㼘㼘㼕㼚㼓㻌㻮㼛㼤
㻰㼑㼢㼕㼏㼑 㻸㼍㼚㼓㼡㼍㼓㼑 㻿㼥㼟㼠㼑㼙
㻹㼑㼚㼡 㻲㼍㼢㼛㼞㼕㼠㼑㼟
㻭㼐㼐㼞㼑㼟㼟
㻮㼛㼤
㻵㼚㼒㼛㼞㼙㼍㼠㼕㼛㼚
12
2
3-7
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
ECOSYS M8124cidn
*The appearance may differ from your actual screen, depending on your configuration and option settings.
Job
No. Item Description
1 Message Displays the message depending on the status.
2 Desktop Displays function. Registered function to favorites are also displayed. Icons that are not
displayed on the first page will appear by changing the page.
3 Screen-switching keys Use these buttons to switch between desktop pages. This is displayed when there are
multiple pages.
NOTE
You can also switch views by touching the screen and moving the finger sideways (i.e.
swiping).
4 [Status] Displays the Status screen. If an error occurs, the icon will show "!". screen appears.
Once the error clears, the display will return to normal.
5 [Task Screen] Displays the Task screen.
6 [Logout] Logout. This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
7 Login User Name Displays the logged-in user name. This is displayed when user login administration is
enabled. Selecting "Login User Name" will display the information of the logged-in user.
8 Task Screen Displays task icons.
9 [Desktop] Displays the Desktop.
⏝䛩䜛ᶵ⬟䜢㑅ᢥ䛧䛶䛟䛰䛥䛔䚹
䝩䞊䝮 㻭㼐㼙㼕㼚
≧ἣ☜ㄆ
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
䝕䝇䜽䝖䝑䝥
ᶵჾሗ ゝㄒ㑅ᢥ 䝅䝇䝔䝮
䝯䝙䝳䞊
䛚Ẽ䛻ධ䜚
Select the function.
Home Admin
Copy
Status
10:10
Send
Job Box
FAX
Removable
Memory
Task Screen
Sub
Address
Box
Select the function.
Home Admin
Status
10:10
Desktop
Device
Information
Language
Favorites
System
Menu
1
1
2
3
4
45
6
7
8
9
6
7
3
Desktop Task Screen
Select the function.
Home Admin
Copy
Status
10:10
Send
Job Box
FAX
Removable
Memory
Task Screen
Sub
Address
Box
12
2
3-8
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Editing the Home Screen
You can change the background of the Home screen as well as which icons are displayed.
1Display a screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Home]
2Configure the settings.
The settings below can be configured.
*1 Displays a maximum of 61 function icons including installed applications and functions that can be used when options are
installed.
*2 The maximum number of task icons that can be displayed are shown below.
ECOSYS M8130cidn:8
ECOSYS M8124cidn:6
*3 ECOSYS M8130cidn
*4 ECOSYS M8124cidn
NOTE
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Item Description
Customize Desktop Specify the function icons to display on the desktop.*1
Select [Add]*3 or [ ]*4 to display the screen for selecting the
function to display. Select the function to display and then [OK].
Select an icon and [Previous] or [After] to change the display position
of the selected icon on the Desktop.
To delete an icon from the desktop, select it and then select
[Delete]*3 or [ ]*4.
Customize Taskbar*3 Specify the task icons to display on the taskbar.*2
Task Screen
Settings*4 These settings specify the function displayed in the lower left of the
Home screen and the task icons displayed on the Task screen.*2
Wallpaper Configure the wallpaper of the Home screen.
Value: Images 1 to 8
3-9
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Available Functions to Display on Desktop
*1 Selected at the time of shipment from factory.
*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
*3 Display only when an optional SSD is installed.
Function Icon Description Reference
Page
Copy*1 Displays the Copy screen. 5-12
Send*1 Displays the Send screen. 5-14
FAX Server Displays the FAX Server screen. 5-24
FAX*2 Displays the FAX screen. FAX Operation
Guide
Custom Box*3 Displays the Custom Box screen. 3-48
Job Box*1 Displays the Job Box screen. 3-48
Removable Memory*1 Displays the Removable Memory screen. 3-49
Polling Box*2 Displays the polling box. FAX Operation
Guide
FAX Memory RX Box*2 Displays the FAX Memory RX box screen. FAX Operation
Guide
Send to Me (E-mail)*4 Displays the Send screen. The E-mail address of the logged-
in user is set as the destination.
5-23
Send to Me (E-mail)
from Box (E-mail)*3*4 Displays the Custom Box screen. The E-mail address of the
logged-in user is set as the destination.
5-38
Favorites Calls up the registered program. The icon will change
according to the function of the program.
3-41
Application Name*5 Displays the selected applications. 2-54
3-10
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
*4 This is displayed when user login administration is enabled.
*5 The icon of the application appears.
Displayable Functions on the Taskbar*" or Task Screen*3
*1 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
*2 ECOSYS M8130cidn
*3 ECOSYS M8124cidn
Function Icon Description Reference
Page
Status/Job Cancel
/
Displays the Status screen. If an error occurs, the icon will
show "!". Once the error clears, the display will return to
normal.
-
Device Information Displays the Device Information screen. Allows you to check
system and network information,
as well as options that are used.
3-11
Language Displays the Language setting screen in System Menu. 8-4
Paper Settings Display the paper settings screen. 8-9
Wi-Fi Direct Configures Wi-Fi Direct settings and displays a list of
information about machines that are enabled to use the
network.
2-19
System Menu Displays the System Menu screen. 8-1
Favorites Displays a list of favorites. 3-41
Outgoing FA X Log*1 Displays the Outgoing FAX Log screen. FAX Operation
Guide
Incoming FAX Log*1 Displays the Incoming FAX Log screen. FAX Operation
Guide
3-11
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Display for Device Information
Shows device information. Allows you to check system and network information, as well as options that are used.
1Displays the Device Information screen.
For ECOSYS M8130cidn: [Home] key > Task number [Device Information]
For ECOSYS M8124cidn: [Home] key > [Task Screen] > [Device Information]
2Check the device information.
*1 Displayed only when the Wireless Network Interface Kit is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service representa-
tives for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
*2 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
Functions key
1This screen is appears when a function icon is selected.
Tab Display
Identification/Wired Network You can check ID information such as the model name, serial
number, host name and location, and the IP address.
Wi-Fi*1 You can check ID information such as the model name, serial
number, host name and location, and the IP address.
FAX*2 You can check the local fax number, local fax name, local fax
ID and other fax information.
Software Version/Capability You can check the software version and performance.
Option You can check information on the options that are used.
1 The function is displayed.
2 Selecting [Functions] displays other
functions.
3 Use [ ] and [ ] to scroll.
Ready to copy. (Full Color)
Functions
Original Size
Auto
Close
10:10
Original Orientation
Top Edge on Top
1/6
Add/Edit
Shortcut
Off
ID Card Copy
Collate
Collate/Offset
Ready to copy. (Full Color)
Copy Copies
Paper
Selection
Zoom Density
Duplex Combine
1-sided>>1-sided
Auto 100% Normal 0
Off
Functions
10:10
FavoritesID Card Copy
Color
Selection
Full Color
2
3
1
3-12
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Displaying Keys That Cannot be Configured
Keys of features that cannot be used due to feature combination restrictions or non-installation of options are in a non-
selectable state.
Using the [Enter] Key
The [Enter] key has the same function as keys with the Enter mark (←), such as the [OK←] key and the [Close←] key.
Normal Grayed out
In the following cases, the key is grayed out
and cannot be selected.
• Cannot be used in combination with a
feature that is already selected.
• Use prohibited by user control.
NOTE
If a key that you wish to use is grayed out, the settings of the previous user may still be in effect. In this case,
select the [Reset] key and try again.
If the key is still grayed out after the [Reset] key is selected, it is possible that you are prohibited from using the
function by user control. Check with the administrator of the machine.
Ready to copy. (Full Color)
Copy Copies
Paper
Selection
Zoom Density
Duplex Combine
1-sided>>1-sided
Auto 100% Normal 0
Off
Functions
10:10
FavoritesID Card Copy
Color
Selection
Full Color
Ready to copy. (Full Color)
Copy
Copies
Paper
Selection
Zoom Density
Duplex Combine
1-sided>>1-sided
Auto 100% Normal 0
Off
Functions
10:10
FavoritesID Card Copy
Color
Selection
Full Color
EcoPrint
Off On
10:10
Cancel OK
Ready to copy.
3-13
Preparation before Use > Using the Operation Panel
Using the [Quick No. Search] Key
The [Quick No. Search] key performs the same action as the [Number] displayed on the touch panel. You can use it to
specify the speed dial for a transmission destination directly input values using the [# Keys].
For more information on speed dialing, refer to the following:
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
Help Screen
If you have difficulty operating the machine, you can check how to operate it using the touch panel.
When [?] (Help) is displayed on the touch panel, you can display the Help screen by touching [?] (Help). The Help
screen shows explanations of functions and how to use them.
1Display the Paper Selection screen.
[Paper Selection] (6-5)
2Display the help screen.
1 Shows the help title.
2 Displays information about functions and
machine operation.
3 Closes the Help screen and returns to the
original screen.
4 Scrolls up and down when the help text
cannot be displayed in its entirety on a
single screen.
One Touch Key No. Entry
10:10
(001 - 100)
Cancel OK
⏝⣬㑅ᢥ
⮬ື
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
㻭㻠
㻻㻷䜻䝱䞁䝉䝹
㻝㻛㻞
ᬑ㏻⣬
㻭㻠 ᬑ㏻⣬
㻭㻠 ᬑ㏻⣬
䝁䝢䞊䛷䛝䜎䛩䚹
⏝䛧䛯䛔䝃䜲䝈䛾⏝⣬䛜ධ䛳䛯䜹䝉䝑䝖䜎䛯䛿
ᡭᕪ䛧䝖䝺䜲䜢㑅ᢥ䛧䜎䛩䚹
⮬ື㻦ཎ✏䛸タᐃෆᐜ䛻ྜ䜟䛫䛶⏝⣬䛜⮬ືⓗ䛻
㑅ᢥ䛥䜜䜎䛩䚹
䜹䝉䝑䝖㻝㻦䜹䝉䝑䝖㻝䛷⏝䛩䜛⏝⣬✀㢮䜢タᐃ䛧䜎䛩䚹
䜹䝉䝑䝖㻞㻦䜹䝉䝑䝖㻞䛷⏝䛩䜛⏝⣬✀㢮䜢タᐃ䛧䜎䛩䚹
䜹䝉䝑䝖㻟㻦䜹䝉䝑䝖㻟䛷⏝䛩䜛⏝⣬✀㢮䜢タᐃ䛧䜎䛩䚹
⏝⣬㑅ᢥ
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
㻝㻛㻞
䝁䝢䞊䛷䛝䜎䛩䚹
Paper Selection
Auto
10:10
A4
OKCancel
1/2
Plain
A4 Plain
A4 Plain
Ready to copy.
Select the cassette or the multipurpose tray
with the desired paper size.
Auto: Automatically selects the appropriate
paper size.
Cassette 1: Selects the paper in cassette 1.
Cassette 2: Selects the paper in cassette 2.
Cassette 3: Selects the paper in cassette 3.
MP Tray: Selects the paper in the multipurpose tray.
Paper Selection
10:10
1/2
Ready to copy.
1
2
3
4
3-14
Preparation before Use > Login/Logout
Login/Logout
If you are setting a function that requires administrator rights, or if user login administration is enabled, you must enter
your login user name and login password.
Login
1Enter the login user name and login password to login.
1If this screen is displayed during operations, select [Keyboard] of "Login User Name" to enter the login user
name.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
2[Login Password] > Enter the login password > [OK]
2Select [Login].
NOTE
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with
administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.
NOTE
If [Network Authentication] is selected as the user authentication method, authentication destinations are
displayed and either [Local] or [Network] can be selected as the authentication destination.
To authenticate by ID card, select [ID Card Login].
10:10
Keyboard
Login Password
Keyboard
Login User Name
Login
Enter login user name and password.
3-15
Preparation before Use > Login/Logout
Simple Login
If this screen is displayed during operations, select a user and log in.
Enabling Simple Login (9-23)
Logout
To logout from the machine, select the [Authentication / Logout] key to return to the login user name/login
password entry screen.
Users are automatically logged out in the following circumstances:
• When the machine enters the sleep state.
• When the auto panel reset function is activated.
NOTE
If a user password is required, an input screen will be displayed.
10:10
Menu
Select the user to login.
A
None
None
B
None
None
C
None
None
1/3
01
04
07
02
05
08
03
06
09
3-16
Preparation before Use > Check the counter
Check the counter
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Counter]
2Select [Printed Pages] > [Scanned Pages] to check the counter.
Refer to the printed coverage.
1Check the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Counter] > [Printed Pages] > [Print Coverage]
2The selected [Last Page] or [Last Job] data is displayed.
[Last Page]: The data of the last printed page is displayed.
[Last Job]: The data of the last printed job is displayed.
NOTE
The printing volume as calculated from information indicated on print coverage data will not match on actual
printed volume. The actual printing volume varies depending on the usage (printing content, continuous printing
frequency, etc.) and environmental factors (temperature and humidity).
3-17
Preparation before Use > Loading paper
Loading paper
Load paper in the cassettes.
Precaution for Loading Paper
Fan the paper, then tap it on a level surface.
In addition, note the following points.
• If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a jam.
• Avoid exposing opened paper to high humidity as dampness can be a cause of problems. Seal any remaining paper
after loading in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the paper storage bag.
• Leaving paper in the cassette for a long time may cause a discoloration of paper by heat from the cassette heater.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it from the
cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage bag.
IMPORTANT
If you copy onto used paper (paper already used for printing), do not use paper that is stapled or
clipped together. This may damage the machine or cause poor image quality.
NOTE
If you use special paper such as letterhead, paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or company
name, refer to the following:
Paper (12-16)
3-18
Preparation before Use > Loading paper
Selecting the paper feeder unit
Select the paper feeder units according to the size and type of paper.
No. Name Paper Size Paper Type Capacity Page
1Cassette 1 A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, Folio, 216mm×340mm,
Officio II, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Plain, Preprinted, Bond, Recycled,
Vellum, Rough, Letterhead, Color,
Prepunched, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
500 sheets
(80 g/m2)
Loading in
the
Cassettes
1 (to 3) (3-
19)
2Cassette 2
3Cassette 3
NOTE
• The number of sheets that can be held varies depending on your environment and paper type.
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause
paper jams or other faults.)
• For higher quality color printing, use special color paper.
1
2
3
3-19
Preparation before Use > Loading paper
Loading in the Cassettes 1 (to 3)
1Pull the cassette completely out of the machine.
2Adjust the paper length guide to the paper size required.
NOTE
Do not pull out more than one cassette at a time.
NOTE
To use 11X17" (Ledger) paper, move the paper length guide all the way to the left end and tilt it.
3-20
Preparation before Use > Loading paper
3Adjust the position of the paper width guides located on the left and right sides of the
cassette.
4Load paper.
5Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest securely against the paper.
If there is a gap, readjust the guides to fit the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Af ter removing new p aper fro m it s p ackaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi-purp ose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (3-17)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
3-21
Preparation before Use > Loading paper
6Insert sheets of the paper size
7Gently push the cassette back in.
8Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1]
9Configure the settings.
Select the paper size and paper type
[Cassette 1 (to 3)] (8-9)
NOTE
• If the size label is required, please contact your dealer or our sales and service representative.
• The paper size can be automatically detected. Refer to the following:
[Paper Selection] (6-5)
[Cassette 1 (to 3)] (8-9)
3-22
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared
Folder in a PC
Check the information that needs to be set on the machine and create a folder to receive the document on your
computer. Screens of Windows 8.1 are used in the following explanation. The details of the screens will vary in other
versions of Windows.
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name
Check the name of the computer name and full computer name.
1Display the screen.
On the start screen, right-click [PC] and the select [Properties]. Or, right-click the Window icon and select
[System].
2Check the status.
Check the computer name and full computer name.
Screen example:
Computer name: PC4050
Full computer name: pc4050.abcdnet.com
After checking the computer name, click the [Close] button to close the "System Properties" screen.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
• In Windows Vista: Windows [Start] button > Right-click [Computer]. > [Properties]
• In Windows 7: Windows [Start] button > [Computer] > [Properties] > [System Properties]
• In Windows 8, select the desktop in the Start screen, right-click [Computer] from [Libraries] on Desktop, and
then select [Properties], display "System Properties Screen".
• In Windows 10, right-click the Windows [Start] button and then select [System].
3-23
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
Making a note of the user name and domain name
Check the domain name and user name for logging onto Windows.
1Display the screen.
From the desktop charms, click [Search] and then and enter "command prompt" in the search box. In the list of
search results, select [Command Prompt].
The Command Prompt window appears.
2Check the status.
At the Command Prompt, enter "net config workstation" and then press [Enter].
Check the user name and domain name.
Screen example:
User Name:james.smith
Domain Name: ABCDNET
Configuring Shared Folder Access Permissions
If there is a workgroup item in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or
group.
1Display a screen.
From the desktop charms: [Settings] > [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Folder Options]
NOTE
• In Windows Vista or Windows 7: Windows [Start] button > [All Programs] (or [Programs]) > [Accessories] >
[Command Prompt].
• In Windows 10, right-click the Windows [Start] button and then select [Command Prompt].
NOTE
• In Windows Vista: [Start] > [Control Panel] > [ System and Maintenance] > [Appearance and Personalization]
> [Folder Options]
• In Windows 7: [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Folder Options]
• In Windows 10: Start up Explorer. > [View] > [Options] > [Folder Options]
3-24
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2Configure the settings.
After confirming that the [View] tab is displayed, clear the check box next to [Use Sharing Wizard
(Recommended)] under "Advanced settings".
3Click on the [OK] button.
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder
Create a "Shared Folder" to receive the document in the destination computer.
NOTE
If there is a workgroup in System Properties, configure the settings below to limit folder access to a specific user or
group.
1Select [Settings] in charms on the Desktop, and then select [Control Panel] > [Appearance and
Personalization] > [Folder Options].
In Windows 7: [Start] > [Control Panel] > [Appearance and Personalization] > [Folder Options]
In Windows 10: Start up Explorer. > [View] > [Options] > [Folder Options]
2
Remove the checkmark from [Use Sharing Wizard (Recommended)] in "Advanced settings".
3
2
1
1
2
3
Make sure that the [View] tab is selected.
3-25
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
1Create a folder.
Create a folder on your computer.
For example, create a folder with the name "scannerdata" on the desktop.
2Configure permission settings.
1Right-click the "scannerdata" folder and click [Share] and [Advanced sharing]. Click the [Advanced Sharing]
button.
2Select the [Share this folder] checkbox and click the [Permissions] button.
3Make a note of the Share name.
1
2
2
1
3-26
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
4Click the [Add] button.
5Specify the location.
6Set the access permission for the user selected.
1 If the computer name that you made a note of on page is
the same as the domain name:
If the computer name is not shown in "From this location",
click the [Locations] button, select the computer name, and
click the [OK] button.
Example: pc4050
If the computer name that you made a note of on page is
not the same as the domain name:
If the text after the first dot (.) in the full computer name that
you made a note of does not appear in "From this location",
click the [Locations] button, select the text after the dot (.),
and click the [OK] button.
Example: abcdnet.com
Making a note of the computer name and full computer
name (3-22)
2 Enter the user name that you made a note of on page in the
text box, and click the [OK] button.
Also the user name can be made by clicking the [Advanced]
button and selecting a user.
1 Select the user you entered.
2 Select the [Allow] checkbox of the "Change" and "Read"
permissions.
3 Click the [OK] button.
NOTE
"Everyone" gives sharing permission to everyone on the network. To strengthen security, it is recommended
that you select "Everyone" and remove the "Read" [Allow] checkmark.
1
2
1
2
3
3-27
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
7Click the [OK] button in the "Advanced Sharing" screen to close the screen.
8Check the details set in the [Security] tab.
Sharing File and Printers
1Display the screen.
From the desktop charms: [Settings] > [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Allow an app through Windows
Firewall]
1 Select the [Security] tab.
2 Select the user you entered.
3 If the user does not appear on "Group or user names",
click [Edit] button to add user in a similar way of
configuration of permission settings.
4 Make sure that checkmarks appear on [Allow] checkbox
for the "Modify" and "Read & execute" permissions.
5 Click the [Close] button.
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
• In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security], and then [Turn
Windows Firewall on or off].
• In Windows 7: [Start] button > [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Allow a program through Windows
Firewall].
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
1
2
3
4
3-28
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2Select the [File and Printer Sharing] checkbox.
Configuring Windows Firewall Settings
Permit sharing of files and printers and set the port used for SMB transmission.
1Display the screen.
In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], [System and Security], and then [Windows Firewall].
NOTE
Log on to Windows with administrator privileges.
NOTE
• In Windows Vista, from [Start] button on the Windows, select [Control Panel], [Security], and then [Turn
Windows Firewall on or off].
• In Windows 7: [Start] button > [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Check firewall status].
• In Windows 8: From the desktop charms: [Settings] > [Control Panel] > [System and Security] > [Windows
Firewall].
• In Windows 10: Start up Explorer. > [View] > [Options] > [Folder Options].
NOTE
If the User Account Control dialog box appears, click the [Continue] button.
1
2
3
3-29
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
2Add a port.
1Select [Advanced settings].
2Select [Inbound Rules].
3Select [New Rules].
4Select [Port].
NOTE
In Windows Vista: [Exceptions] tab > [Add Port] > Perform procedure 2-5.
1
2
3-30
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
5Select [TCP] as the port to apply the rule to. Then select [Specific local ports] and enter "445" then click [Next].
6Select [Allow the connection] and click the [Next] button.
7Make sure all checkboxes are selected and click the [Next] button.
NOTE
In Windows Vista, use "Name" to assign a name to the port to be added (Example: Scan to SMB). Enter "445"
in "Port Number". Select [TCP] for "Protocol". After settings are the way you want, click the [OK] button.
2
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
3-31
Preparation before Use > Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC
8Enter "Scan to SMB" in "Name" and click [Finish].
1
2
1
2
3-32
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
Adding a Destination
You can assign destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Key, or modify destination assignments. Assigned
destinations can be used with Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission.
Adding a Destination (Address Book)
This assigns a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When
adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.
Registering a contact address
Each address can include information such as destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer
folder path, FAX No., etc.
Maximum number of addresses: 200
1Display a screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book] > [ ] > [Individual]
2Add the name.
1Enter the destination name to be displayed in the address book. > [Next >]
NOTE
Registering and editing of the Address Book can also be done in Command Center RX.
Using Command Center RX to Add Destinations to the Address Book (3-40)
NOTE
If registering and editing of the Address Book is restricted to administrators, you can edit the Address Book by
logging in with administrator privileges.
[Edit Restriction] (8-30)
NOTE
The number of characters you can enter is limited.
Maximum number of characters: Up to 32
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
3-33
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
3Add the address.
E-mail Address
[E-mail Address] > Enter the E-mail address. > [OK]
The Folder (SMB) Address
[SMB] > [Host Name], [Path], [Port], [Login User Name] or [Login Password] > [OK]
The table below explains the items to be entered.
To search for a folder on a PC on the network and add it, perform the operation below.
[Menu] > [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder by Host Name]
If you selected "Search Folder from Network", you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and "Host Name" to
search PCs on the network for the destination.
If you pressed "Search Folder by Host Name", you can search all PCs on the network for a destination.
A maximum of 500 addresses can be displayed. To display the login user name and login password entry screen,
perform the operation below.
On the screen that appears, select the host name (computer name) and then select [Next >].
NOTE
You can enter up to 128 characters.
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
NOTE
For the computer name, share name, domain name, and user name, enter the information that you noted when
you created the shared folder.
For details on creating shared folders, refer to the following:
Preparation for Sending a Document to a Shared Folder in a PC (3-22)
Item Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name Computer name 64 characters
Path Share name
For example: scannerdata
share namefolder name in shared folder
share name\folder name in shared folder
128 characters
Port Port number (Normally 445) 1-65535
Login User Name If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name:
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example: abcdnet\yamada
64 characters
Login Password Windows login password
(Case sensitive.)
64 characters
3-34
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
The Folder (FTP) Address
[SMB] > [Host Name], [Path], [Port], [Login User Name] or [Login Password] > [OK]
The table below explains the items to be entered.
*1 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the slash (/) and not the
back-slash(\).
1If you want to specify an address number, select [Address Number].
2Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (001 to 250).
To have the number assigned automatically, specify 000.
3Select [OK].
4Check if the destination entry is correct > [Save]
The destination is added to the Address Book.
NOTE
• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
• Search and send are not supported when two-byte characters are used in the host name, domain name,
workgroup name, or user name.
• To check the connection to the specified computer, select [Menu] > [Connection Test]. If the connection fails,
check the entries you made.
Item Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name Host name or IP address of FTP server 64 characters
Path*1 Path for the file to be stored
For example: \User\ScanData
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.
128 characters
Path Port number (Normally 21) 1-65535
Login User Name FTP server login user name 64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password 64 characters
NOTE
• For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
• To check the connection to the specified FTP server, select [Menu] > [Connection Test]. If the connection fails,
check the entries you made.
NOTE
• An address number is ID number for a single destination. You can select any available number for groups.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message will appear and the address will not
be added.
3-35
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
Adding a Group
Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time.
Maximum number of groups: 50
1Display a screen.
[System Menu] > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book] > [ ] > [Group]
2Add the name.
1Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book > [Next >]
3Select the members (destinations).
1Select [Member].
2Select [ ].
3Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group. The selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in
the check box.
4Select [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 2 to 4.
5Select [End].
6If you want to specify an address number, select [Address Number].
NOTE
Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added first.
Register one or more individual destinations as needed before proceeding. The number of groups that can be
added is described below.
• Destinations: 100
• 5 (total) destinations for FTP and SMB
NOTE
The number of characters you can enter is limited.
Maximum number of characters: Up to 32
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
3-36
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
7Use [+] / [-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (000 to 250).
For auto assignment, enter 000.
8Select [OK].
4Check if the selected destination was added to the group > [Save]
Now the group is added to the Address Book.
Changing an Address Book Destination
Edit and delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
2Make the changes you want.
Editing a Contact
1Select [ ] for the destination you want to edit.
2Change "Name", "Address Number" and destination type and address.
For details on how to edit, refer to the information below.
Registering a contact address (3-32)
3[Save] > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
Editing a Group
1Select [ ] for the destination you want to edit.
2Change "Name" and "Address Number".
For details on how to edit, refer to the information below.
Adding a Group (3-35)
3Select [Member].
4To delete a destination from the group, select [ ] > [Yes]. To add a destination, select [ ].
5[Save] > [Yes]
Register the changed destination.
NOTE
• An address number is an ID number for a single destination. You can select any available number for groups.
• If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message will appear and the group will not
be registered.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
3-37
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
Deleting an Address Book Destination
Delete the destinations (contacts) you added to the Address Book.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
2Select a destination or group to delete.
2[ ] > [Yes]
Delete the contact or group.
Assigning a Destination to a One Touch Key
Assign a new destination (contact or group) to an one touch key.
Maximum number of assignments: 100
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
NOTE
• Refer to the following for use of One Touch Key.
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
• You can add One Touch keys and change their settings on Command Center RX.
Using Command Center RX to Add Destinations to the Address Book (3-40)
• If only an administrator is allowed to perform One Touch Key registration and editing, login with administration
rights is required for editing.
[Edit Restriction] (8-30)
Command Center RX User Guide
3-38
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
2Add a One Touch Key.
1Selecting a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) > [ ] and then selecting the [Quick No. Search] key enables
selection using direct entry of a One Touch Key number.
Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.
2Select a destination (contact or group) to assign to the One Touch Key.
Selecting [ ] shows detailed information about the selected destination.
3Enter the name of the One Touch Key displayed on the send base screen > [Next >].
4Select [Register].
The destination is registered to the One Touch Key.
Editing One Touch Key
Edit the destinations you added to One Touch Key.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > One Touch Key]
2Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) to edit. For direct entry of a One Touch Key number, select the
[Quick No. Search] key.
2Changing the Registered Information.
1[Menu] > [Edit] > [Destination]
NOTE
For details on the [Quick No. Search] key, refer to the information below.
Using the [Quick No. Search] Key (3-13)
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
NOTE
The number of characters you can enter is limited.
Maximum number of characters: Up to 24
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key
10:10System Menu/Counter.
None
None
None
AAA
Menu
None
None
None
BBB
None
None
None
CCC
1/9
End
001
004
007
010 011
008
005
002
012
009
006
003
1
3-39
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
2Select a new destination (contact or group). Selecting [ ] shows detailed information about the selected
destination.
3[OK] > [Save]> [Yes]
The destination is registered to the One Touch Key.
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key
Deleting the Destination to the One Touch Key.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > One Touch Key]
2Select a One Touch Key number (001 to 100) to edit. For direct entry of a One Touch Key number, select the
[Quick No. Search] key.
2Delete the Registered Information.
Select: [ ] > [Yes].
The data registered in the One Touch Key is deleted.
NOTE
Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number.
Checking and Editing Destinations (2-4)
Address Book (All)
10:10
002
ABCD
OKCancelMenu
123456
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
1/2
003
004
001
efg@efg.com
12345.com
11111.com
Address Book/One Touch - One Touch Key
10:10System Menu/Counter.
None
None
None
AAA
Menu
None
None
None
BBB
None
None
None
CCC
1/9
End
001
004
007
010 011
008
005
002
012
009
006
003
3-40
Preparation before Use > Adding a Destination
Using Command Center RX to Add Destinations to the
Address Book
You can register destinations to the machine's Address Book, from Command Center RX.
1Display a screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
On the MFP Home screen: [Device Information] > [Identification/Network]
Example 1: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)
Example 2: https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
3Log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default setting for the default user with administrator privileges is shown below. (Upper case and lower case
letters are distinguished (case sensitive).)
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
4On the [Address Book] menu, click [Machine Address Book].
5Click [Add].
2Configure the settings.
1Enter the destination information.
Enter the information for the destination you want to register. The fields to populate are the same as when registering via
operation panel.
Adding a Destination (3-32)
2Click [Submit].
1
2
3
3-41
Preparation before Use > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
After you add frequently used functions to Favorites, you can recall them quickly and easily.
You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.
Program name Description Default Registration
ID Card Copy Use this when you want to copy a driver's
license or an insurance card. When you scan
the front and back of the card, both sides will
be combined and copied onto a single sheet.
• Copy Function
• Program Mode
ID Card Copy: [On]
Continuous Scan: [On]
Original Size: A5-R
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Zoom: [100%]
Paper Saving Copy Use this to save paper. You can configure
page combination and paper saving setting by
following the instructions on the screen.
• Copy Function
• Wizard Mode
Combine: [2 in 1]
Original: [1-sided]
Duplex: [2-sided]
Paper Selection: Cassette 1
Number of Copies: 1
Simple Folder Send
(destination entry) Use this when you want to send an image to
any shared folder on a computer or to the FTP
folder. You can configure destination, color,
and other settings as indicated by the
instructions that appear.
• Transmission Function
• Wizard Mode
Destination: New folder
Color: Full Color
Document Name Entry: Initial default
File Format: [PDF]
Continuous Scan: [Off]
Scan Resolution: [300 × 300 dpi]
Scan to PC (Address
Book) Use this when you want to send an image to
any shared folder on a computer registered in
the Address Book or to the FTP folder. You
can configure destination, color, and other
settings as indicated by the instructions that
appear.
• Transmission Function
• Wizard Mode
Destination: Address Book
Color: Full Color
Document Name Entry: Initial default
File Format: [PDF]
Continuous Scan: [Off]
Scan Resolution: [300 × 300 dpi]
Simple Mail Send
(Destination Entered) Use this when you want to send an image to
any destination E-mail address. You can
configure destination, color, and other settings
as indicated by the instructions that appear.
• Transmission Function
• Wizard Mode
Destination: New E-mail address
Color: Full Color
Document Name Entry: Initial default
File Format: [PDF]
Continuous Scan: [Off]
Scan Resolution: [300 × 300 dpi]
E-mail Subject: Initial default
Mail Body: Initial default
3-42
Preparation before Use > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Adding to Favorites in Wizard Mode
Here we will provide an example send operation.
1Display a screen.
[Home] key > [Send] > [Favorites]
2Adds Favorites.
1[Menu] > [Add]
2Select the job type.
3Select [Wizard].
4Select the function to recall > [Next >]
The selected item is shown by the wizard.
5Enter a name for the favorite. > [Next >]
Character Entry Method (12-13)
Program name Description Default Registration
Simple E-mail Send
(Address Book) Use this when you want to send an image to
any destination E-mail address registered in
the Address Book. You can configure
destination, color, and other settings as
indicated by the instructions that appear.
• Transmission Function
• Wizard Mode
Destination: Address Book
Color: Full Color
Document Name Entry: Initial default
File Format: [PDF]
Continuous Scan: [Off]
Scan Resolution: [300 × 300 dpi]
E-mail Subject: Initial default
Mail Body: Initial default
NOTE
?
Up to 20 functions combining copying and sending can be registered in the program.
You can select a favorite using either of two recall methods and register it.
• Wizard Mode (Selection Dialog): Registered settings are recalled in sequence, so settings are configured by
confirming or modifying them.
• Program Mode: Selecting a key that is a favorite immediately recalls the applicable setting.
NOTE
The "Destination Recall Method" selection screen does not appear when the job type is Copy].
3-43
Preparation before Use > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
6Check the content. Change or add information as needed.
*1 If user login administration is enabled, you can only change settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
*3 Displayed when the "Job Type" setting is [Send] or [FAX].
7Select [Register].
This adds the favorite.
8"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears. To display a favorite to the Home
screen, select [Yes], specify the location where you want to display the icon of the favorite, and then select
[Save].
Adding to Favorites in Program Mode
If you are planning to select the Program Mode, first configure the copy function, transmission function, FAX function,
send destination, and/or other settings to be added to Favorites.
1Display a screen.
1[Home] key > [Send]
2This configures send function and/or destination settings to be registered in a program.
3Select [Favorites].
2Adds Favorites.
1[Menu] > [Add]
2Select the job type.
3Select [Program].
4Enter a name for the favorite. > [Next >]
Character Entry Method (12-13)
Item Description
Name Enter up to 32 characters for the name that appears on the Favorites screen.
Add - Job Type Shows the type of the selected job.
Number*1 Enter a number for the favorite.
If you specify "00" as the address number, the address is added under the lowest available
number.
Owner*2 Shows the user.
Permission*2 Specifies whether favorites should be shared with other users.
Destination*3 Checks a destination.
Functions Use the Wizard to select the displayed functions.
Function Type Selects the method used to recall favorites.
3-44
Preparation before Use > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
5Check the content. Change or add information as needed.
*1 If user login administration is enabled, you can only change settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
6Select [Register].
This adds the favorite.
7"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears. To display a favorite to the Home
screen, select [Yes], specify the location where you want to display the icon of the favorite, and then select
[Save].
Executing Favorites in Wizard Mode
The procedure for recalling and executing a favorite in Wizard Mode is shown below.
1Recalling the favorite.
1On the Home screen, select [Favorites] or select the key of a favorite.
If you selected the key of a favorite, that favorite will be recalled. If you selected [Favorites], proceed with the following
steps.
2Select the key of the favorite you want to recall.
2This executes the favorite.
1A series of screens will appear, so configure settings and then select [Next >].
The Transmit Settings dialog box will appear.
2Place the originals > [Start] key
Item Description
Name Enter up to 32 characters for the name that appears on the Favorites screen.
Add - Job Type Shows the type of the selected job.
Number*1 Enter a number for the favorite.
If you specify "00" as the address number, the address is added under the lowest available
number.
Owner*2 Shows the user.
Permission*2 Specifies whether favorites should be shared with other users.
Function Format Selects the method used to recall favorites.
NOTE
To change a setting, select [< Back] and then make the changes you want.
3-45
Preparation before Use > Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites)
Executing Favorites in Program Mode
Use the procedure below to recall and execute a favorite in Program Mode.
1Recalling the favorite.
1On the Home screen, select [Favorites] or select the key of a favorite.
If you selected the key of a favorite, that favorite will be recalled. If you selected [Favorites], proceed with the following
steps.
2Select the key of the favorite you want to recall.
2This executes the favorite.
1Place the originals > [Start] key
Editing a Favorite
You can use the procedure in this section to modify favorite numbers, favorite names, and sharing settings.
Use the procedure below to edit favorites.
1Display a screen.
1[Home] key > [Favorites]
2Editing a Favorite.
1[Menu] > [Edit]
2Select the favorite you want to modify.
3Modify the favorite name, favorite number, and/or sharing settings.
Adding to Favorites in Wizard Mode.
4[Save] > [Yes]
Deleting a Favorite
You can use the procedure below to delete a favorite.
Use the procedure below to delete a favorite.
1Display a screen.
1[Home] key > [Send] > [Favorites]
2Delete the favorite.
1[Menu] > [Delete]
2Select the favorite you want to delete.
3Select [Yes].
3-46
Preparation before Use > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
Registering Shortcut s (Copy, Send, and Document
Box Settings)
You can register shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. The function
name displayed by a short cut key can also be modified as required.
Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed on the function list screen. Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.
1Display the screen.
The steps below can be performed while the Copy, Send, FAX, or Document Box screen is displayed.
[Functions] > [Add/Edit Shortcut]
2Adding Shortcuts.
1Select [Add].
A shortcut consists of the contents described below.
2Select the setting you want to add.
3Enter the name. > [Next >].
Up to 24 characters can be entered.
Character Entry Method
4Select [Register].
The shortcut is registered.
Edit the shortcut
1Display the screen.
The steps below can be performed while the Copy, Send, FAX, or Document Box screen is displayed.
[Functions] > [Add/Edit Shortcut]
2Edit the shortcut.
1Select [Edit].
2Select the shortcut key you want to edit.
NOTE
You can register up to 2 shortcuts for copying functions, sending functions, and functions set for document box.
Private Shortcut 1, 2 Shortcuts that can be used by the logged in user only. Shortcuts can be registered only while
user login administration is in effect.
Shared Shortcut 1, 2 Shortcuts that can be used by all MFP users. If user login administration is in effect,
shortcuts can be registered only when logged in with administrator privileges.
NOTE
If you select a shortcut number already registered, the currently registered shortcut can be replaced with a new
one.
3-47
Preparation before Use > Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)
3[Number] or [Name] > Modify settings. > [OK]
4[Save] > [Yes]
Deleting a Shortcut
1Display a screen.
The steps below can be performed while the Copy, Send, FAX, or Document Box screen is displayed.
[Functions] > [Add/Edit Shortcut]
2Delete the shortcut.
1Select [Delete].
2Select the shortcut you want to delete. > [Yes]
3-48
Preparation before Use > Using Document Boxes
Using Document Boxes
Document Box is a function for saving print data from a computer and sharing it with multiple users.
The available Document Boxes are as follows: Custom Box, Job Box, Removable Memory Box, F Code Box, Polling
Box, and FAX Memory Receive Box.
What is Custom Box?
Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval. You
can create or delete a Custom Box.
The following operations are possible:
• Printing Documents in Custom Box (5-43)
• Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box (5-34)
• Moving Documents in a Custom Box (5-34)
• Joining Documents in a Custom Box (5-36)
• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box (5-37)
• Sending Documents in a Custom Box (5-37)
What is Job Box?
"Job Box" refers collectively to the Private Print, Stored Job Box and Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box. These Job Boxes
cannot be created or deleted by a user.
The four types of Job Box are listed below.
• Private Print Box (5-40)
•Hold Box (
5-41)
• Quick Copy Box (5-42)
• Proof and Hold Box (5-43)
NOTE
• To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.
HD-6/7 <Large Capacity Storage: SSD> (12-6)
• Main Custom Box operations can also be performed with Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
• You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted.
Deletion of Job Retention (8-26)
• For details on operating [Private Print/Stored Job], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], refer to the following.
Printing Data Saved on the Machine (5-40)
3-49
Preparation before Use > Using Document Boxes
What is Removable Memory Box?
A USB memory stick can be connected to the USB memory slot on the machine to print a saved file. You can print data
directly from the USB memory without a PC. Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory
in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS or high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).
The F Code Box, Polling Box, and FAX Memory Receive Box
are for storing FAX data.
Fax Box store the fax data.
FAX Operation Guide
Using Machine Operations to Create a New Custom Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box]
2[Menu] > [Add]
NOTE
The optional FAX Kit is required to use the F Code Box, Polling Box, and FAX Memory Receive Box are for
storing FAX data.
NOTE
• To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.
• If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator
privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
• If user login administration is enabled, log in with administrator privileges to perform the following operations.
They cannot be performed with user privileges.
- Creating a box
- Deleting a box of which owner is another user.
3-50
Preparation before Use > Using Document Boxes
2Register the Custom Box.
1Enter the box name. > [Next >]
Enter up to 32 characters as the box name.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
The table below lists the items to be set.
*1 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
*2 Not displayed when "Owner" is set to [No Owner].
2Select [Register].
A box is created.
Item Description
Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
Box No. Enter the box number by selecting [+], [-] or number keys. The box number can be from 0001 to
1000. A Custom Box should have a unique number. If you enter 0000, the smallest number
available will be automatically assigned.
Owner*1 Set the owner of the box. Select the owner from the user list that appears.
Permission*2 Select whether to share the box.
Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password to protect the box. Entering a
password is not mandatory. Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password]
and [Confirm Password].
This can be set if [Shared] is selected in Permission.
Usage Restriction The usage for a box can be restricted. To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the
storage capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by selecting [-], [+] or number keys. Though the
limit value changes with the number of Custom Boxes that are created, the maximum range of
entered values is from 1 to 30,000 (MB).
Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time. Select [On] to enable automatic
deletion and then use [+] and [-] or the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which
documents are stored. You can enter any number between 1 and 31 (day(s)). To disable
automatic file deletion, select [Off].
Free Space Displays the free space on the box.
Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when new documents are stored.
To overwrite old documents, select [Permit]. To retain old documents, select [Prohibit].
Delete after Print Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete. To delete the document,
select [On]. To retain the document, select [Off].
3-51
Preparation before Use > Using Document Boxes
Using Command Center RX to Create a New Custom Box
You can register a custom box from Command Center RX.
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
On the MFP Home screen: [Device Information] > [Identification/Network]
Example 1: https://192.168.48.21/ (for IP address)
Example 2: https://MFP001 (if the host name is "MFP001")
3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
4Click [Add].
2Configure the settings.
1Enter the box details.
Enter the information for the custom box you want to register. For details on the fields to populate, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
2Click [Submit].
NOTE
To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine.
1
2
3
3-52
Preparation before Use > Using Document Boxes
Edit the custom box.
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box]
2Edit the custom box.
1[Menu] > [Edit]
2Select the box you want to edit.
When user login administration is enabled, the settings that can be changed varies depending on the privileges of the
logged in user.
For details on each item, refer to the information below.
Using Machine Operations to Create a New Custom Box (3-49)
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only edit a box whose owner is set to that user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can edit all boxes.
Privileges Settings that can be changed
Administrator Box Name
Box No.
Owner
Permission
Box Password
Usage Restriction
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Print
User Box Name
Box Password
Permission
Auto File Deletion
Overwrite Setting
Delete after Print
3-53
Preparation before Use > Using Document Boxes
Deleting Custom Box
1Display a screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box]
2Delete the box.
1[Menu] > [Delete]
2Select the box you want to delete.
3Select [Yes].
NOTE
• When you have logged in as a user, you can only delete a box whose owner is set to that user.
• When you have logged in as administrator, you can delete all boxes.
4-1
Operation on PC >
4 Operation on PC
This chapter explains the following topics:
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen ................................................................................................................... 4-2
Displaying the Printer Driver Help ...................................................................................................................... 4-4
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings ..................................................................................................... 4-5
Printing from PC ................................................................................................................................................. 4-6
Printing on Standard Sized Paper ............................................................................................................ 4-6
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper .................................................................................................... 4-7
Canceling Printing from a Computer ...................................................................................................... 4-10
Storing Data in Machine Memory and Printing Data in Machine Memory ......................................................... 4-11
On the computer, specify the document box and save the job ............................................................... 4-11
Using Command Center RX to Print a Job Stored in a Custom Box ..................................................... 4-12
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor) ................................................................................................. 4-14
Accessing the Status Monitor ................................................................................................................ 4-14
Exiting the Status Monitor ...................................................................................................................... 4-14
Status Monitor Display ........................................................................................................................... 4-14
Printing Progress Tab ............................................................................................................................ 4-15
Paper Tray Status Tab ........................................................................................................................... 4-15
Toner Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 4-15
Alert Tab ................................................................................................................................................. 4-16
Status Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................ 4-16
Status Monitor Notification Settings ....................................................................................................... 4-17
4-2
Operation on PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
The printer driver print settings screen allows you to configure a variety of print-related settings.
Printer Driver User Guide
No. Description
1 [Quick Print] tab
Provides icons that can be used to easily configure frequently used functions. Each time you click an icon, it
changes to an image resembling the print results and applies the settings.
[Basic] tab
This tab groups basic functions that are frequently used. You can use it to configure the paper size,
destination, and duplex printing.
[Layout] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for printing various layouts, including booklet printing, combine mode,
poster printing, and scaling.
[Finishing] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to finishing of printed media.
[Imaging] tab
This tab lets you configure settings related to the quality of the print results.
[Publishing] tab
This tab lets you create covers and inserts for print jobs and put inserts between sheets of OHP film.
[Job] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for saving print data from the computer to the machine. Regularly used
documents and other data can be saved to the machine for easy printing later. Since saved documents can
be printed directly from the machine, this function is also convenient when you wish to print a document that
you don't want others to see.
[Advanced] tab
This tab lets you configure settings for adding text pages or watermarks to print data.
1
2
3
4-3
Operation on PC > Printer Driver Print Settings Screen
2 [Profiles]
Printer driver settings can be saved as a profile. Saved profiles can be recalled at any time, so it's a
convenient practice to save frequently used settings.
3[Reset]
Click to revert settings to their initial values.
4-4
Operation on PC > Displaying the Printer Driver Help
Displaying the Printer Driver Help
The printer driver includes Help. To learn about print settings, open the printer driver print settings screen and display
Help as explained below.
1 Click the [?] button in the upper right corner of the screen.
2 Click the item you want to know about.
NOTE
The Help appears, even when you click the item you want to know about and press the [F1] key on your
keyboard.
1
2
4-5
Operation on PC > Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings
Changing the Default Printer Driver Settings
The default printer driver settings can be changed. By selecting frequently used settings, you can omit steps when
printing. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
For the settings, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu
of the printer driver.
3Click the [Basic] button on the [General] tab.
4Select the default settings and click the [OK] button.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
4-6
Operation on PC > Printing from PC
Printing from PC
Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.
This section provides the printing method using the KX DRIVER.
Printing on Standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is included in the print sizes of the machine, select the paper size on the [Basic] tab of the
print settings screen of the printer driver.
1Display the screen.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
2Configure the settings.
1Select the machine from the "Name" menu and click the [Properties] button.
2Select the [Basic] tab.
NOTE
• To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied DVD
(Product Library).
• In some environments, the current settings are displayed at the bottom of the printer driver.
• When printing the cardstock or envelopes, load the cardstock or envelopes in the multi purpose tray before
performing the following procedure.
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen (5-9)
NOTE
On the MFP operation panel, specify the paper size and media type to print.
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings] (8-9)
12
4-7
Operation on PC > Printing from PC
3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size to use for printing.
To load the paper of size that is not included in print sizes of the machine such as cardstock or envelopes, the paper size
needs to be registered.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper (4-7)
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media Type" menu and select the media type.
4Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
3Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
Printing on Non-standard Sized Paper
If you loaded a paper size that is not included in the print sizes of the machine, register the paper size in the [Basic] tab
of the print settings screen of the printer driver.
The registered size can be selected from the "Print size" menu. Instructions are based on interface elements as they
appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1In charms on Desktop, click [Settings], [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
NOTE
If you select [Off] for "Auto Cassette Change", select the paper source that contains the paper you want to use
from "Source".
Auto Cassette Change (8-33)
NOTE
Specify the paper size and media type to print from the operation panel.
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings] (8-9)
4-8
Operation on PC > Printing from PC
2Registering.
1Click the [Basic] tab.
2Click the [Page Sizes...] button.
3Click the [New] button.
4Enter the paper size.
5Enter the name of the paper.
6Click the [Save] button.
7Click the [OK] button.
8Click the [OK] button.
3Display the print settings screen.
Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4-9
Operation on PC > Printing from PC
4Select the paper size and type of non-standard size paper.
1On the "Name" menu, select his MFP, and then click the [Properties] button.
2Select the [Basic] tab.
3Click "Print size" menu and select the paper size registered in step 2.
To print on the special paper such as thick paper or transparency, click "Media Type" menu and select the media type.
4Select the paper source in the “Source" menu.
5Click [OK] button to return to the Print dialog box.
5Start printing.
Click the [OK] button.
NOTE
If you loaded a postcard or envelope, select [Cardstock] or [Envelope] in the "Media Type" menu.
12
4-10
Operation on PC > Printing from PC
Canceling Printing from a Computer
To cancel a print job executed using the printer driver before the printer begins printing, do the following:
1Double-click the printer icon ( ) displayed on the taskbar at the bottom right of the
Windows desktop to display a dialog box for the printer.
2Click the file for which you wish to cancel printing and select [Cancel] from the
"Document" menu.
NOTE
When canceling printing from this machine, refer to the following:
Canceling Jobs (5-13)
4-11
Operation on PC > Storing Data in Machine Memory and Printing Data in Machine Memory
S toring Data in Machine Memory and Printing Dat a
in Machine Memory
You can save the print job into the Custom Box and Job Box of this device and print it as necessary.
What is Custom Box? (3-48)
What is Job Box? (3-48)
The four types of Job Box are listed below.
• Private Print Box (5-40)
•Hold Box (5-41)
• Quick Copy Box (5-42)
• Proof and Hold Box (5-42)
If you configure settings in the [Job] tab of the printer driver and then print, the print job will be saved in the Job Box
(memory) and printing can be executed at the machine.
Follow the work flow below when using Document Boxes.
1On the computer, specify the document box and save the job (4-11)
2On the control panel, specify and print the file in the document box (5-40)
On the computer, specify the document box and save the job
Use the procedure below to store data in a Job Box.
1Click [File] and select [Print] in the application.
The Print dialog box displays.
2Select the machine from the "Name" menu.
3Click the [Properties] button.
The Properties dialog box displays.
NOTE
To use Custom Box, an optional SSD must be installed in the machine. Creating a RAM disk makes it possible
to print from a Job Box.
4-12
Operation on PC > Storing Data in Machine Memory and Printing Data in Machine Memory
4Click the [Job] tab and select the [Job storage (e-MPS)] check box to set the function >
[OK].
5Click the [Print] button.
The print job is stored.
Using Command Center RX to Print a Job S tored in a Custom
Box
A document stored in a Custom Box can be printed from Command Center RX.
1Display the screen.
1Launch your Web browser.
2In the address or location bar, enter the machine's IP address or the host name.
Click in the following order to check the machine's IP address and the host name.
[Device Information] in the home screen > [Identification/Wired Network]
NOTE
For information on how to use the printer driver software, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
4-13
Operation on PC > Storing Data in Machine Memory and Printing Data in Machine Memory
3From the [Document Box] menu, click [Custom Box].
4Click the number or name of the Custom Box in which the document is stored.
2Print the document.
1Select the document you wish to print.
Select the checkbox of the document to be printed.
2Click [Print].
3Configure settings for printing, click [Print].
1
2
3
1
2
4-14
Operation on PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
The Status Monitor monitors the printer status and provides an ongoing reporting function.
Accessing the Status Monitor
The Status Monitor also starts up when printing is started.
Exiting the Status Monitor
Use either of the methods listed below to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit manually:
Click the settings icon and select Exit in the menu to exit the Status Monitor.
• Exit automatically:
The Status Monitor automatically shuts down after 7 minutes if it is not being used.
Status Monitor Display
The status of the printer is displayed using icons. Detailed information is displayed when the Expand button is clicked.
Detailed information is displayed by clicking on each icon tab.
NOTE
When you activate Status Monitor, check the status below.
• KX DRIVER is installed.
• Select [On] for [IP Address] or [Subnet Mask].
[Network] (8-35)
1 Printing Progress Tab
2 Paper Tray Status Tab
3 Toner Status Tab
4Alert Tab
5 Expand button
6 Settings icon
1245 6
3
4-15
Operation on PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Printing Progress Tab
The status of the print jobs is displayed.
Select a job on the job list and it can be canceled using the menu displayed with a right-click.
Paper Tray Status Tab
Information is displayed about the paper in the printer and about the amount of paper remaining.
Toner Status Tab
The amount of toner remaining is displayed.
1Status icon
2 Job list
1
2
4-16
Operation on PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Alert Tab
If an error occurs, a notice is displayed using a 3D image and a message.
Status Monitor Context Menu
The following menu is displayed when the settings icon is clicked.
• Command Center RX
If the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network and has its own IP address, use a web browser to access the
Command Center RX to modify or confirm the network settings. This menu is not displayed when using USB
connection.
Command Center RX User Guide
• Notification…
This sets the display of the Status Monitor.
Status Monitor Notification Settings (4-17)
• www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
Open our website.
• Exit
Exits the Status Monitor.
4-17
Operation on PC > Monitoring the Printer Status (Status Monitor)
Status Monitor Notification Settings
The Status Monitor settings and event list details are displayed.
Select whether notification is performed when an error in the event list occurs.
1Select Enable event notification.
If this setting is set to Off, then the Status Monitor will not start up even when printing is executed.
2Select an event to use with the text to speech function in Available events.
3Click Sound file / Text to Speech column.
Click the browse (...) button to notify the event by sound file.
When customizing the message texts to read on the screen aloud, enter the texts in the text box.
NOTE
The available file format is WAV.
5-1
Operation on the Machine >
5 Operation on the Machine
This chapter explains the following topics:
Place the Originals. ............................................................................................................................................ 5-3
Placing Originals on the Platen ................................................................................................................ 5-3
Loading Originals in the Document Processor ........................................................................................ 5-4
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................... 5-7
Using Applications ........................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Activating Applications ........................................................................................................................... 5-10
Deactivating Applications ........................................................................................................................ 5-11
Copying ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-12
Copying .................................................................................................................................................. 5-12
Interrupt Copy ........................................................................................................................................ 5-13
Canceling Jobs ...................................................................................................................................... 5-13
Frequently-Used Sending Method ................................................................................................................... 5-14
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail ................................................................................................ 5-14
Sending to a Shared Folder on a Computer [SMB] ............................................................................... 5-16
Sending to an Folder on an FTP Server [FTP] ...................................................................................... 5-18
Scanning with a TWAIN/WIA Compatible Application ........................................................................... 5-19
Useful Sending Method .................................................................................................................................... 5-21
Executing WSD Scan ............................................................................................................................ 5-21
Using File Management Utility to Scan an Original Document .............................................................. 5-22
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) ................................................................... 5-23
Sending to the E-mail address of the Logged In User ........................................................................... 5-23
Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send) ................................................................................... 5-24
Canceling Scanning ......................................................................................................................................... 5-26
Destination Operations .................................................................................................................................... 5-27
Choosing from the Address Book .......................................................................................................... 5-27
Choosing from the External Address Book ............................................................................................ 5-29
Choosing from the One Touch Key ........................................................................................................ 5-29
Choosing from the Speed Dial ............................................................................................................... 5-30
Checking and Editing Destinations ........................................................................................................ 5-30
Confirmation Screen of Destinations ..................................................................................................... 5-30
Recall ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-31
How to Use the FAX Function .......................................................................................................................... 5-32
Basic Operation for Document Box .................................................................................................................. 5-33
Box List Operations ............................................................................................................................... 5-33
Document List Operations ..................................................................................................................... 5-33
Custom Box Operations ................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box ...................................................................................... 5-34
Moving Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................................................ 5-34
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes .......................................................................... 5-35
Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable Memory ................................................................. 5-35
Joining Documents in Custom Box ........................................................................................................ 5-36
Deleting Documents in Custom Box ...................................................................................................... 5-37
Sending Documents in a Custom Box ................................................................................................... 5-37
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of Logged in user. ........................................... 5-38
Scanning Document Stored in a Custom Box ........................................................................................ 5-39
Printing Data Saved on the Machine ................................................................................................................ 5-40
Printing Documents from Private Print Box ............................................................................................ 5-40
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box ........................................................................ 5-40
Printing Document from Stored Job Box ................................................................................................ 5-41
5-2
Operation on the Machine >
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Stored Job Box .......................................................................... 5-41
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box .............................................................................................. 5-42
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box ......................................................................... 5-42
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box ......................................................................................... 5-43
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box ................................................................... 5-43
Printing Documents in Custom Box ....................................................................................................... 5-43
Printing from the Handheld Device .................................................................................................................. 5-45
Printing by AirPrint ................................................................................................................................. 5-45
Printing by Google Cloud Print .............................................................................................................. 5-45
Printing by Mopria .................................................................................................................................. 5-45
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct ....................................................................................................................... 5-45
Printing with NFC ................................................................................................................................... 5-46
Operating Using Removable USB Memory ..................................................................................................... 5-47
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .............................................................................. 5-47
Check the USB Memory Information ..................................................................................................... 5-48
Removing USB Memory ........................................................................................................................ 5-48
Printing from Removable USB Memory ................................................................................................. 5-49
5-3
Operation on the Machine > Place the Originals.
Place the Originals.
Load the originals on the platen or document processor, depending on the original size, type, volume, and function.
• Platen: Place the sheet, book, postcards, and envelopes.
• Document Processor: Place the multiple originals. You can also place the two sided originals.
Placing Originals on the Platen
You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.
1 Put the scanning side facedown.
2 Align it flush against the original size
indicator plates with the back left corner as
the reference point.
NOTE
• A5 is detected as A4-R. Set the paper size to A5 by using the function key on the touch panel.
[Original Size] (6-4)
• For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
[Original Orientation] (6-9)
2
1
5-4
Operation on the Machine > Place the Originals.
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen
Loading Originals in the Document Processor
The document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided originals are
scanned.
Originals Supported by the Document Processor
Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals. Otherwise, the originals may be jammed or the
document processor may become dirty.
• Document Processor Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor Originals bound with clips or staples
(Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases before loading. Failure to do so may cause the
originals to jam.)
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Originals with cut-out sections
1 Put the
scanning side
facedown.
2 Align it flush
against the
original size
indicator plates
with the back
left corner as
the reference
point.
NOTE
• For the procedure for feeding envelopes or cardstock, refer to the following:
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen (5-9)
CAUTION
Do not leave the document processor open as there is a danger of personal injury.
IMPORTANT
• Do not push the docume nt proc essor forc efully when yo u close it. Exces sive pres sure may cra ck the
platen glass.
• When placing books or magazines on the machine, do so with the document processor in the open
position.
Weight 45 to 160 g/m2 (duplex: 50 to 120 g/m2)
Sizes Maximum A3/Ledger (297 x 432 mm) (Long-sized 297 x 1,900 mm) to Minimum A5-R/
Statement-R (140 x 182 mm)
No. of sheets Plain paper (80 g/m2), Color paper, Recycled paper, High Quality paper: 50 sheets
2
1
5-5
Operation on the Machine > Place the Originals.
• Curled original
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam.)
• Carbon paper
• Crumpled paper
1Adjust the original widt h guides.
IMPORTANT
• Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table. Originals
left on the original eject table may cause th e ne w ori g inals to jam.
• Do not make an impact on the document processor top cover, such as aligning the originals on the
top cover. It may cause an error in the document processor.
5-6
Operation on the Machine > Place the Originals.
2Place the originals.
1Put the side to be scanned (or the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide the leading edge into the
document processor as far as it will go.
2Open the original stopper to fit the size of the original set (Original size: A3 or Ledger).
NOTE
For details on Original Orientation, refer to the following:
[Original Orientation] (6-9)
IMPORTANT
Confirm that the original width guides exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the original
width guides. The gap may cause the originals to jam.
Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam.
Originals with punched holes or perforated lines should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).
5-7
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
For details of the supported paper sizes, refer to the following:
Paper Appropriate Paper (12-16)
For the paper type setting, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (8-14)
Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.
The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.
• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 100 sheets
• Thick paper (220 g/m2): 10 sheets
• Thick paper (157 g/m2): 10 sheets
• Thick paper (120 g/m2): 25 sheets
• Thick paper (104.7 g/m2): 25 sheets
• A4 or smaller plain paper (80 g/m2), recycled paper or color paper: 25 sheets
• Hagaki (Cardstock): 20 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10(Commercial#10), Envelope Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 5 sheets
• OHP film: 10 sheet
1Open the multi purpose tray.
IMPORTANT
• If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m 2 or more, se t t he media t ype to Thic k and s et the weight of
the paper you are using.
• Remove each transparency from the inner tray as it is printed. Leaving transparencies in the inner
tray may cause a paper jam.
NOTE
• When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to the following:
[Multi Purpose Tray] (8-10)
• When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to the
following:
Media Type Setting (8-14)
5-8
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
2Adjust the multi purpose tray size.
Paper sizes are marked on the multi purpose tray.
3Load paper.
Insert the paper along the paper width guides into the tray until it stops.
After removing new paper from its packaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi purpose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (3-17)
4Specify the type of paper loaded in the multi purpose tray using the operation panel.
[Multi Purpose Tray] (8-10)
IMPORTANT
• When loading the paper, keep the print side facing down.
• Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
• When loading paper into the multi purpo se tray, check that there is no paper left over in the tray from
a previous job before loading the paper. If there is just a small amount of paper lef t over in the multi
purpose tray and you want to add more, first remove the left -over paper from the tray and include it
with the new paper before loading the paper back into the tray.
• If there is a gap between the paper and the paper width guides, readjust the guides to fit the paper in
order to prevent skewed feeding and paper jams.
5-9
Operation on the Machine > Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray
When you place envelopes or cardstock on the platen
Load the paper with the print side facing down. For the procedure for printing, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
Example: When printing the address.
1 Oufuku hagaki (Return
postcard)
2 Hagaki (Cardstock)
3 Banker Envelope (Open the
flap.)
4 Pocket Envelope (Close the
flap.)
IMPORTANT
• Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard).
• How to load envelopes (orientation and facing) will differ depending on the type of enve lo pe. Be sure
to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.
NOTE
• When you load envelopes in the multi purpose tray, select the envelope type by referring to the following:
[Multi Purpose Tray] (8-10)
1234
5-10
Operation on the Machine > Using Applications
Using Applications
Activating Applications
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]
2Activate the application.
1Select the application you want to Activate. > [Menu] > [Activate]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].
2[Official] > Enter the license key. > [OK]
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to step 2-3.
To use the application on a trial basis, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
3Select [Yes].
3Press the Home screen application icon to start up.
Select the application icon.
The application will start up.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
IMPORTANT
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
Icons of applications that are running are displayed in the Home screen.
5-11
Operation on the Machine > Using Applications
Deactivating Applications
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Application] > [Application]
2Deactivate the application.
1Select the application you want to stop. > [Menu] > [Deactivate]
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].
2Select [Yes].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
5-12
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Copying
The procedures here represent the basic copy operation and how to cancel the copy.
Copying
1[Home] key > [Copy]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3Selecting the functions.
You can select a function to configure its settings by selecting its function key. Or you can select a function by
selecting [Functions].
[Copy] (x)
4Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.
Specify the desired number up to 999.
5Press the [Start] key.
Copying starts.
NOTE
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved
copy job is printed. If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], [Reserve Next] will appear. Select [Reserve Next]
and configure the necessary settings for the copy job.
Reserve Next Priority (8-24)
Job
No.:0005
10:10
Copying...
Scanned Pages
Cancel
Job Name:doc00000320101010101010
Reserve
Next
Copies
5-13
Operation on the Machine > Copying
Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When the interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.
1Configure the settings.
1Select the [Interrupt] key.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
2Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt copy, and configure the copy settings.
2Press the [Start] key.
Interrupt copying begins.
3When interrupt copying ends, select the [Interrupt] key.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.
Canceling Jobs
1Select the [Stop] key with the copy screen displayed.
2Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned
The copy job is canceled.
When there is a job printing or on standby
Canceling job screen appears. The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Select the job you wish to cancel > [Delete] > [Yes]
NOTE
• If the machine is left unused for 60 seconds in interrupt copy mode, interrupt copying is automatically
cancelled and printing resumes. You can change the delay until interrupt copying is canceled. Change if
needed.
Interrupt Clear Timer (8-62)
[Priority Override] (6-39)
NOTE
If "Reserve Next Priority" is set to [Off], the Copying screen appears in the touch panel. In such case, selecting
the [Stop] key or [Cancel] will cancel the printing job in progress.
Reserve Next Priority (8-24)
5-14
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Frequently-Used Sending Method
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment of an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the network. In
order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the network.
A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required in order to send E-mail. It is
recommended that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
The basic scan (send) methods are those below.
• Send as E-mail (E-mail Addr Entry): Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail (5-14)
• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC.
Sending to a Shared Folder on a Computer [SMB] (5-16)
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.
Sending to an Folder on an FTP Server [FTP] (5-18)
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN/WIA: Scan the document using a TWAIN or WIA compatible application program.
Scanning with a TWAIN/WIA Compatible Application (5-19)
Sending Scanned Document via E-mail
Sending scanned document via E-mail.
NOTE
Different sending options can be specified in combination.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (5-23)
The fax function can be used on products equipped with fax capability.
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
Before sending a document, Command Center RX must be used to configure settings for SMTP and sending E-
mail.
Setting SMTP and E-mail (2-45)
5-15
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
1[Home] key > [Send]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3Selecting [E-mail] displays the Enter Address screen.
4Enter the destination address > [OK].
You can enter up to 128 characters.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
Number of allowable E-mail address entries: 100
To add the entered mail address to the Address Book, selecting [Menu] > [< Back]. You can also replace the
information for a previously registered destination.
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
5Selecting the functions.
To select a function and configure its settings, select it with [Functions].
[Send] (xii)
6Press the [Start] key.
Start sending.
NOTE
If [Broadcast] is set to [Prohibit], it is not possible to directly enter multiple destinations.
Broadcast (8-25)
5-16
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Sending to a Shared Folder on a Computer [SMB]
You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.
1[Home] key > [Send]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3On the basic screen for sending, select [Folder].
4For the folder type, select [SMB].
5Select the folder specification method.
To search for a folder on a PC on the network and add it, select [Search Folder from Network] or [Search Folder
by Host Name].
If you pressed "Search Folder from Network", you can search all PCs on the network for a destination.
If you selected "Search Folder by Host Name", you can enter the "Domain/Workgroup", and "Host Name" to
search PCs on the network for the destination.
Up to 500 addresses can be displayed. Select the host name (PC name) that you want to specify in the screen
that appears, and select [Next >]. The login user name and login password entry screen appears.
After you enter the login user name and login password name of the destination PC, the shared folders appear.
Select the folder that you want to specify and select [Next >]. The address of the selected shared folder is set.
Select the folder from the Search Results list.
NOTE
Before sending a document, configure the following settings.
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name
Making a note of the computer name and full computer name (3-22)
Making a note of the user name and domain name
Making a note of the user name and domain name (3-23)
Creating a shared folder, making a note of a shared folder
Creating a Shared Folder, Making a Note of a Shared Folder (3-24)
Configure the Windows firewall
Configuring Windows Firewall Settings (3-28)
5-17
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
6Enter the destination information.
Enter the SMB destination information. After you have completed entry of one item, select [Next >] to advance to
the next item.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
"Host name: port number" or "IP address: port number"
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::10]:445)
If the port number is not specified in [Host Name], the default port number is 445.
7Check the status.
1Check the information.
Change if needed.
2[Menu] > [Connection Test]
The message "Connected." appears when connection with the destination is correctly established. If "Cannot connect."
appears, check the information you entered.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the address book by selecting [Add Address Book].
8Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
9Selecting the functions.
Selecting [Functions] displays a list of functions.
[Send] (xii)
10Press the [Start] key.
Start sending.
Description Description Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*1 Computer name 64 characters
Path Share name
For example: scannerdata
If saving in a folder in the shared folder:
share name\folder name in shared folder
128 characters
Login User Name If the computer name and domain name are the same:
User Name:
For example: james.smith
If the computer name and domain name are different:
Domain name\User name
For example:abcdnet\yamada
64 characters
Login Password Windows login password
(Case sensitive.)
64 characters
5-18
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
Sending to an Folder on an FTP Server [FTP]
You can store the scanned document into the desired shared folder on a computer.
1[Home] key > [Send]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3On the basic screen for sending, select [Folder].
4For the folder type, select [FTP].
5Enter the destination information.
Enter the destination information. After you have completed entry of one item, select [Next >] to advance to the
next item.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
The table below explains the items to be entered.
*1 You can also specify the port number. Enter the following format separated by a colon.
When entering "Host Name:Host Number" or the "IP Address;Port Number".
IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address in square brackets [ ].
(Example: (Example: [2001:db8:a0b:12f0::1]:21)
The default port number (21) is used if a port number is not specified.
*2 When the FTP server is based on Linux/UNIX, the path including the sub-folder is combined by the slash (/) and not the
back-slash(\).
NOTE
Before sending a document, configure the FTP Client (Transmission).
[Protocol Settings] (8-44)
Description Data to be entered Max. No. of
Characters
Host Name*1 Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 70 characters
Path*2 Path to the receiving folder
For example: \User\ScanData
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.
Up to 128 characters
Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64 characters
Login Password FTP server login password
(Case sensitive.)
Up to 64 characters
5-19
Operation on the Machine > Frequently-Used Sending Method
6Check the status.
1Check the information.
Change if needed.
2[Menu] > [Connection Test]
The message "Connected" appears when connection with the destination is correctly established. screen appears. If
"Cannot connect" appears, check the information you entered.
To enter multiple destinations, select [Next Destination] and enter the next destination.
You can register the entered information in the Address Book by selecting [Add Address Book].
7Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
8Selecting the functions.
Selecting [Functions] displays a list of other functions.
[Send] (xii)
9Press the [Start] key.
Start sending.
Scanning with a TWAIN/WIA Compatible Application
This section explains how to scan an original using TWAIN or WIA.
1Display the screen.
1Start up the TWAIN or WIA compatible application.
2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
2Configure the settings.
Select scanning settings in the dialog box that opens.
NOTE
Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN/WIA driver is installed on a computer and the settings are
configured.
Setting TWAIN Driver (2-37)
Setting WIA Driver (2-39)
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
5-21
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Useful Sending Method
The useful scan (send) method is described below.
• WSD Scan: Saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
Executing WSD Scan (5-21)
• Scanning with File Management Utility: Scans a document using the settings of File Management Utility and saves it
to a specified network folder or PC.
Using File Management Utility to Scan an Original Document (5-22)
• Scanning using the fax server: A scanned original is send via a fax server.
Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send) (5-24)
• Sending to different types of destinations (Multi sending): Sends to different types of destination (E-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending) (5-23)
• Send to Me (E-mail): Sends to the E-mail address of the logged in user when user login is enabled.
Sending to the E-mail address of the Logged In User (5-23)
Executing WSD Scan
WSD scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.
1[Home] key > [Send]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3Display the screen.
Select [WSD Scan].
4Scan the originals.
Procedure using this machine
1Select [From Operation Panel].
2Select the destination computer > [OK]
Select [Reload] to reload the computer list.
To view information about the destination computer, select [ ].
NOTE
• To use WSD scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-connected,
and "WSD Scan" is set to [On] in the network settings.
WSD Scan (8-45)
• For information on operating the computer, refer to the computer's help or the operation guide of your
software.
5-22
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
4Press the [Start] key.
Sending begins and the software installed on the computer is activated.
Procedure from Your Computer
1[From Computer] > [Next >]
2Use the WSD-compatible software installed on the computer to send the images.
Using File Management Utility to Scan an Original Document
The File Management Utility (FMU) is an application that sends a document scanned on the machine to a specified
network folder or computer and stores it there. The workflow created by the FMU to process scanned documents can be
added on the machine to favorites.
1Make sure that File Management Utility is running on the computer (or server) on which
File Management Utility is installed.
2Place the originals.
3Recalling a Favorite.
Select [Favorites] on the Home Screen or [Send] > [Favorites]. Select the icon that appears.
4Follow the on-screen instructions to enter the necessary information and select [Next
>].
5When the scan settings screen appears, press each item and configure the necessary
settings.
The features that can be set depend on File Management Utility.
6Press the [Start] key.
Start sending.
NOTE
To use this function, you must install File Management Utility on your computer and configure settings for the
multifunction machine to be used, scanning conditions, and the file save location. For information on installing
File Management Utility, refer to the information below.
Installing Software (2-27)
For information on using File Management Utility, refer to the following:
File Management Utility User Guide
5-23
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)
You can specify destinations that combine E-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (Fax functionality
can only be used on products equipped with fax capability.). This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for
sending to different types of destination (E-mail addresses, folders, etc.) in a single operation.
Number of broadcast items: 100 maximum
However, the number of items is limited in the case of the send methods below.
Folders (SMP, FTP): Total of 5 SMB and FTP
Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail address or
folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the [Start] key to start transmission to all destinations at one
time.
Sending to the E-mail address of the Logged In User
When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
NOTE
• If the destinations include a fax, the images sent to all destinations will be black and white.
• If [Broadcast] is set to [Prohibit], it is not possible to directly enter multiple destinations.
Broadcast 8-25
NOTE
Before using this function, the following are necessary.
• The function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (3-8)
• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
5-24
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
1Select [Home] key.
2Select [Send to Me(E-mail)].
Using a FAX Server to Send (FAX Server Send)
You can send a scanned document via a fax server.
1[Home] key > [Send]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3On the basic screen for sending, select [FAX Server].
4Enter recipient information.
Entering Information Directly
1Select [Enter FAX Number].
2Enter the fax number.
3Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
Selecting from the Address Book
1Select [Address Book].
2Specify the destination.
Choosing from the Address Book (5-27)
NOTE
• A fax server is required to use this function. For information about the fax server, contact the applicable
administrator.
• FAX server settings must be configured to send a FAX.
Command Center RX User Guide
[FAX Server Settings] (8-59)
NOTE
Use the numeric keys to enter a number.
5-25
Operation on the Machine > Useful Sending Method
3Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
Selecting from an External Address Book
1Select [Ext Address Book].
2Specify the destination.
Choosing from the Address Book (5-27)
3Select [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Destination Operations (5-27)
5Selecting the functions.
Place the originals.
[Send] (xii)
6Press the [Start] key.
Start sending.
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
5-26
Operation on the Machine > Canceling Scanning
Canceling Scanning
You can also cancel jobs by selecting the [Stop] key.
1Select the [Stop] key with the send screen displayed.
2Cancel a job.
When there is a job is being scanned
Job Cancel appears.
When there is a job sending or on standby
Canceling job screen appears.
Select the job you want to cancel. > [Delete] > [Yes]
NOTE
Selecting the [Stop] key will not temporarily stop a job that you have already started sending.
5-27
Operation on the Machine > Destination Operations
Destination Operations
This section explains how to select and confirm the destination.
In addition to direct entry, destination information can also be selected using the methods below.
• Choosing from the Address Book
Choosing from the Address Book (5-27)
• Choosing from the External Address Book
Choosing from the External Address Book (5-29)
• Choosing from the One Touch Key
Choosing from the One Touch Key (5-29)
• Choosing from the Speed Dial
Choosing from the Speed Dial (5-30)
• Choosing from the FAX
FAX Operation Guide
Choosing from the Address Book
Select a destination registered in the Address Book.
1In the basic screen for sending, select [Address Book].
NOTE
• You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you select the [Send] key.
[Default Screen] (8-11)
• If you are using the products equipped with the fax function, you can specify the fax destination. Enter the
other party number using the numeric keypad.
NOTE
For more information about how to register destinations in the Address Book, refer to the following:
Adding a Destination (3-32)
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
5-28
Operation on the Machine > Destination Operations
2Select the destination.
Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. You can select multiple destinations. The
selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.
To perform a more detailed search, select [Menu].
Destination Search
Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched. Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also
available.
3Accept the destination > [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
NOTE
• To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
• If [Prohibit] is selected for the [Broadcast Transmission] setting, entry of multiple destinations is not supported.
In this case, selection of a previously registered group containing multiple recipients also is not supported.
Broadcast (8-25)
Keys used Search type Subjects searched
1 Advanced search by
destination
Advanced search narrows down registered destinations
according to type (mail, folder (SMP, FTP), FAX, group).
2Narrow Down Advanced search by
destination
Advanced search narrows down registered destinations
according to type (mail, folder (SMP, FTP), FAX, group).
Search (Name) Search by name Search by registered name.
Search by number Search by number Search by registered address number.
Sort (Name) Display Sequence Search Search by registered name.
Sort (No.) Search by registered address number.
3 Search by name Search by registered name.
NOTE
You can set the default "Sort" settings.
Sort (8-30)
Address Book (All)
10:10
002
ABCD
< Back OKCancelMenu
123456
EFGH
IJKL
MNOP
1/2
003
004
001
efg@efg.com
12345.com
11111.com
1
2
3
5-29
Operation on the Machine > Destination Operations
Choosing from the External Address Book
Select a destination registered in the external address book.
1On the basic screen for sending, select [Ext Address Book].
2Select the destination.
Select the checkbox to select the desired destination from the list. You can select multiple destinations. The
selected destinations are indicated by a checkmark in the check box.
To perform a more detailed search, select [Menu].
3Accept the destination > [OK].
Destinations can be changed later.
Checking and Editing Destinations (5-30)
Choosing from the One Touch Key
Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
In the basic screen for sending, select the One Touch Keys where the destination is registered.
NOTE
For details on the External Address Book, refer to the following:
Command Center RX User Guide
NOTE
To change to a different external address book, select [Switch Ext. Addr. Book] and then select the external
address book you want.
NOTE
You can set the default "Sort" settings.
Sort 8-30
NOTE
If the One Touch Keys for the desired destination are not displayed on the touch panel, select [ ] or [ ] to
show the One Touch keys that are not displayed. This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have already
been registered.
For more information on adding One Touch keys, refer to the following:
Assigning a Destination to a One Touch Key (3-37)
One Touch Key
10:10
AAA
Cancel
BBB CCC
1/9
OK
001
004
007
010 011
008
005
002
012
009
006
003
DDD EEE FFF
GGG HHH III
JJJ KKK LLL
5-30
Operation on the Machine > Destination Operations
Choosing from the Speed Dial
Access the destination by specifying the 3-digit (001 to 100) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
Pressing the [Quick No. Search] key displays a number entry screen. Select the number entry area and then use the [#
Keys] to enter a One Touch Key number.
Checking and Editing Destinations
Check and edit a selected destination.
1On the basic screen for sending, select [Check].
2Check and edit the destination.
Select [+] to add a destination.
To check the destinations contents, press [ ]. The details of destinations that specify a new mail address or
computer can be modified.
Select the destination and then select [ ] to delete the destination.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send, the confirmation screen of destinations appears after pressing
the [Start] key.
NOTE
If you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit, select [OK].
NOTE
• When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New Destination, the confirmation screen appears. Enter the same
host name and path again, and select [OK].
Entry Check for New Dest. (8-25)
• When selecting [On] for "Destination Check before Send", the confirmation screen appears after pressing the
[Start] key.
Dest. Check before Send (8-25)
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (5-30)
One Touch Key No. Entry
10:10
(001 - 100)
Cancel OK
5-31
Operation on the Machine > Destination Operations
Dest. Check before Send (8-25)
1Select [ ] or [ ] to check all destination.
[Selecting [ ] shows detailed information about the selected destination.
To delete a destination: Select the destination you want to delete. > [ ]> [Yes]
To add the destination: select [Cancel] and then return to the destination screen.
2Select [Check].
Recall
Recall is a function allowing you to send the last entered destination once again. Or if you want to send to the same
destination. In cases such as this, you can select [Recall Destination] and recall the last destination to which you sent a
fax back into the destination list.
1Select [Recall].
This displays the destination of the last send.
2Press the [Start] key.
Transmission begins.
NOTE
Be sure to confirm all destination by displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot select [Check] unless you
have confirmed all destination.
NOTE
When the last sending included FAX, folders and E-mail destinations, they are also displayed. Add or delete
destinations as required.
NOTE
• When [On] is selected in [Dest. Check before Send], a destination confirmation screen is displayed when you
press the [Start] key.
Confirmation Screen of Destinations (5-30)
• Recall information is canceled in the following conditions.
- When you turn the power off
- When you send a next image (new recall information is registered)
- When you log out
Destinations Check
10:10Check the destinations and press [Check].
Menu
1/2
1234567890
2345678901
3456789012
4567890123
A OFFICE
B OFFICE
C OFFICE
D OFFICE
Cancel Check
5-32
Operation on the Machine > How to Use the FAX Function
How to Use the FAX Function
On products with a FAX function, it is possible to use the FAX function. The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make
use of fax functionality.
FAX Operation Guide
5-33
Operation on the Machine > Basic Operation for Document Box
Basic Operation for Document Box
This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with custom
boxes.
Box List Operations
Document List Operations
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. The operations below are available.
NOTE
In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User Logon
privileges, refer to the following:
Edit the custom box. (3-52)
1 This opens the selected box.
2 You can select [Menu] and then perform one
of the following operations: search for a
Document Box search (box name, box
number), change the sorting sequence of
display items (box name, box number,
owner), register a new box, modify or delete
a box.
3 This displays detailed information about each
box.
1 A check mark indicates an item is selected.
2 You can select [Menu] and then perform one
of the following operations: print, move,
search for (by name), edit, or delete a
document, select or deselect all, change the
sorting sequence of display items (name,
box number, owner)
3 Shows detailed information about the
document.
4 Can be used for a document name search.
NOTE
• You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes.
• Select [ ] to change to list display.
Custom Box
10:10Custom Box.
Box 01
Next >Menu
No Owner
1/1
0001
1
2
3
Box:Box01
10:10Document Box.
< Back PrintMenu
1/1
Cancel
1
2
4
3
5-34
Operation on the Machine > Custom Box Operations
Custom Box Operations
Saving Scanned Documents to a Custom Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box]
2Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
3Store the forms.
1Select the box > [Menu] > [Store File]
2Specify the type of originals, scanning density, etc., as necessary.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
[Store File] (xiv)
3Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the specified Custom Box.
Moving Documents in Custom Box
This function allows you to move documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes.
1Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box.
NOTE
• Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.
• To add or recall a favorite, select the [Favorites] icon.
Editing the Home Screen (3-8)
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
5-35
Operation on the Machine > Custom Box Operations
2Move the documents.
1Select the document in the list that you want to move by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
2[Menu] > [Move/Copy] > [Move to Another Custom Box]
3Select the move destination.
4[Select Current Folder] > [Yes]
This moves the selected documents.
Copying Documents in Custom Box into Other Boxes
This function allows you to copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes.
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box.
2Move the documents.
1Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
2[Menu] > [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Another Custom Box]
3Select the copy destination.
4[Copy] > [Yes]
The selected document is copied.
Copying Documents in Custom Box to Removable Memory
This function allows you to copy documents stored in custom boxes to removable memory.
NOTE
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is being moved is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
NOTE
If the box to which the document is being copied is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
5-36
Operation on the Machine > Custom Box Operations
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box.
2Move the documents.
1Select the document in the list that you want to copy by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
2[Menu] > [Move/Copy] > [Copy to Memory]
3Select the copy destination.
4[Select Current Folder] > [Yes]
The selected document is copied.
Joining Documents in Custom Box
You can join documents within a custom box into one file.
1Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box.
2Join the document.
1Select the documents in the list that you wish to join by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
You can join up to 100 documents.
2Arrange the documents in the order they will be joined. > [OK]
Highlight the document you want to move and then use [Cancel] and [Clear] to move it.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
NOTE
You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the documents to
be joined beforehand.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
5-37
Operation on the Machine > Custom Box Operations
3 Enter the name for the joined document > [Next >]
Enter up to 64 characters as the document name.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
4Select [Yes].
The documents are joined.
Deleting Documents in Custom Box
1Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box.
2Delete the document.
1Select the document in the list that you want to delete by selecting the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
2[] > [Yes]
The document is deleted.
Sending Documents in a Custom Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box] > Select the box.
2Send Start.
1Select the document in the list that you want to send by selecting its checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
NOTE
After joining, the original documents are left unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer needed.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
You cannot select [ ] without first selecting a document.
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
You cannot select and send multiple documents.
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
5-38
Operation on the Machine > Custom Box Operations
2Select [Send].
3Set the destination.
For more information on selecting destinations, refer to the following:
Destination Operations (5-27)
4Specify the file type, resolution, and other settings as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
[Send] (xvi)
5Press the [Start] key.
Sending of the selected document begins.
Sending Documents in Custom Box to E-mail Address of
Logged in user.
When user login is enabled, documents in the custom box are sent to the E-mail address of the logged in user.
NOTE
Depending on the settings, the address book screen may appear.
NOTE
For information about registering a shortcut or recalling a favorite, refer to the information below.
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) (3-46)
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) (3-41)
NOTE
When this function is used, functions other than transmission cannot be used.
Before using this function, the following are necessary.
• The function icon must be displayed in the home screen.
Editing the Home Screen (3-8)
• An E-mail address must be set in user login for the user who logs in.
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
5-39
Operation on the Machine > Custom Box Operations
1Select [Home] key.
2Select [Send to Me(E-mail)].
Scanning Document Stored in a Custom Box
Follow the steps as below for scanning a document stored in a custom box using the TWAIN driver.
1Display the screen.
1Activate the TWAIN compatible application software.
2Select the machine using the application and display the dialog box.
2Display lists of docu men ts.
1Select a custom box from "Box List" the stored a document.
If a password has been set for the box, the password entry screen appears. Enter the password and click the [OK] button.
When you select a box, the document files in the Custom Box appear in [Document List].
2Set how to display the document data. Click the [Start] button to select each item.
3Click the [OK] button.
3Scan the originals.
1Select the document data to be scanned from [Document List].
Enter the document data name in the Search (Name) to find the data having the same document data name or the
document data name with the same beginning.
Click the [Detail] button to display the selected document data. When the document data includes multiple pages, select
the checkbox beside the pages you want to scan. The selected pages will be scanned.
2Click the [Acquire] button.
This scans the document data to the computer.
NOTE
Before sending a document, confirm that TWAIN driver is installed on a computer and the settings are
configured.
Setting TWAIN Driver (2-37)
To read a document stored in a custom box, use the TWAIN driver setting screen to change from "Model" to a
model name that has "(Box)" appended.
NOTE
For selecting the machine, see the Operation Guide or Help for each application software.
NOTE
For the settings, refer to Help in the dialog box.
NOTE
In this case, the scanned page or the selected document data will not be deleted from the Custom Box.
5-40
Operation on the Machine > Printing Data Saved on the Machine
Printing Data Saved on the Machine
You can save a print job using a Custom Box or Job Box of this machine and print it when required.
Printing Documents from Private Print Box
In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not to be printed until you operate the machine. When sending the job
from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver. The job is released for printing by
entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of the print job. The data will be deleted upon
completion of the print job or after the power switch is turned off.
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print > [Print]
2Enter the access code.
3Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
4Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is automatically deleted.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Private Print Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete. > [ ]
2Enter the access code.
The document is deleted.
䝆䝵䝤䝪㻚㻚㻚㻌㻙 䝥䝷䜲䝧䞊䝖䝥䝸䞁䝖㻛䝆䝵䝤ಖ␃
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜ᩥ᭩䝪䝑䜽䝇⏬㠃䛷䛩䚹
㼐㼛㼏㻜㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻠㻤㻞㻝
㼐㼛㼏㻠㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻡㻝㻟㻤
㻨ᡠ䜛 ༳ๅ䝯䝙䝳䞊
㻝㻛㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻝㻦㻝㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job
10:10Document Box.
doc0100908134821
doc4100908135138
< Back PrintMenu
1/1
2014/10/10 11:11
2014/10/10 10:10
1
2
5-41
Operation on the Machine > Printing Data Saved on the Machine
Printing Document from Stored Job Box
In Stored Job, the print data sent from the application is saved to the machine. You can set up an access code as
necessary. If you set up an access code, enter the access code when printing. Print data will be stored in the Stored Job
Box after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print > [Print]
2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Sto red Job Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Private Print/Stored Job].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete. > [ ]
2Enter the access code.
The document is deleted.
NOTE
If the document is protected by an access code, the password entry screen will be displayed. Enter the
password using the numeric keys.
䝆䝵䝤䝪㻚㻚㻚㻌㻙 䝥䝷䜲䝧䞊䝖䝥䝸䞁䝖㻛䝆䝵䝤ಖ␃
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜ᩥ᭩䝪䝑䜽䝇⏬㠃䛷䛩䚹
㼐㼛㼏㻜㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻠㻤㻞㻝
㼐㼛㼏㻠㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻡㻝㻟㻤
㻨ᡠ䜛 ༳ๅ䝯䝙䝳䞊
㻝㻛㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻝㻦㻝㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job
10:10Document Box.
doc0100908134821
doc4100908135138
< Back PrintMenu
1/1
2014/10/10 11:11
2014/10/10 10:10
1
2
5-42
Operation on the Machine > Printing Data Saved on the Machine
Printing Document from Quick Copy Box
Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed. Activating Quick Copy and printing a
document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the Quick Copy Job Box. When additional copies
are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the touch panel. When power is turned off, all stored
jobs will be deleted.
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print > [Print]
2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Quick Copy Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete. > [ ]
2Select [Yes].
The document is deleted.
NOTE
• Number of storable documents (factory default): 32
• When the number of jobs reaches the limit, the oldest job will be overwritten by the new one.
• To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Quick Copy Job Retention (8-26)
䝆䝵䝤䝪㻚㻚㻚㻌㻙 䝥䝷䜲䝧䞊䝖䝥䝸䞁䝖㻛䝆䝵䝤ಖ␃
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜ᩥ᭩䝪䝑䜽䝇⏬㠃䛷䛩䚹
㼐㼛㼏㻜㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻠㻤㻞㻝
㼐㼛㼏㻠㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻡㻝㻟㻤
㻨ᡠ䜛 ༳ๅ䝯䝙䝳䞊
㻝㻛㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻝㻦㻝㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job
10:10Document Box.
doc0100908134821
doc4100908135138
< Back PrintMenu
1/1
2014/10/10 11:11
2014/10/10 10:10
1
2
5-43
Operation on the Machine > Printing Data Saved on the Machine
Printing Document from Proof and Hold Box
The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the remaining
copies. Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box. To continue to print the remaining copies, use the touch panel. You can
change the number of copies to print.
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Print the document.
1Select the document to print > [Print]
2Specify the number of copies to print as desired.
3Select [OK].
Printing starts.
Deleting the Documents Stored in the Proof and Hold Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Job Box]
2Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold].
3Select the creator of the document.
2Delete the document.
1Select the document to delete. > [ ]
2Select [Yes].
The document is deleted.
Printing Documents in Custom Box
1Display the screen.
1[Home] key > [Custom Box]
䝆䝵䝤䝪㻚㻚㻚㻌㻙 䝥䝷䜲䝧䞊䝖䝥䝸䞁䝖㻛䝆䝵䝤ಖ␃
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜ᩥ᭩䝪䝑䜽䝇⏬㠃䛷䛩䚹
㼐㼛㼏㻜㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻠㻤㻞㻝
㼐㼛㼏㻠㻝㻜㻜㻥㻜㻤㻝㻟㻡㻝㻟㻤
㻨ᡠ䜛 ༳ๅ䝯䝙䝳䞊
㻝㻛㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻝㻦㻝㻝
㻞㻜㻝㻠㻛㻝㻜㻛㻝㻜㻌㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜
Job Box - Private Print/Stored Job
10:10Document Box.
doc0100908134821
doc4100908135138
< Back PrintMenu
1/1
2014/10/10 11:11
2014/10/10 10:10
1
2
5-44
Operation on the Machine > Printing Data Saved on the Machine
2Select the box containing the document you want to print.
2Print the document.
1Select the document you wish to send by checking the checkbox.
The document is marked with a checkmark.
2Select [Print].
3This displays a screen for selecting print settings to be used.
To use the settings used at the time of printing (when the document was saved), select [Print As Is]. Select [OK] to start
printing.
Printing begins.
If you need to change the print settings, select [Print after Change Settings].
4Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
[Print] (xv)
5Press the [Start] key.
Printing of the selected document begins.
NOTE
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the correct password.
NOTE
To cancel a selection, select the checkbox again so that it is no longer ticked.
5-45
Operation on the Machine > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing from the Handheld Device
This machine supports the print functions and services listed below.
• AirPrint
• Google Cloud Print
•Mopria
According to the supported OS and application, you can print the job from any handheld device or computer without
installing a printer driver.
Printing by AirPrint
AirPrint is a printing function that is included standard in iOS 4.2 and later products, and Mac OS X 10.7 and later
products.
To use the AirPrint, make sure that the AirPrint setting is enabled in the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Printing by Google Cloud Print
Google Cloud Print is a printing service provided by Google. This service enables a user with a Google account to print
from a machine connected to the Internet.
The machine can be configured in the Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Printing by Mopria
Mopria is a standard on printing function included in Android 4.4 or later products. Mopria Print Service needs to be
installed and enabled in advance.
For details on how to use, refer to a Web site of Mopria Alliance.
Printing with Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct is a wireless LAN standard that Wi-Fi Alliance has been established. This is one of the functions of the
wireless LAN, without a wireless LAN access point or wireless LAN router, between devices can communicate directly
on a peer to peer basis.
The printing procedure by the Wi-Fi Direct is the same as that from the normal handheld devices.
When you use a printer name or Bonjour name on the port settings of the printer property, you can print the job by
specifying the name at Wi-Fi Direct connection.
When you use an Time Zone for the port, specify the Time Zone of this machine.
NOTE
A Google account is necessary to use Google Cloud Print. Obtain a Google account if you do not have one.
It is also necessary to register the machine with the Google Cloud Print service in advance. The machine can
be registered from a PC connected to the same network.
5-46
Operation on the Machine > Printing from the Handheld Device
Printing with NFC
When the Delete after Print and Wi-Fi Direct has been configured in advance, the network between this machine and
handheld device will be configured by simply tapping an NFC tag.
5-47
Operation on the Machine > Operating Using Removable USB Memory
Operating Using Removable USB Memory
Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the USB
memory without having to use a computer.
The following file types can be printed:
• PDF file (Version 1.7 or older)
• TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
• JPEG file format
• XPS file format
• OpenXPS file format
• Encrypted PDF file
In addition, you can store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine.
The following file types can be stored:
• PDF file format
• TIFF file format
• JPEG file format
• XPS file format
• OpenXPS file format
• Word file format*1
• Excel file format*1
• PowerPoint file format*1
• High-compression PDF file format
*1 Displayed only when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)
1Place the originals.
Place the Originals. (5-3)
NOTE
Number of storable files: 1,000
5-48
Operation on the Machine > Operating Using Removable USB Memory
2Plug the USB memory.
1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. Are you
sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].
This displays the Removable Memory screen.
3Store the forms.
1Select the folder where the file will be stored.
The machine will display the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
2Select [ ].
3Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
[Store File] (xvii)
4Press the [Start] key.
The original is scanned and the data is stored in the USB memory.
Check the USB Memory Information
1In the removable memory screen, select [Memory Information].
2Once you confirm the information, select [Close].
Removing USB Memory
1Display the screen.
[Home] key > [Removable Memory]
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.
IMPORTANT
Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.
5-49
Operation on the Machine > Operating Using Removable USB Memory
2[Menu] > [Remove Memory]
If the message [Remove Memory] appears on the removable memory screen, select [OK] and then remove the
removable memory.
Printing from Removable USB Memory
1Plug the USB memory.
1Plug the USB memory into the USB Memory Slot.
2When the machine reads the USB memory, "Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. Are you
sure?" may appear. Select [Yes].
Displays the Removable Memory screen.
2Print the document.
1Select the folder that contains the file to be printed.
The machine will display documents in the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
NOTE
USB memory can also be removed after checking the status of the device.
Device/Communication (7-10)
NOTE
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels, including the root folder.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB Memory Slot.
NOTE
If the message does not appear, select [Removable Memory] on the Home screen.
NOTE
• Number of displayable documents: 1,000
• To return to a higher level folder, select [< Back].
5-50
Operation on the Machine > Operating Using Removable USB Memory
2Select the file to be printed > [Print]
3Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc., as desired.
For the features that can be set, refer to the following:
[Print] (xix)
4Press the [Start] key.
Printing of the selected file begins.
6-1
Advanced Setting of Functions >
6 Advanced Setting of
Functions
This chapter explains the following topics:
Icons in This Chapter ......................................................................................................................................... 6-2
[ID Card Copy] ................................................................................................................................................... 6-3
[Original Size] ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
[Paper Selection] ................................................................................................................................................ 6-5
[Mixed Size Originals] ........................................................................................................................................ 6-7
[Original Orientation] .......................................................................................................................................... 6-9
[Collate/Offset] ................................................................................................................................................. 6-10
[Staple] ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-12
[Paper Output] .................................................................................................................................................. 6-15
[Density] ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-16
[Original Image] ................................................................................................................................................ 6-17
[EcoPrint] ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-18
[Color Selection] ............................................................................................................................................... 6-19
[Color Balance] ................................................................................................................................................ 6-20
[Hue Adjustment] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-21
[Sharpness] ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-22
[Contrast] ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-23
[Background Density Adj.] ................................................................................................................................ 6-24
[Saturation] ....................................................................................................................................................... 6-25
[Prevent Bleed-through] ................................................................................................................................... 6-26
[Zoom] .............................................................................................................................................................. 6-27
[Combine] ......................................................................................................................................................... 6-29
[Margin] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-31
[Duplex] ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-32
[Continuous Scan] ............................................................................................................................................ 6-35
[Auto Image Rotation] ...................................................................................................................................... 6-36
[Job Finish Notice] ........................................................................................................................................... 6-37
[File Name Entry] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-38
[Priority Override] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-39
[Skip Blank Page] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-40
[2-sided/Book Original] ..................................................................................................................................... 6-41
[Sending Size] .................................................................................................................................................. 6-42
[File Format] ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-43
[File Separation] ............................................................................................................................................... 6-48
[Scan Resolution] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-49
[E-mail Subject/Body] ....................................................................................................................................... 6-50
[FTP Encrypted TX] ......................................................................................................................................... 6-51
[Delete after Printed] ........................................................................................................................................ 6-52
[Delete after Transmitted] ................................................................................................................................. 6-53
[Storing Size] .................................................................................................................................................... 6-54
[Long Original] .................................................................................................................................................. 6-55
[Encrypted PDF Password] .............................................................................................................................. 6-56
[JPEG/TIFF Print] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-57
[XPS Fit to Page] ............................................................................................................................................. 6-58
[Erase Shadowed Areas] ................................................................................................................................. 6-59
6-2
Advanced Setting of Functions > Icons in This Chapter
Icons in This Chapter
On pages that explain a convenient function, the modes in which that function can be used are indicated by icons.
Printing:
Sending:
Storing:
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Custom
Box
6-3
Advanced Setting of Functions > [ID Card Copy]
[ID Card Copy]
Use this when you want to copy a driver's license or an insurance card. When you scan the front and back of the card,
both sides will be combined and copied onto a single sheet.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Copy
6-4
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Original Size]
[Original Size]
Specify the original size to
Select [Auto], [Metric], [Inch], [Others], or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
*1 For information on how to register the custom original size, refer to the information below.
Custom Original Size (8-12)
*2 Input units can be changed with the System Menu.
[Measurement] (8-20)
Item Value Description
Auto --- Automatically detect the original size.
Inch Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Statement, 11x15”, Oficio II
Select from the Inch series standard sizes.
Metric A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A5, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R,
B6, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
Select from the Metric standard sizes.
Others 8K, 16K-R, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki
(Return postcard), Custom*1
Select from special standard sizes and custom
sizes.
Size Entry Metric
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Enter the size not included in the standard
sizes.*2
When you have selected [Size Entry], select
[+] or [-] to set the sizes of "X" (horizontal) and
"Y" (vertical). Select [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
NOTE
Be sure to always specify the original size when using custom size originals.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-5
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Paper Selection]
[Paper Selection]
Select the cassette or multi-purpose tray that contains the required paper size.
If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of the original is selected automatically.
To select [Multipurpose Tray], press [Paper Settings] and specify the paper size and the media type.
NOTE
• Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette.
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings] (8-9)
• Cassettes after Cassette 2 to 3 are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-6
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Paper Selection]
The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.
*1 The input units can be changed in System Menu.
[Measurement] (8-20)
*2 For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to the following:
Media Type Setting (8-14)
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Special Paper Action (8-14)
Item Value Description
Paper Size Inch Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive,
Oficio II
Select from the Inch series
standard sizes.
Metric A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio,
216 x 340mm
Select from the Metric series
standard sizes.
Others ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
Select from special standard
sizes and custom sizes.
Size Entry Metric
X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Enter the size not included in the
standard size.*1
When you have selected [Size
Entry], use [+]/[-] or the numeric
keys to set the sizes of "X"
(horizontal) and "Y" (vertical).
Select [# Keys] to use the
numeric keys for entry.
Inch
X: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Media type Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Vellum (59 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*2,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*2, Letterhead*2, Envelope,Thick (106 g/m2 or more),
Coated, High Quality, Custom 1-8*2
IMPORTANT
When paper size and the media type for MP tray is specified, [Media Type] is selected. Note that if
[Multipurpose Tray] is pressed at this point, the settings will be canceled.
NOTE
• You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them as
default.
[Multi Purpose Tray] (8-10)
• If the specified size of paper is not loaded in the paper source cassette or multi purpose tray, a confirmation
screen appears. Load the required paper in the multi purpose tray and select [Continue]. Copying starts.
6-7
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Mixed Size Originals]
[Mixed Size Originals]
Scans all sheets in the document processor, even if they are of different sizes.
This function cannot be used if platen is used.
Copying
Sending
Storing
Supported Combinations of Originals
Same Width
When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.
•B4 and B5
•A3 and A4 (Ledger and Letter)
•A4-R and Folio (Legal and Letter-R)
Item Available settings Description
Mixed Size Originals Off
Configure the settings. Scans and copies multiple sheets of the same
width using the document processor.
Item Value Description
Mixed Size Originals Off -
Same Width Scans and sends multiple sheets of the same
width using the document processor.
Item Value Description
Mixed Size Originals Off -
Same Width Scans and stores multiple sheets of the same
width using the document processor.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-8
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Mixed Size Originals]
Example: B4 and B5
NOTE
• When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination, make sure to set "Auto Detect Original
Size" to [On] for "Folio".
A4-R and Folio
Auto Detect Original Size (8-12)
• Loading Originals in the Document Processor: up to 30 sheets
6-9
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Original Orientation]
[Original Orientation]
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to scan correct direction.
To use any of the following functions, the document's original orientation must be set.
•Zoom
•Duplex
• Margin
• Combine
• Stapling (Option)
• [2-sided/Book Original]
Select original orientation from [Top Edge on Top], [Top Edge on Left].
*1 Displayed only when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Setting Items Image
Top Edge on Top
Top Edge on Left
z
Auto*1
NOTE
The default setting for Original Orientation can be changed.
Original Orientation (Copy) (8-16)
Original Orientation (Send/Store) (8-16)
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-10
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Collate/Offset]
[Collate/Offset]
Offsets the output by page or set.
Collate
Scans multiple originals and delivers complete sets of copies as required according to page number.
Offset
Without Document Finisher (Option)
When offset is used, the paper of each set (or each page) is rotated 90 degrees when output.
Without Document Finisher (Option)
When offset is used, the paper of each set (or each page) is offset when output.
NOTE
When offset is used without a Document Finisher, an additional paper feed unit is required. The paper size of
the additional paper feed unit must be the same as that of the selected paper feed unit, but the paper orientation
must be different.
The paper sizes supported in Offset: A4, B5, Letter, 16K
Setting Items Description
Off Sort and offset are not performed.
Collate Only Collate Only
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-11
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Collate/Offset]
Offset Each Page Each page is offset.
Offset Each Set Offset Each Set
6-12
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Staple]
[Staple]
Staples the finished documents. The staple position can be selected.
NOTE
This function requires the optional Sheet Finisher.
Item Value Description
Staple: Off
1 staple (Top Left) Select the staple position. For details on original orientation
and staple position, refer to the following:
Original Orientation and Staple Position (6-13)
1 staple (Top Right)
2 staples (Left)
2 staples (Top)
2 staples (Right)
Original
Orientation
Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left Press [Original Orientation] and then select the original
orientation as either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left].
Next, select [OK].
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-13
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Staple]
Original Orientation and Staple Position
Mixed Size Stapling
Even with mixed paper sizes, if the sizes have the same width as shown in the combinations below, the output can be
stapled.
• A3 and A4
• B4 and B5
• Ledger and Letter
• Legal and Letter-R
[Original
Orientation] Top Edge on Top Top Edge on Left
Image
Cassette paper
orientation
Cassette paper
orientation
NOTE
One position staple is not slanted for the following paper sizes.
B5-R, 16K-R
6-15
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Paper Output]
[Paper Output]
Specify the output tray.
with optional Document Finisher
*1 Display only when an optional Sheet Finisher is installed.
Setting Items Description
Inner Tray*1 Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine.
Job Separator Tray Delivery to the job separator tray.
Item Description
Finisher Tray*1 Delivery to the tray of the optional Document Finisher.
Job Separator Tray Delivery to the job separator tray.
NOTE
The default setting for Paper Output can be changed.
Paper Output (8-18)
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-16
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Density]
[Density]
Adjust density.
(Value: [-4] to [+4] (Lighter to Darker))
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-17
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Original Image]
[Original Image]
Select original image type for best results.
Copying
*1 If gray text is not printed completely using [Text+Photo], selecting [Text] may improve the result.
Sending/Storing
Item Description
Text+Photo*1 Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Best for documents that are mostly text.
Graphic/Map Best for graphics and maps.
Printer Output Best for documents printed on this machine originally.
Others Original Image Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Best for documents that are mostly text.
Graphic/Map Best for graphics and maps.
Printer Output Best for documents printed on this machine originally.
Highlighter On Select to bring out text and markings made with a
highlighter pen. Reproduces the color of the highlighter
pen to the extent possible.
Off Does not reproduce the color of the highlighter.
Item Description
Text+Photo Best for mixed text and photo documents.
Photo Best for photos taken with a camera.
Text Sharply renders pencil text and fine lines.Text
Light Text/Fine Line Clearly reproduces faint characters written in pencil, etc., and thin lines on map originals or
diagrams.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-18
Advanced Setting of Functions > [EcoPrint]
[EcoPrint]
EcoPrint saves toner when printing. Use this function for test prints or any other occasion when high quality print is not
required.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-19
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Color Selection]
[Color Selection]
Select the color mode setting.
Copying
Printing
*1 Not displayed when printing from the Document Box.
Sending/Storing
Item Description
Auto Color Automatically recognizes whether documents are color or black and white.
Full Color Prints documents in full color.
(B & W) Prints documents in black and white.
Item Description
Full Color*1 Prints documents in full color.
(B & W)*1 Prints documents in black and white.
Item Description
Auto (Color/Gray) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white,
and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in
Grayscale.
Auto (Color/B & W) Automatically recognizes whether the document is color or black and white,
and scan color documents in Full Color and black and white documents in
Black and White.
Full Color Scans a document in full color.
Grayscale Scans the document in grayscale. Produces a smooth, detailed image.
(B & W) Prints in black &white.
Copy
USB
Memory
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-20
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Color Balance]
[Color Balance]
Adjust the strength of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black.
Example:
Item Description
Off
On Cyan Use the [<] and [>] keys, which are at both sides of the color to be adjusted
(cyan, magenta, yellow, black), to adjust each color.
Magenta
Yellow
Black
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.
Copy
㻹㼛㼞㼑㻌㻹㼍㼓㼑㼚㼠㼍㻻㼞㼕㼓㼕㼚㼍㼘㻸㼑㼟㼟㻌㻹㼍㼓㼑㼚㼠㼍
6-21
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Hue Adjustment]
[Hue Adjustment]
Adjust the color (hue) of images.
Make adjustments such as adjusting red to a strong yellow-red or yellow to a strong green-yellow to make more creative
copies.
The following settings can be set.
Item Description
Off
All Adjust hue for all colors.
Use the [<] and [>] keys to adjust the hue.
Individual Select individual colors to adjust the hue.
Select [Red], [Magenta], [Blue], [Yellow], [Green] or [Cyan] and use [<] or [>] to
adjust the hue.
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color copying.
These adjustments are especially useful on rich color images.
Copy
㻻㼞㼕㼓㼕㼚㼍㼘
㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼥㼑㼘㼘㼛㼣㼕㼟㼔㻙㼞㼑㼐㻌
㼠㼛㻌㼙㼛㼞㼑㻌㼥㼑㼘㼘㼛㼣㻘㻌㼎㼘㼡㼕㼟㼔㻙㼏㼥㼍㼚㻌
㼠㼛㻌㼙㼛㼞㼑㻌㼎㼘㼡㼑㻌㻔㼠㼔㼑㻌㻌㻌㻌㼜㼍㼞㼠㻕
㼃㼔㼑㼚㻌㼍㼐㼖㼡㼟㼠㼕㼚㼓㻌㼥㼑㼘㼘㼛㼣㻌㼠㼛㻌
㼙㼛㼞㼑㻌㼓㼞㼑㼑㼚㻘㻌㼎㼘㼡㼑㻌㼠㼛㻌㼙㼛㼞㼑㻌
㼙㼍㼓㼑㼚㼠㼍㻌㻔㼠㼔㼑㻌㻌㻌㻌㼜㼍㼞㼠㻕
6-22
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Sharpness]
[Sharpness]
Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward
"Sharpen". When copying images made up of patterned dots such as magazine photos, in which moire*1 patterns
appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be obtained by setting the sharpness toward "Blur".
*1 Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.
Item Description
[+1] to [+3] (Sharpen) Emphasizes the image outline.
[-1] to [-3] (Blur) Blurs the image outline. Can weaken a Moire*1 effect.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Original More SharpLess Sharp
6-23
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Contrast]
[Contrast]
You can adjust the contrast between light and dark areas of the image.
Item Description
[+1] to [+4] (Higher) Increases the sharpness of colors.
[-1] to [-4] (Lower) Creates smoother colors.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Original HigherLower
6-24
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Background Density Adj.]
[Background Density Adj.]
Removes dark background from originals, such as newspapers.
If the ground color is obtrusive, select [Auto]. If [Auto] does not remove the background color, select [Manual] and adjust
the background color density.
Setting Items Description
Off Does not adjust the ground color.
Auto Automatically adjusts the background density based on the original.
Manual Select [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust the background density manually.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-25
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Saturation]
[Saturation]
Adjust the color saturation of the image.
NOTE
This feature is used with full color and auto color. Saturation is disabled if Auto Color detects black and white
originals.
Item Description
[-1] to [-3] (Grayish) Results in paler color.
[+1] to [+3] (Vivid) Results in more vivid color.
Copy
㻻㼞㼕㼓㼕㼚㼍㼘㻳㼞㼍㼥㼕㼟㼔 㼂㼕㼢㼕㼐
㻾㼑㼟㼡㼘㼠㼟㻌㼕㼚㻌㼜㼍㼘㼑㼞㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻚 㻾㼑㼟㼡㼘㼠㼟㻌㼕㼚㻌㼙㼛㼞㼑㻌㼢㼕㼢㼕㼐㻌㼏㼛㼘㼛㼞㻚
6-26
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Prevent Bleed-through]
[Prevent Bleed-through]
Hides background colors and image bleed-through when scanning thin original.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-27
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Zoom]
[Zoom]
Adjust the zoom to reduce or enlarge the image.
Copying
The following zoom options are available.
Auto
Adjusts the image to match the paper size.
Standard Zoom
Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.
Others
Reduces or enlarges at magnifications other than the Standard Zoom.
Zoom Entry
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1% increments between 25% and 400%. Use the numeric keys or
select [+] or [-] to enter the any magnification.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric
Models 400% Max.
200% A5>>A3
141% A4>>A3, A5>>A4
127% Folio>>A3
106% 11x15”>>A3
100%
90% Folio>>A4
75% 11x15”>>A4
70% A3>>A4, A4>>A5
50%
25% Min.
Inch
Models 400% Max.
200% STMT>>Ledger
154% STMT>>Legal
129% Letter>>Ledger
121% Legal>>Ledger
100%
78% Legal>>Letter
77% Ledger>>Legal
64% Ledger>>Letter
50% Ledger>>STMT
25% Min.
Model Zoom Level (Original Copy) Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)
Metric
Models 115% B5>>A4
86% A4>>B5
129% Statement>>Letter
78% Legal>>Letter
64% Letter>>Statement
Inch
Models 141% A5>>A4
115% B5>>A4
90% Folio>>A4
86% A4>>B5
70% A4>>A5
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-28
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Zoom]
Printing/Sending/Storing
Item Description
100% Reproduces the original size.
Auto Reduces or enlarges original to sending/storing size.
NOTE
To reduce or enlarge the image, select the paper size, sending size, or storing size.
[Paper Selection] (6-5)
[Sending Size] (6-42)
[Storing Size] (6-54)
6-29
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Combine]
[Combine]
Combines 2 or 4 original sheets into 1 printed page.
You can select the page layout and the type of boundary lines around the pages.
The following types of the boundary lines are available.
Item Available settings Description
Off —Disables the function.
2 in 1 — Prints a two-sheet original on a single
sheet.
4 in 1 — Prints a four-sheet original on a single
sheet.
Others Combine Off, 2 in 1 (L to R/T to B), 2 in 1 (R to L/B
to T), 4 in 1 (Right then Down), 4 in 1
(Left then Down), 4 in 1 (Down then
Right), 4 in 1 (Down then Left)
Select how to lay out the pages of
scanned original.
Border Line None, Solid Line, Dotted Line,
Positioning Mark
Select the boundary line type.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Copy
None Solid Line Dotted Line Positioning Mark
6-30
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Combine]
Layout Image
Item Image
2 in 1 L to R/T to B
R to L/B to T
4 in 1 Right then Down
Left then Down
Down then Right
Down then Left
NOTE
• The paper sizes supported in Combine mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216×340mm, Ledger,
Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficioll, 8K, 16K-R, 16K
• When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.
6-31
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Margin]
[Margin]
Copying/Printing
Add margins (white space). In addition, you can set the margin width and the back page margin.
*1 Input units can be changed with the System Menu.
[Measurement] (8-20)
Sending
When you have sent/stored the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these sizes, a
margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed with a margin
equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
The default setting for margin width can be changed.
Margin (8-17)
Item Available settings Description
Off No margins are set.
On Margin L/R(-18 - +18) Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm (in 1
mm increments)
Inch: -0.75 to +0.75" (in 0.01"
increments)
Set the margin width.* 1
Use [+] and [-] to adjust the "L/R(-18 - +18)"
and "T/B(-18 - +18)" margin values. You can
enter numeric values using the [# Keys].
T/B(-18 - +18)
Back Page Auto For duplex copying, press [Back Page], and
then and select [Auto] or [Manual].
An appropriate margin is applied
automatically on the rear page depending
on a margin specified for the front page and
a binding orientation.
Manu
al L/R(-
18 -
+18)
Metric: -18 mm to +18 mm (in 1
mm increments)
Inch: -0.75 to +0.75" (in 0.01"
increments)
You can set a different margin than the front
on the back. Set the margin in the screen
that is displayed. The setting selections are
the same as for the front.* 1
Use [+] and [-] to adjust the "L/R(-18 - +18)"
and "T/B(-18 - +18)" margin values. You can
enter numeric values using the [# Keys].
T/B(-
18 -
+18)
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on
Left
Select the orientation of the original
document top edge to scan correct
direction.
Press [Original Orientation] and then select
the original orientation as either [Top Edge
on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Next, select
[OK].
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-32
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Duplex]
[Duplex]
Produces two-sided copies. You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals.
The following modes are available.
1-sided to 2-sided
2-sided to 1-sided
2-sided to 2-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In case of an
odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy will be blank.
The following binding options are available.
A Binding Left/Right: Images on the back sides are not rotated.
B Binding Top: Images on the back sides are rotated 180 degrees.
Copies can be bound on the top edge, facing the same orientation
when turning the pages.
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two individual sheets.
The following binding options are available.
• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are rotated 180
degrees.
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
NOTE
The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, 216×340mm,
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, OficioII, Folio, and 8K
Copy
Original Copy
ghi
def
abc
ghi
abc
def
ghi
abc
def
Original Copy
AB
Original Copy
Original Copy
6-33
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Duplex]
Book to One-sided
Book to Two-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book original.
The following binding options are available.
Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are copied from left to
right.
Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are copied from right to
left.
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R, and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to One-sided mode: A4, B5, Letter and 16K
Book → Book →
Front and Back Book
Produces two-sided copies from an open book original with facing
pages.
NOTE
• The original sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A3, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5-R, Ledger, Letter-R, and 8K
• The paper sizes supported in Book to Two-sided mode: A4, B5, Letter, and 16K
Original Copy
Original Copy
6-34
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Duplex]
Copying
Prints 1-sided or open book originals to 2-sided, or 2-sided or open book originals to 1-sided. Select the binding
orientation for original and finished documents.
*1 Displayed when [2-sided>>1-sided], [2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or [Book>>2-sided] is selected for "Duplex".
*2 Displayed when [1-sided>>2-sided], [2-sided>>2-sided] or [Book>>2-sided] is selected for "Duplex".
*3 Displayed only when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
When placing the original on the platen, consecutively replace each original and press the [Start] key.
After scanning all originals, select [Finish Scan] to start copying. Copying starts.
Printing
Print a document to 1-sided or 2-sided sheets.
Item Available settings Description
1-sided>>1-sided ―Disables the function.
1-sided>>2-sided ―Copy the original with the default setting. For the
default settings, refer to the following:
2-sided>>1-sided ―
2-sided>>2-sided ―
Others Duplex 1-sided>>1-sided,
1-sided>>2-sided,
2-sided>>1-sided,
2-sided>>2-sided,
Book>>1-sided,
Book>>2-sided
Select the desired duplex option.
Binding in Original*1 Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top,
Binding Left,
Binding Right
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Binding in Finishing*2 Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top,
Book>>2 sided,
Book>>Book
Select the binding orientation of copies.
Original Orientation Top Edge on Top,
Top Edge on Left
Auto*3
Select the orientation of the original document top
edge to scan correct direction.
Setting Items Available settings Description
1-sided — Disables the function.
2-sided Binding Left/Right Prints a 2-sided document so that the
sheets are aligned properly for binding
on the left or right.
Binding Top Prints a 2-sided document so that the
sheets are aligned properly for binding
on the top.
6-35
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Continuous Scan]
[Continuous Scan]
Scans a large number of originals in separate batches and then produce as one job. Originals will be scanned
continuously until you select [Finish Scan].
Select [On] to use continuous scanning.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
1 to 10
1
1 to 30
1
11 to 20
11
21 to 30
21
6-36
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Auto Image Rotation]
[Auto Image Rotation]
Automatically rotates the image 90 degrees when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the
orientations are different.
Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• You can select whether to rotate the image automatically in the default settings.
Auto Image Rotation (8-17)
• When you have enabled this function, you can select how the images are rotated.
Auto Image Rotation Action (8-24)
Copy
6-37
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Job Finish Notice]
[Job Finish Notice]
Sends E-mail notice when a job is complete. It is also available that send a notice when a job is interrupted.
Users can be notified of the completion of a job while working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the
machine to finish.
*1 External address book settings can be configured with Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
*2 Displayed when user login administration is enabled.
Setting User Login Administration (9-6)
NOTE
PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used. To configure the settings, refer to the following:
Command Center RX (2-42)
E-mail can be sent to a single destination.
Item Description
Off Disables the function.
Job Finished Only To add a new destination, select [Menu] > [Add].
Address Book: Select the notification destination from the address book and
select [OK].
Ext. Address Book*1: Select the notification destination from the external address
book.
Address Entry: Enter the e-mail address directly. Enter the address (up to 128
characters) and select [OK].
My Address*2: Uses the e-mail address of the logged in user.
Job Finished + Job In terrup te d
NOTE
• To edit a destination, selecting [Menu] > [Edit], and then select the desired destination.
• Selecting [ ] shows detailed information about the destination.
• Select [ ] to delete a destination.
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Send
Custom
Box
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-38
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Name Entry]
[File Name Entry]
Adds a file name.
Additional information such as job number and date and time can also be set. You can check a job history or job status
using the file name, date and time, or job number specified here.
Enter the file name and select [OK].
Maximum number of characters: Up to 32
To add date and time, select [Date and Time]. To add job number, select [Job No.]. The added information will be
displayed in "Additional Info".
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
Send
Custom
Box
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-39
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Priority Override]
[Priority Override]
Suspends the current job and gives a new job top priority.
The suspended job resumes after the other job is finished.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
• This function is not available if current job was an override.
• Priority override may not be available depending on the status of the current print job and memory usage. In
this case, try the interrupt copy.
Interrupt Copy (5-13)
Copy
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-40
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Skip Blank Page]
[Skip Blank Page]
When there are blank pages in a scanned document, this function skips the blank pages and scans only pages that are
not blank.
Blank pages can be set as pages that include ruled lines and a small number of characters.
The machine detects blank pages, saving unnecessary printing without the need to check for blank pages in the
document.
Item Description
Off Everything, including blank pages, is scanned.
Configure th e
settings. Blank Pages + Ruled Line s Blank pages and pages that include ruled lines are judged to be blank
pages.
Blank Page s Only Blank pages only are judged to be blank pages.
Blank Pages + Some Text Blank pages and pages that include a small amount of text are judged to
be blank pages.
NOTE
The originals with punched holes or originals printed on a colored substrate may not be recognized as blank
pages.
Copy
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-41
Advanced Setting of Functions > [2-sided/Book Original]
[2-sided/Book Original]
Select the type and binding of originals.
*1 Original Orientation set to [Top Edge on Top].
*2 Displayed when [2-sided (Binding Left/Right)] or [2-sided (Binding Top)] is selected in "Duplex".
Setting Items Availabl e se tt in g s Description
1-sided —2-sided/Book Original is not set.
2-sided Binding Binding Left/Right,
Binding Top
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Original
Orientation Top Edge on Top, Top
Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
Select [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of the
originals, either [Top Edge on Top] or [Top Edge on Left]. Then
select [OK].
Book*1 Binding Binding Left, Binding
Right
Select the binding orientation of originals.
Others 2-sided/Book
Original 1-sided Select this setting for a one-sided sheet original.
2-sided (Binding Left/
Right)
Select this setting for a two-sided sheet original with left or right
binding.
2-sided (Binding Top) Select this setting for a two-sided sheet original with top
binding.
Book (Binding Left) Select this setting for book type (magazine, book, etc.) with left
binding.
Book (Binding Right) Select this setting for book type (magazine, book, etc.) with
right binding.
Original
Orientation*2 Top Edge on Top, Top
Edge on Left
Select the orientation of the original document top edge to
scan correct direction.
Custom
Box
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-42
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Sending Size]
[Sending Size]
Select size of image to be sent.
Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the sending size.
Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Item Value Description
Same as Original
Size --- Automatically sends the same size
as the original.
Inch Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11x15”, Oficio II Select from the Inch series standard
sizes.
Metric A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric series
standard sizes.
Others 8K, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return
postcard)
Select from special standard sizes.
Original size and sending size
are the same different
[Original Size] (6-4) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Sending Size Select [Same as Original]. Select the desired size.
[Zoom] (6-27) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you specify the sending size that is different from the original size, and select the zoom of [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).
Send
6-43
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Format]
[File Format]
Specify the image file format.
Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG], [XPS], [OpenXPS], and [High Comp. PDF].
When the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed, you can also select [Word], [Excel], or [PowerPoint].
Image quality level can also be adjusted.
Select [File Format] > [Others] > [Image Quality].
When the color mode in scanning has been selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image quality.
Send
USB
Memory
6-44
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Format]
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], you can specify encryption or PDF/A settings.
*1 Displayed only when the optional Scan extension kit is installed.
*2 Displayed when [High Comp. PDF] is selected for “File Format”.
*3 Displayed when the option other than [High Comp. PDF] is selected for “File Format”.
*4 Encryption settings can be configured. For details, refer to the information below.
*5 Displayed when [Word], [Excel] or [PowerPoint] is selected for “File Format”.
PDF Encryption Functions
If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying, printing, and
editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.
Item Av ai la ble settings Description
High Comp. PDF ―Performs processing using High-Compression
PDF format.
TIFF ―Performs processing using TIFF format.
PDF ―Performs processing using PDF format.
JPEG ―Performs processing using JPEG format. One file
is created per original page.
XPS ―Performs processing using XPS format.
OpenXPS ―Performs processing using OpenXPS format.
Word*1 ―Set the file format selected.
Excel*1 ―
PowerPoint*1 ―
Others File Format High Comp. PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS,
OpenXPS
Select the image file format.
Image
Quality*2 Compression Ratio Priority, Standard,
Quality Priority
Set the image quality.
Image
Quality*3 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High
Quality (Low Comp.)
Set the image quality.
PDF/A Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a,
PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u
Set PDF/A format type.
Encrypt*4 Acrobat 3.0 and later, Encryption
Level: Middle (40-bit)
Acrobat 5.0 and later, Encryption
Level: High (128-bit)
This configures the encryption setting.
OCR Text Recognition*1 Off, On Set the default OCR Text Recognition.
OCR Text Recognition (Option) (6-44)
OCR Output Format*5 Text + Graphics,
Text + Graphics with Scanned Image,
Scanned Image with Searchable Text
Set the default OCR Output Format.
6-45
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Format]
1Select [Others] from the item.
2Select [High Comp. PDF] or [PDF] in [File Format].
3[Encryption] > [Compatibility] > Select a setting.
Setting items depend on the selected [Compatibility] setting.
When [Acrobat 3.0 and higher, Encryption Level: Middle (40-bit)] is selected
When [Acrobat 5.0 and later, Encryption Level: High (128-bit)] is selected
Item Avai la bl e se ttings Description
Password to Open
Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select
[OK].
Password to Edit/
Print Document Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select
[OK].
When you have entered the password and selected
[Detail] to edit/print document, you can specifically limit
the operation.
Printing
Allowed Not Allowed, Allowed Restricts printing of the PDF file.
Changes
Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Commenting Can only add commenting.
Page Layout except extracting Pages Can change the page layout except extracting the pages
of the PDF file.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
the PDF file.
Copying of Text/
Images/Others Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Item Avai la bl e se ttings Description
Password to Open
Document Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select
[OK].
Password to Edit/
Print Document Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file.
Select [On], enter a password (up to 256 characters) and
then select [Next].
Enter the password again for confirmation, and select
[OK].
When you have entered the password to edit/print
document, you can specifically limit the operation.
6-46
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Format]
Printing
Allowed Not Allowed Disables the printing of PDF file.
Allowed (Low Resolution only) Can print the PDF file only in low resolution.
Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution.
Changes
Allowed Not Allowed Disables the change to the PDF file.
Inserting/Deleting/Rotating Pages Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the PDF
file.
Commenting Can only add commenting.
Any except extracting Pages Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages of
the PDF file.
Copying of Text/
Images/Others Disable, Enable Restricts the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.
Item Avai la bl e se ttings Description
6-47
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Format]
OCR Text Recognition (Option)
When [PDF], [High Comp. PDF], [Word], [Excel], or [PowerPoint] is selected for the file format, you can create
Searchable file by running OCR on the scanned document. Select [OCR Text Recognition], and then [On], select the
language of the document, and select [OK].
Item Description
Off Do not create Searchable file.
On Create Searchable file.
Select the language to extract from the languages that appear on the touch panel.
NOTE
• This function can only be used when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Scan extension kit(A) <OCR Scan Activation Kit> (12-10)
• If the proper language is not selected, file creation may take a long time or the creation may fail. The default
language can be changed in System Menu.
Primary OCR Language*2 (8-18)
• If you do not set an original in the correct orientation, the text of the document may not be recognized as
characters. In addition, it may take some time to create the file. The original orientation is correct.
• The accuracy of the text recognition depends on the original condition. The following condition may result in
decreasing the recognition accuracy.
- Repeatedly copied documents (as copied copy)
- Received faxes (with low resolution)
- Originals with the character space too narrow or wide
- Originals with the lines on the text
- Originals with the special fonts
- Binding part of the book
- A handwritten texts
6-48
Advanced Setting of Functions > [File Separation]
[File Separation]
Creates several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and sends the files.
(Value: [Off] / [Each Page])
Select [Each Page] to set File Separation.
NOTE
A three-digit serial number such as "abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf..." is attached to the end of the file name.
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-49
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Scan Resolution]
[Scan Resolution]
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
(Value: [600 × 600 dpi] / [400 × 400 dpi Ultra] / [300 × 300 dpi] / [200 × 400 dpi Super] / [200 × 200 dpi Fine] / [200 × 100
dpi Normal])
NOTE
The larger the number, the better the image resolution. However, better resolution also means larger file sizes
and longer send times.
Send
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-50
Advanced Setting of Functions > [E-mail Subject/Body]
[E-mail Subject/Body]
Adds subject and body when sending a document.
Select [Subject] / [Body] to enter the E-mail subject/body.
NOTE
• The maximum number of characters that can be entered are as shown below.
Subject: 60 characters
Body: 500 characters
Send
Custom
Box
6-51
Advanced Setting of Functions > [FTP Encrypted TX]
[FTP Encrypted TX]
Encrypts images when sending via FTP.
Encryption secures the document transmission.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
NOTE
Click [Security Settings], and then [Network Security] in the Command Center RX. Be sure that "SSL" of Secure
Protocol Settings is "On" and one or more effective encryption are selected in Client side settings.
Command Center RX User Guide
Send
Custom
Box
6-52
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Delete after Printed]
[Delete after Printed]
Automatically delete a document from the box once printing is complete.
Value: [Off] / [On])
Custom
Box
6-53
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Delete after Transmitted]
[Delete after Transmitted]
Automatically deletes a document from the box once transmission is complete.
Value: [Off] / [On])
Custom
Box
6-54
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Storing Size]
[Storing Size]
Select size of image to be stored.
Select [Same as Original Size], [Metric], [Inch], or [Others] to select the storing size.
Relationship between Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom
Original Size, Storing Size, and Zoom are related to each other. For details, see the table below.
Item Value Description
Same as Original
Size --- Store an image the same size as the
original.
Inch Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, 11x15”, Oficio II Select from the Inch series standard
sizes.
Metric A3, A4, A5, A6, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm Select from the Metric series
standard sizes.
Others 8K, 16K, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufukuhagaki (Return
postcard)
Select from special standard sizes.
Original size and sending size
are the same different
[Original Size] (6-4) Specify as necessary. Specify as necessary.
Sending Size Select [Same as Original]. Select the desired size.
[Zoom] (6-27) Select [100%] (or [Auto]). Select [Auto].
NOTE
When you select Storing Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you can store the
image as the actual size (No Zoom).
Custom
Box
USB
Memory
6-55
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Long Original]
[Long Original]
Reads long-sized original documents using a document processor.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
*1 1,600 mm/63" if fax functions are used.
NOTE
• Long originals are sent in black and white or Grayscale.
• Only a single side of a long original cannot Originals of up to 1,900 mm / 74.8"*1 long can be scanned.
• You can select resolution 300×300 dpi or less.
Send
USB
Memory
6-57
Advanced Setting of Functions > [JPEG/TIFF Print]
[JPEG/TIFF Print]
Select the image size when printing JPEG or TIFF files.
Item Description
Paper Size Fits the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Prints at resolution of the actual image.
Print Resolution Fits the image size to the print resolution.
USB
Memory
6-58
Advanced Setting of Functions > [XPS Fit to Page]
[XPS Fit to Page]
Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.
(Value: [Off] / [On])
USB
Memory
6-59
Advanced Setting of Functions > [Erase Shadowed Areas]
[Erase Shadowed Areas]
When scanning with the document processor open, erase the extra shaded area.
Value: [Off] / [On])
Copy
7-1
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices >
7 Managing Jobs,
Consumables, and
Devices
This chapter explains the following topics:
Checking a Job Status ....................................................................................................................................... 7-2
Available Status Screens ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
Displaying the Status Screen ................................................................................................................... 7-2
Status Display .................................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Print Job Status Screen ........................................................................................................................... 7-3
Send Job Status Screen .......................................................................................................................... 7-4
Store Job Status Screen .......................................................................................................................... 7-5
Scheduled Job Status Screen .................................................................................................................. 7-5
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs .................................................................................................... 7-6
Checking Job Histories ...................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Available Job History Screens ................................................................................................................. 7-7
Displaying the Job History Screen ........................................................................................................... 7-7
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories ........................................................................................ 7-8
Sending the Log History .......................................................................................................................... 7-8
Job Operation .................................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Pausing and Resuming a Job .................................................................................................................. 7-9
Canceling a Job ....................................................................................................................................... 7-9
Device/Communication .................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies) ......................................................... 7-12
7-2
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Checking a Job Status
Checking a Job Status
Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.
Available Status Screens
The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens - Printing
Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and Scheduled Jobs. The following job statuses are available.
Displaying the Status Screen
1Display a screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select the job to check details.
Select either of [Print Job Status], [Send Job Status], [Store Job Status] or [Scheduled Job] to check the status.
Print Job Status Screen (7-3)
Send Job Status Screen (7-4)
Store Job Status Screen (7-5)
Scheduled Job Status Screen (7-5)
Status Display Job status to be displayed
Print Job Status • Copy job
• Printer job
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Job from Document Box
• Data from removable memory
• Application
• Report/List
Send Job Status • Fax transmission
• Send as E-mail
• Folder
• Sending Job Application
• Multi Sending
• Sending Job - FAX Server
Store Job Status • Storing Job Scan
• Storing Job FAX
• Storing Job Printer
Scheduled Job • Fax transmission
7-3
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Status Display
Status Display
Print Job Status Screen
NOTE
You can show the job statuses of all users, or only the statuses of your own jobs.
[Display Status/Log] (8-21)
This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Num
ber Item Description
1Display/Key Acceptance No. of job
2Type Icon indicates job type.
Copy job
Printer job
Job from Document Box
FAX reception
E-mail reception
Data from removable memory
Application
Report/List
3Job name Job name or file name
4[ ] Select the key of the job whose detailed information you want to display.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs 7-6
5Status Status of job
(Number of Sheets Printed)/(Total Number of Sheets): Printing
Processing: The status before starting to print.
Waiting: Print Waiting
Pause: Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job
6[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
7[Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing jobs will be resumed.
Print Job Status
10:10Status/Job Cancel.
doc0000892010092514...
Cancel Close
5/23
1/1
0089
Pause All
Print Jobs
doc0000892010092515... Waiting
doc0000892010092520... Waiting
1
23 45
67
7-4
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Status Display
Send Job Status Screen
Num
ber Item Description
1Display/Key Acceptance No. of job
2Type Icon indicates job type.
Fax transmission
Send as E-mail
Folder (SMB/FTP) send
Application send
Multi Sending
Sending Job - FAX Server
3Job name Job name or file name is displayed.
4[ ] Select the key of the job whose detailed information you want to display.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs 7-6
5Status Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during scanning originals
Sending: Sending
Waiting: Waiting Sending
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job
6[Menu] Selecting this key displays [Priority Override]. A fax job can be given send priority.
Use the list to select the fax job to be sent immediately. > [Menu] > [Priority Override]
7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
Send Job Status
10:10Status/Job Cancel.
0123456
Cancel CloseMenu
Process
1/1
0005
1
23 45
67
7-5
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Status Display
Store Job Status Screen
Scheduled Job Status Screen
Num
ber Item Description
1Display/Key Acceptance No. of job
2Type Icon indicates job type.
Storing Job Scan
Storing Job Printer
Storing Job FAX
3Job name Job name or file name is displayed.
4[ ] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list, and press this
key.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (7-6)
5Status Status of job
InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during scanning originals
Storing: Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job
6[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
Num
ber Item Description
1Display/Key Acceptance No. of job
2Type Icon indicates job type.
Scheduling Job FAX
Store Job Status
10:10Status/Job Cancel.
doc0000162010082913...
Cancel Close
Storing
1/1
0016
1
23 45
6
Scheduled Job
10:10Status/Job Cancel.
A OFFICE
Cancel Close
12:00
1/1
0014
Menu
1
23 45
67
7-6
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Status Display
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs
Check the detailed information of each job.
1Display the screen.
Checking a Job Status (7-2)
2Check the information.
1Select [ ] for the job whose detailed information you want to check.
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
Click the [OK] button.Select [ ] or [ ] to view information on the next page or previous page. To view more detailed
information, select a white item.
In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by selecting [Status/Destination].
2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
3Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, or No. of broadcast items)
4[ ] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from the list, and press this
key.
Checking Detailed Information of Jobs (7-6)
5Start Time Time to start the scheduled job
6[Menu] Selecting this key displays [Start Now].
From the list, select the job you want to send immediately. > [Menu] > [Start Now]
7[Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.
NOTE
A user logged in with user privileges will be able to check only the jobs of the logged in user. A user logged in
with administrator privileges can check all jobs.
Num
ber Item Description
Send Job Status
10:10Status/Job Cancel.
0123456
Cancel CloseMenu
Process
1/1
0005
7-7
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Checking Job Histories
Checking Job Histories
Check the history of completed jobs.
Available Job History Screens
The job histories are displayed separately in four screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Storing Jobs, and FAX Jobs.
The following job histories are available.
Displaying the Job History Screen
1Display the screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
NOTE
• Job history can also be checked from a computer using Command Center RX or KYOCERA Net Viewer
Command Center RX
KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide
• You can show the job log of all users, or only your own job log.
[Display Status/Log] (8-21)
This setting can also be changed from Command Center RX.
Command Center RX User Guide
Screen Job histories to be displayed
Printing Jobs • Copy job
• Printer job
• FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Job from Document Box
• Report/List
• Data from removable memory
•Application
Sending Jobs • Fax transmission
• Send as E-mail
• Folder
• Sending Job Application
• Multi Sending
• Sending Job - FAX Server
Storing Jobs • Storing Job Scan
• Storing Job FAX
• Storing Job Printer
FAX Job FAX Operation Guide
7-8
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Checking Job Histories
2Select the job to check details.
Checking the Detailed Information of Histories
You can check the detailed information of each job.
1Display the screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Check the information.
1Select [ ] of the job you want to check > [Detail].
Detailed information of the selected job is displayed.
2To exit from the detailed information, select [Close].
Sending the Log History
You can send the log history by E-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent automatically
whenever a set number of jobs is reached.
[Sending Log History] (8-7)
NOTE
Select [ ] or [ ] to view information on the next page or previous page.
Print Job Log
10:10Status/Job Cancel.
doc0000112010081817...
Close
Completed
1/3
0011
doc0000102010081815... Canceled0010
doc0000092010081815... Completed0009
doc Error0008
7-9
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Job Operation
Job Operation
Pausing and Resuming a Job
Pause/resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.
1Display the screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select [Pause All Print Jobs] on the printing jobs status screen.
Printing is paused.
When resuming the printing of jobs that have been paused, select [Resume All Print Jobs].
Canceling a Job
A job in printing/waiting status can be canceled.
1Display the screen.
Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select the job to be canceled from the list, and select [Cancel].
3Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
7-10
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Device/Communication
Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status.
1Display the screen.
1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select the item you want to check.
The screen to check the status or configure the devices is displayed.
2Check the status.
The items you can check are described below.
Scanner
The status of an original scanning or the error information (paper jam, opened cover, etc.) is displayed.
Printer
Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.
FAX Memory RX Box
FAX Operation Guide
This displays information (document name, file size, etc.) about a document in the FAX Memory RX Box.
Command Center RX User Guide
FAX
• To cancel a fax that is currently being sent/received, select [Line Off].
• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
FAX Operation Guide
“Removable Memory”
• The usage, capacity and free space of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
• To format external media, select [Menu] > [Format].
• To safely remove the external media, select [Remove Memory].
IMPORTANT
When [Format] is selected, all data in the external media is erased.
7-11
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Device/Communication
USB Keyboard
The status of the optional USB Keyboard is displayed.
Bluetooth Keyboard
Shows the status of the Bluetooth Keyboard.
Network Connection Status
The network connection status appears.
Option Network Connection Status
The connection status of an optional network interface kit appears.
Wi-Fi Direct
Shows the connection status of Wi-Fi Direct.
Wireless Network
The connection status of the Wireless Network Interface Kit is displayed.
Wi-Fi
Shows the connection status of Wi-Fi.
SSD
The status of the SSD is displayed.
NFC
Shows the connection status of NFC.
7-12
Managing Jobs, Consumables, and Devices > Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and
Paper (Paper/Supplies)
Check the remaining amount of toner, and paper on the touch panel.
1Display the screen.
1Select the [Status/Job Cancel] key.
2Select the item you want to check.
2Check the status.
The items you can check are described below.
Toner Status
The amount of toner remaining is shown in levels. And you can check the status of waste toner box.
Paper Status
You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source. The amount of
paper remaining is shown in levels.
Staple
Can be used to check whether or not there are staples.
8-1
System Menu >
8 System Menu
This chapter explains the following topics:
Operation Method .............................................................................................................................................. 8-2
[Quick Setup Wizard] ......................................................................................................................................... 8-3
[Language] ......................................................................................................................................................... 8-4
[Report] .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-5
[Counter] ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings] .............................................................................................................................. 8-9
[Common Settings] ........................................................................................................................................... 8-11
[Home] ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-23
[Copy] ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-24
[Send] ............................................................................................................................................................... 8-25
[Document Box] ............................................................................................................................................... 8-26
[FAX] ................................................................................................................................................................ 8-27
[Application] ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-28
[Internet] ........................................................................................................................................................... 8-29
[Address Book/One Touch] .............................................................................................................................. 8-30
[User Login/Job Accounting] ............................................................................................................................ 8-31
[Printer] ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-32
[System/Network] ............................................................................................................................................. 8-35
[Date/Timer/Energy Saver] ............................................................................................................................... 8-60
[Adjustment/Maintenance] ............................................................................................................................... 8-63
8-2
System Menu > Operation Method
Operation Method
Configure settings related to overall machine operation. Change the factory default settings in accordance with usage
needs.
1Display the screen.
Select the [System Menu / Counter] key.
2Select a function.
3Configure the function.
Refer to System Menu Settings on the following page and configure as needed.
1 Displays the System Menu items.
2 Scrolls up and down when the list of values cannot be
displayed in its entirety on a single screen.
3 Displays setting items.
Select the key of a function to display the setting screen.
4 Returns to the previous screen.
1 Enter a setting by selecting it.
2 Returns to the previous screen without making any changes.
3 Accepts the settings and exits.
NOTE
• If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the machine's Operation
Guide for Administrator User Name and Password.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name:
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password:
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
• If function default settings have been changed, the [Reset] key can be selected in each function screen to
immediately change the settings.
System Menu/Counter.
System Menu
Quick Setup Wizard
10:10
Language
Report
Counter
1/5
Close
System Menu/Counter.
Date/Timer/Energy Saver
Date/Time
10/10/2014 10:10
10:10
Date Format
DD/MM/YYYY
On
+09:00 Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
Time Zone
Auto Panel Reset
1/4
< Back
12
3
4
᪥㻛䝍䜲䝬䞊㻛⠇㟁 㻙 ᕪ
㻙㻝㻞㻦㻜㻜㻌ᅜ㝿᪥ኚ᭦⥺すഃ
㻙㻜㻥㻦㻜㻜㻌䜰䝷䝇䜹
㻙㻝㻝㻦㻜㻜㻌༠ᐃୡ⏺㻙㻝㻝
㻙㻝㻜㻦㻜㻜㻌䝝䝽䜲
㻝㻛㻞㻠
䜻䝱䞁䝉䝹 㻻㻷
Date/Timer/Energy Saver - Time Zone
-12:00 International Date Line West
-09:00 Alaska
-11:00 Universal Coordinated Time-11
-10:00 Hawaii
1/24
Cancel OK
1
2
3
8-3
System Menu > [Quick Setup Wizard]
[Quick Setup Wizard]
For FAX functions, Energy Saver functions and network settings, the following settings can be configured in a wizard-
style screen.
Quick Setup Wizard (2-25)
The following settings can be configured in a wizard-style screen.
*1 This function is displayed when [Network Selection] is set to [Wired Network].
*2 This function is not displayed when [Off] is selected for the DHCP setting.
Function Item Description
FAX Setup Configures basic fax settings. FAX functions are available only on products with the fax
function installed.
FAX Operation Guide
Energy Saver Setup Configures energy saver function settings
1. Sleep Mode Sleep Timer
Sleep Level (models except for Europe)
2. Low Power Mode Low Power Timer
Network Setup 1. Network Wi-Fi
Wired Network
DHCP*1
IP Address*2
Subnet Mask*2
Default Gateway*2
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
8-4
System Menu > [Language]
[Language]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Language]
Set the language to be displayed on the machine screen.
Item Description
Language Set the language to use for the touch panel display.
8-5
System Menu > [Report]
[Report]
Print reports to check the machine settings, status, and history. Settings for printing reports can also be configured.
[Print Report]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [Report] > [Print Report]
Item Description
Status Page Prints the status page, allowing you to check the information including current settings,
available memory space, and optional equipment installed.
Font List Prints the font list, allowing you to check the font samples installed in the machine.
Network Status Prints the network status, allowing you to check the information including network
interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
Service Status Prints the service status. More detailed information is available than on the Status Page.
Service personnel usually print the service status pages for maintenance purpose.
Accounting Report Print Accounting Report. Allowing you to check the accounts that have been registered
on the machine.
Status Page
Network Status Page
Firmware Version
8-6
System Menu > [Report]
[Admin Report Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Report] > [Admin Report Settings]
This specifies whether an Outgoing FAX Report or Incoming FAX Report should be printed automatically.
FAX Operation Guide
[Result Report Setting]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Report] > [Result Report Setting]
*1 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
*2 This does not appear when both [E-mail/Folder] and [FAX] are set to [Off].
Sub Address Box List This prints a report for fax functions.
FAX Operation Guide
NOTE
This function is displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
FAX List (Index)
FAX List (No.)
Outgoing FAX Report
Incoming FAX Report
Optional Network Status Prints the optional network status, allowing you to check the information including
optional network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit or Wireless
Network Interface Kit is installed.
Item Description
Send Result Report Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete.
E-mail/Folder Automatically print a report of transmission result when E-mail or SMB/FTP transmission is
complete.
Value: Off, On, Error Only
FAX*1 FAX Operation Guide
Attach Image of
Network FAX Select the attached image form Body and Cover Page when sending the Network FAX.
Value: Body Text, Cover Page
Canceled before
Sending*2 Print a send result report if the job is canceled before being sent.
Value: Off, On
Recipient
Format*2 Select the Recipient Format for the send result report.
Value: Name or Destination, Name and Destination
RX Result Report*1 FAX Operation Guide
Job Finish Notice
Setting*1 FAX Operation Guide
Item Description
8-7
System Menu > [Report]
[Sending Log History]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Report] > [Sending Log History]
Item Description
Sending Log History You can also send the log history to the specified destinations manually.
Auto Sending This function automatically sends the log history to the specified destinations whenever
a set number of jobs has been logged.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, specify the number of job histories to be automatically sent.
The setting range is 1 to 16.
Destination This specifies the destination to which log histories are sent. Only E-mail address can
be set.
Job Log Subject Set the subject automatically entered when sending log histories by E-mail.
Value: Up to 60 characters
Personal Information Select whether to include personal information in the job log.
Value: Include, Exclude
8-8
System Menu > [Counter]
[Counter]
Check the number of sheets printed and scanned.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Counter]
2Select [Printed Pages] > [Scanned Pages] to check the counter.
Refer to the printed coverage.
1Check the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Counter] > [Printed Pages] > [Print Coverage]
2The selected [Last Page] or [Last Job] data is displayed.
[Last Page]: The data of the last printed page is displayed.
[Last Job]: The data of the last printed job is displayed.
NOTE
The printing volume as calculated from information indicated on print coverage data will not match on actual
printed volume. The actual printing volume varies depending on the usage (printing content, continuous printing
frequency, etc.) and environmental factors (temperature and humidity).
8-9
System Menu > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings]
Select paper size and media type for Cassette and multi purpose tray.
[Cassette 1 (to 3)]
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Cassette 1 (to 3)]
Select paper size and media type for Cassettes 1 to 3.
*1 To change to the media type from "Plain" to something else, refer to the information below.
Media Type Setting (8-14)
*2 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the information below.
Special Paper Action (8-14)
Selection Item Selectable Size/Type
PaperSize Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.
Values: Metric, Inch
Metric Available options are as follows:
Values
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, B4, B5-R, B5, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
inch Available options are as follows:
Values
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Oficio II
Others Select from special standard sizes.
Values
8K, 16K-R, 16K
Media Type*1 Select the media type.
Values: Plain (60 - 105 g/m2), Rough, Vellum (59 g/m2 or less), Recycled,
Preprinted*2, Bond, Color, Prepunched*2, Letterhead*2, Thick (106 - 256 g/
m2), High Quality, Custom 1 - 8
NOTE
If the optional FAX Kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown below.
Plain, Vellum, Recycled, Bond, Color, Thick, High Quality, Custom1 - 8
8-10
System Menu > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings]
[Multi Purpose Tray]
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Cassette/MP Tray Settings] > [Multipurpose Tray]
Select paper size and media type for the multi purpose tray.
*1 To change to a media type other than "Plain".
Media Type Setting (8-14)
*2 To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to the following:
Special Paper Action (8-14)
Item Description
Paper Size Inch Available options are as follows:
Values
Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II
Metric Available options are as follows:
Values
A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Folio, 216 x 340 mm
Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.
Values
8K, 16K-R, 16K, ISO B5, Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6,
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4, Hagaki
(Cardstock), Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom
Size Entry Enter the size not included in the standard size.
Values
Metric
X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1mm increments)
Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Media Type*1 Select the media type.
Values
Plain (60 to 105 g/m2), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (59 g/m2 or less),
Labels, Recycled, Preprinted*2, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched*2,
Letterhead*2, Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 or more), Coated, High Quality,
Custom 1-8
NOTE
If the optional FAX Kit is installed, faxes cannot be received in the multipurpose tray.
X
Y
X
Y
HorizontalVertical
8-11
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Common Settings]
Configures overall machine operation.
[Default Screen]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Default Screen]
*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
*2 Displayed when the product is equipped with an optional large capacity storage device (SSD).
*3 Jobs registered in Favorites are displayed.
Recalling Frequently Used Functions (Favorites) (3-41)
[Sound]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Sound]
*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
Item Description
Default Screen Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen).
Value: Home, Copy, Send, FAX*1, Custom Box*2Job Box, Removable Memory, Sub
Address Box*1, Polling Box*1, FAX Memory RX Box*1, Favorites*3, Status Check
Item Description
Buzzer Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.
Volume Set the buzzer volume level.
Value: 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum), 2, 3 (Medium), 4, 5 (Maximum)
Key Confirmation Emit a sound when the operation panel and touch panel keys are selected, or when
auto clear operates.
Value: Off, On
Job Finish Emit a sound when a job is normally completed.
Value: OffOff, On, FAX Reception Only
Ready Emit a sound when the warm-up is completed.
Value: Off, On
Warning Emit a sound when errors occur.
Value: Off, On
Key Confirmation (USB
Keyboard) Emit a sound to confirm keypresses with a sound.
Value: Off, On
FAX Speaker Volume*1 FAX Operation Guide
FAX Monitor Volume*1
8-12
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Original Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Original Settings]
Configure settings for originals.
Item Description
Custom Original Size Set up frequently-used custom original size.
The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select original size.
To register a custom paper size, select [On] and enter the desired size.
Value
Metric
X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 2.00 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 2.00 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Auto Detect Original Size Automatically detect the original size. Select [Metric] when automatically detecting the
originals in centimeter sizes. Select [Inch] when detecting the originals in inch sizes.
Value: Metric, Inch
Metric
A6 / Hagaki (Cardstock)
As A6 and Hagaki (Cardstock) are similar in size, select either one of them for automatic
detection.
Value: A6, Cardstock
NOTE
Example
If [Cardstock] is set, only the originals placed on the platen are detected.
Folio
Automatically detect the original size.
Value: Off, On
11×15”
Automatically detect the original size.
Value: Off, On
Inch
Legal/ OficioII/ 216×340mm
Automatically detect the original size.
Value: Legal, Oficioll, 216x340mm
Horizontal
8-13
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Paper Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Settings]
Configure settings for paper.
Item Description
Custom Paper Size Set up frequently-used custom paper size.
The custom size option is displayed on the screen to select paper size.
To register a custom paper size, select [On] and enter the desired size.
Value
Metric
X: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Y: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Inch
X: 5.83 to 17.00" (in 0.01" increments)
Y: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
X=Length, Y=Width
Media Type Settings Select weight (Paper thickness) for each media type.
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
For details on setting value.
Media Type Setting (8-14)
Default Paper Source Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-3 and multi purpose tray.
Value: Cassette 1 (to 3), Multipurpose Tray
NOTE
[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 3] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder is
installed.
[Cassette 2]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet) or paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) is
installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) is installed.
Paper Selection Set whether the machine automatically selects the paper source or paper is fed from the
default paper source.
Value: Auto, Default Paper Source
Media for Auto (Color) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific
size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper
loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom (1 to 8)
Media for Auto (B & W) Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper
Selection. If [Plain] is selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific
size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for the paper source with any kind of paper
loaded in the specific size.
Value: All Media Types, Plain, Transparency, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, Coated, High
Quality, Custom (1 to 8)
8-14
System Menu > [Common Settings]
Media Type Setting
The following media type and paper weight combinations are available.
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
Each media type's default weight is indicated.
Special Paper Action When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be
aligned or the print direction might be upside-down depending on how originals are set
and the combination of copying functions. In such a case, select [Adjust Print Direction]
to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select [Speed
Priority].
If [Adjust Print Direction] is selected, load paper according to the steps below.
Example: copying on Letterhead
Value: Adjust Print Direction, Speed Priority
Show Paper Setup Message Set whether to display the confirmation screen for the paper setting when a new paper
is set for each cassette.
Value: On, Off
NOTE
[Cassette 2] to [Cassette 3] are displayed when the following optional paper feeder is
installed.
[Cassette 2]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet) or paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) is
installed.
[Cassette 3]: When a paper feeder (500-sheet x 2) is installed.
Cassette 1 (to 3)
Multipurpo se Tray
Paper Weight Weight (g/m²), Media Type Paper Weight Weight (g/m²), Media Type
Light - 59 g/m2Heavy 1*1 106 g/m2-135 g/m2
Normal 1 60 g/m2- 74 g/m2Heavy 2*1 136 g/m2- 163 g/m2
Normal 2 75 g/m2- 90 g/m2Heavy 3*1 164 g/m2
Normal 3 91 g/m2- 105 g/m2Extra Heavy*1 Transparency
Media Type Default Media Type Default
Plain Normal 2 Color Normal 3
Transparency Extra. Heavy Prepunched Normal 2
Rough Normal 3 Letterhead Normal 2
Vellum Heavy 1 Envelope Heavy 2
Labels Heavy 2 Thick Heavy 2
Recycled Normal 2 High Quality Normal 2
Item Description
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose
Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose
8-15
System Menu > [Common Settings]
For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.
Preprinted Normal 2 Coated Heavy 1
Bond Normal 3 Custom 1- 8 Normal 2
Cardstock Heavy 3
Item Description
Duplex Permit Duplex printing allowed.
Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.
Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more than 16 characters.
Selecting media type at multi purpose tray, the name after change will be
displayed.
Character Entry Method (12-13)
Media Type Default Media Type Default
8-16
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Function Defaults]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Defaults]
Item Description
File Format Set the default type of the files.
Value: PDF, High Comp. PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, Word, Excel, PowerPoint
NOTE
[Word], [Excel], and [PowerPoint] appear when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is
installed.
Original Orientation (Copy) Set the original orientation defaults.
Value: Top Edge on Top, Top Edge on Left, Auto
NOTE
[Auto] appears when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Original Orientation (Send/
Store)
Collate/Offset Set the defaults for Collate/Offset.
Value
Off, Collate Only, Offset Each Page, Offset Each Set
File Separation Select the default file separation setting.
Value: Off, Each Page
Scan Resolution Select the default scanning resolution.
Value: 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi, 200x400dpi Super Fine,
200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal
Color Selection (Copy) Set the default color mode setting (at copy).
Value: Auto Color, Full Color, GrayscaleBlack & White
Color Selection (Send/Store) Set the default color mode (send/store) setting.
Value: Auto (Color/Gray), Auto (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale, Black & White
Original Image(Copy) Set the default original document type for copying.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Graphic/Map, Printer Output
Original Image(Send/S tore) Set the default original document type for sending/storing.
Value: Text+Photo, Photo, Text, Text (for OCR), Light Text/Fine Line
Background Density Adj.
(Copy) Set the default Background Density (Copy).
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
Background Density Adj.
(Send/Store) Set the default Background Density (Send/Store).
Value: Off, Auto, Manual (Darker 5)
EcoPrint Select the EcoPrint default.
Value: Off, On
Prevent Bleed-thro ugh (Copy) Set the default value for preventing bleed-through (Copy).
Value: Off, On
Prevent Bleed-through (Send/
Store) Set the default Prevent Bleed (Send/Store).
Value: Off, On
Skip Blank Page (Copy) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings (Copy).
Value: Off, On
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings (Copy).
Value: Off, On
FAX TX Resolution*1 FAX Operation Guide
8-17
System Menu > [Common Settings]
Zoom Set the zoom defaults.
Value: 100%, Auto
Margin Set the default margin.
Value
Metric
Left/Right: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments) Top/Bottom: -18 to 18 mm (in 1 mm
increments)
Inch
Left/Right: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments) Top/Bottom: -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01"
increments)
Erase Shadowed Areas Set the default Erase Shadowed Areas setting.
Value: Off, On
Continuous Scan (Copy) Set continuous scan defaults (at copy).
Value: Off, On
Continuous Scan (FAX)*1 FAX Operation Guide
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) Set the continuous scan defaults (Send/Store).
Value: Off, On
Auto Image Rotation Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting.
Value: Off, On
File Name Entry Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as
Date and Time and Job No. can also be set.
Value
File Name: Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Additional Info: None, Date and Time, Job No., Job No. & Date and Time, Date and
Time & Job No.
E-mail Subject/Body Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when
sending the scanned originals by E-mail.
Value
Subject: Up to 60 characters can be entered.
Body: Up to 500 characters can be entered.
FTP Encrypted TX Set the document encryption default at send.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Displayed when secure protocol [SSL] is [On].
JPEG/TIFF Print Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file.
Value: [Paper Size], [Image Resolution], [Print Resolution]
XPS Fit to Page Set the default value for the XPS fit to page function.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
8-18
System Menu > [Common Settings]
*1 This function is displayed when an optional FAX Kit is installed.
*2 Displayed only when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
[Paper Output]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Paper Output]
[Preset Li mit]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Preset Limit]
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time.
Detail
Settings -
Image Quality Set the default of the image adjustment range when selecting the file format of the
image to be sent or saved.
Value: 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5 High Quality (Low Comp.)
PDF/A Select the default PDF/A setting.
Value: Off, PDF/A-1a, PDF/A-1b, PDF/A-2a, PDF/A-2b, PDF/A-2u
High Comp. PDF
Image Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.
Value: Compression Ratio Priority, Standard, Quality Priority
OCR Text
Recognition*2 Set the default OCR Text Recognition.
Value: Off, On
Primary OCR
Language*2 Set the default language of the text to be extracted. ([English] is selected as a default.)
Select the language to extract from the options displayed on the touch panel.
OCR Output
Format*2 Set the default OCR Output Format.
Value: Text + Graphics, Text + Graphics with Scanned Image, Scanned Image with
Searchable Text
Detect Items to Skip
(Copy) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings (Copy).
Value: Blank Pages + Ruled Lines, Blank Pages Only, Blank Pages + Some Text
Detect Items to Skip
(Send/Store) Select the default Skip Blank Page settings.
Value: Blank Pages + Ruled Lines, Blank Pages Only, Blank Pages + Some Text
Item Description
Paper Output Select the output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Document Box,
computers, and FAX RX data.
Value
• Inner Tray: Outputs to the Inner Tray of the machine
• Job Separator: Delivery to the Job Separator.
Document Finisher
• Job Separator: Delivery to the Job Separator.
• Finisher Tray: Delivery to the Finisher Tray of the optional Sheet Finisher.
NOTE
• FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional FAX Kit is installed.
Item Description
Preset Limit Value: 1 to 999 copies
Item Description
8-19
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Error Handling]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Error Handling]
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred.
[Color Toner Empty Action]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Color Toner Empty Action]
Item Description
Duplexing Error Set what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper sizes and
media types.
Value
1-sided: Printed in 1-sided
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Finishin g Error Set alternative actions when finishing (Staple/Offset) is not available for the selected
paper size or media type.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
No Staple Error Set what to do when staples run out during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Stapling Limit Error Set what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.
Value
Ignore: Printing continues without stapling.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
NOTE
Requires the optional Document Finisher.
Paper Mismatch Error Set what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type
loaded in the specified paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the
cassette or multi-purpose tray.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Inserted Paper Mism atch Set what to do when it is detected that the cassette paper size setting does not match
the actual paper size that is fed.
Value
Ignore: The setting is ignored and the job is printed.
Display Error: Message to cancel printing is displayed.
Item Description
Color Toner Empty Action Select whether printing is prohibited or the Print in Black and White setting is used for
printing once the color toner runs out.
Value: Stop printing, Print in Black & White
8-20
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Measurement]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Measurement]
[Low Toner Alert]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Low Toner Alert]
Keyboard Layout
Menu transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Keyboard Layout]
[USB Keyboard Type]
Menu transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [USB Keyboard Type]
[Offset Documents by Job]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset Documents by Job]
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
Item Description
Measurement Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.
Value: mm, inch
Item Description
Low Toner Alert Set the amount of remaining toner to notify the administrator when to order a toner
when the toner is running low. This notification is used for event report, Status Monitor,
SNMP Trap.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the amount of remaining toner to alert. The setting range is 5 to
100% (in 1% increments).
Item Description
Keyboard Layout Change the layout of the touch panel keyboard used to enter characters.
Value: QWERTY, QWERTZ, AZERTY
Item Description
USB Keyboard Type Sele ct the type of USB keyboard that you want to use.
Value: US-English, US-English with Euro, French, German, British English
Item Description
Offset Documents by Job Select whether to offset documents by Job.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.
8-21
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Offset One Page Documents]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Offset One Page Documents]
[Display Status/Log]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Display Status/Log]
Set the display method of the Status/Log.
*1 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
[Function Key Assignment]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Function Key Assignment]
Assigns a function to each function key.
*1 Displayed when the external server (FAX server) is set.
*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
*3 Displayed when the product is equipped with an optional large capacity storage device (SSD).
*4 The registered application name is displayed.
[Show Power Off Message]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Show Power Off Message]
Item Description
Offset One Page Documents Set whether one-page documents are sorted.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional Document Finisher is installed.
Item Description
Display Jobs Detail Status Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display Jobs Log Value: Show All, My Jobs Only, Hide All
Display FAX Log*1 Value: Show All, Hide All
Item Description
Function Key 1 Value: None, Copy, Send, FAX Server*1, FAX*2, Custom Box*3Job Box, Removable
Memory, Sub Address Box*2, Polling Box*2, FAX Memory RX Box*2, ID Card Copy,
Paper Saving Copy, Simple Folder Send (Destination Entry), Simple Folder Send
(Address Book), Simple Email Send (Destination Entry), Simple Email Send (Address
Book), Application*4
NOTE
You can select the function to display by selecting [Menu] > [Narrow Down] or from the
pull-down menu, by selecting [All], [Application], [Favorites], [Others] to display the
function.
Function Key 2
Function Key 3
Item Description
Show Power Off Message Set the mode whether display a confirmation message in power supply off.
Value: Off, On
8-22
System Menu > [Common Settings]
[Layout for ID Card Copy]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Common Settings] > [Layout for ID Card Copy]
Item Description
Layout for ID Card Copy Set the print position of the scanned image when copying the ID card.
Value: Align Upper Right, Align Center
8-24
System Menu > [Copy]
[Copy]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Copy]
Configures settings for copying functions.
Item Description
Auto Paper Selection If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the
zoom changes.
Value
Most Suitable Size: Selects paper size based on the current zoom and the size of the
original.
Same as Original Size: Selects paper that matches the size of the original, regardless
the zoom.
Auto % Priority When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether
automatic zoom (reduce/zoom) is performed.
Value: Off, On
Paper Size for Small Original Specify the paper size to be used for a case where the original is too small to be
detected in the Auto Paper Selection mode.
Value: Default Paper Source, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B5-R, B5, B6-R, Letter-R, Letter,
Statement-R
Original Size of Undetected
Original This specifies the size to use for the original when the original size is not detected.
Value: According to default paper source, Display size selection screen
Reserve Next Priority Specify whether the default screen appears when a subsequent copy job is reserved
while printing is in progress. To have the default screen appear, select [On].
Value: Off, On
Auto Image Rotation Action Set whether the image is rotated when the orientation of the document to be printed is
different from the orientation of the paper.
Value: No rotation for manual copy, Always rotate, Rotate according to image size
8-25
System Menu > [Send]
[Send]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Send]
Configures settings for sending functions.
*1 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
*2 Displayed only when the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
Item Description
Dest. Check before
Send Select whether to display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the [Start] key
when performing sending jobs.
Value: Off, On
Entry Check for New
Dest. When adding new destination, select whether to display the entry check screen to check the
entered destination.
Value: Off, On
Send and Forward Select whether to forward the original to another destination when sending images.
Forward Select whether to forward the original.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If [On] is selected select from among the following for the forwarding rule: [FAX],*1 [E-mail],
[Folder (SMB)], [Folder (FTP).
Destination Set the destination to which the original is forwarded. One destination can be set. Follow the
steps below to register the destination.
• Address Book
• Ext Address Book
• Address Entry (Mail)
• Address Entry (Folder)
Destination Operations (5-27)
Color TIFF
Compression Specify the compression method for color TIFF images handled by this machine.
Value: TIFF V6, TTN2
Default Screen Set the default screen displayed when you select the [Send] key.
Value: Destination, Address Book, Ext Address Book, One Touch
New Destination Entry Select whether to permit direct entry of destination.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Recall Destination Select whether to permit usage of [Recall] on the Send screen.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Broadcast Set whether to enable broadcast.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
OCR Text Recogn ition
Act.*2 Configure settings for OCR Text Recognition Action.
Value: Speed Priority, Quality Priority
8-26
System Menu > [Document Box]
[Document Box]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Document Box]
Configures settings for the Custom Box, Job Box, F Code Box, and Polling Box.
*1 Displayed only when an optional SSD is installed.
*2 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
Item Description
Custom Box*1 Configure settings for Custom Box.
Add/Edit Using Machine Operations to Create a New Custom Box (3-49)
Default Setting Auto File Deletion Time
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents.
Sub Address Box*2 FAX Operation Guide
Job Box Configure settings for Job Box.
Quick Copy Job
Retention To maintain free space on the box, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.
Value: number between 0 and 300
NOTE
When 0 is set, Quick Copy cannot be used.
Deletion of Job
Retention This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and
Hold Printing, saved temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been
saved for a set time.
Value: Off, 1 hour, 4 hours, 1 day, 1 week
NOTE
This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function
setting, temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.
Storage Media Select which storage media to use.
Value: SSD, SD card
NOTE
This setting will not be displayed unless an optional SSD or SD card device is installed.
Polling Box*2 FAX Operation Guide
FAX Memory RX Box*2
8-27
System Menu > [FAX]
[FAX]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [FAX]
This configures fax function settings.
FAX Operation Guide
8-29
System Menu > [Internet]
[Internet]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Internet]
Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.
Item Description
Proxy This configures the proxy setting.
Value: Off, On
Use Same Proxy Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols. If you do not want to use
the same proxy server, select [Off].
Value: Off, On
HTTP Proxy Server Set a proxy server (HTTP).
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
HTTPS ProxyServer Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when the "Use the Same Proxy
Server" setting is [Off].
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
No Proxy Domains Set domains for which no proxy is used.
Value: (Enter the domain name.)
8-30
System Menu > [Address Book/One Touch]
[Address Book/One Touch]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch]
Save frequently used destinations to the Address Book or One Touch Key. The saved destinations can be changed.
Saved destinations can be modified. Destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and FAX
Transmission.
Adding a Destination (3-32)
[Address Book]
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book]
Configure settings for address book.
Adding a Destination (Address Book) (3-32)
[One Touch Key]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [One Touch Key]
Configure settings for One Touch Key.
Assigning a Destination to a One Touch Key (3-37)
[Address Book Defaults]
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Address Book Defaults]
*1 Appears only when an External The Address Book can be used.
[Edit Restriction]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Edit Restriction]
[Print List]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Address Book/One Touch] > [Print List]
FAX Operation Guide
Item Description
Sort Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.
Value: Number, Name
Address Book Type*1 This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when
the address book is displayed.
Value: Machine Address Book, Ext Address Book
Item Description
Address Book Restrict editing of the address book. If [Administrator Only] is selected, log in with
administrator privileges is required to edit the address book.
Value: Unlimited, Administrator Only
One Touch Key Restrict editing of the One Touch Key. If [Administrator Only] is selected, log in with
administrator privileges is required to edit One Touch Keys.
Value: Unlimited, Administrator Only
8-31
System Menu > [User Login/Job Accounting]
[User Login/Job Accounting]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
Configure settings for machine management.
Overview of User Login Administration (9-3)
User Login/Job Accounting (9-29)
Setting Unknown Number Processing Method (9-46)
8-32
System Menu > [Printer]
[Printer]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Printer]
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.
Item Description
Emulation Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of
printers.
Value: PCL6, KPDL, KPDL (Auto)
NOTE
When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)], set "Alt Emulation", too.
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL (Auto)], set "KPDL Error Report", too.
Alt Emulation When you have selected [KPDL (Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between
KPDL and another emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to
the data to print.
Value: PCL6
KPDL Error Report When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not
the error report is output.
Value: Off, On
Color Setting You can choose whether reports are printed in color or black and white.
Value: Color, Black & White
EcoPrint EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where
faded printing is not a problem.
Value: Off, On
Override A4/Letter Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size
when printing.
Value
Off: A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.
On: A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will use whichever
size is in the paper source.
Duplex Select binding orientation for duplex mode.
Value: 1-sided, 2-sided Bind LongEdge, 2-sided Bind ShortEdge
Copies Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.
Value: 1 to 999 copies
Orientation Set the default orientation, [Portrait] or [Landscape].
Value: Portrait, Landscape
Wide A4 Turn this to on to increase the maximum number of characters that can be printed in a
line for an A4 page (78 characters at 10 pitch) and Letter size page (80 characters at 10
pitch). This setting is only effective in PCL6 emulation.
Value: Off, On
Form Feed TimeOut Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no
information signaling that the last page does not have any more data to be printed.
When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints paper. The options
are between 5 and 495 seconds.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
LF Action Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code
0AH).
Value: LF Only, LF and CR, Ignore LF
8-33
System Menu > [Printer]
CR Action Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code
(character code 0DH).
Value: CR Only, LF and CR, Ignore CR
Job Name Set whether the job name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], select the job name to be displayed from [Job Name], [Job No. &
Job Name], or [Job Name & Job No.].
User Name Set whether the user name set in the printer driver is displayed.
Value: Off, On
Print Area Compensation Correct the print area of the printer. The printing position may differ from the expected
position in some applications. In this event, you can correct the print position by shifting
it vertically and horizontally.
Value
Vertical: -76.0 to +76.0 mm
Horizontal: -76.0 to +76.0 mm
MP Tray Priority If paper is set in the MP Tray then it is possible for priority to be given to that MP tray in
the paper feed.
Value
Off: The printer driver settings are followed.
Auto Feed: If Auto is selected in the printer driver and there is paper in the MP tray then
the paper feed will be from the MP tray.
Always: If there is paper in the MP tray then the paper feed will be from the MP tray
regardless of what is set in the printer driver.
Paper Feed Mode While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and
type are specified.
Value
Auto: Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.
Fixed: Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.
Auto Cassette Change Select the following actions when the paper runs out in the paper source while printing.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [Off], the machine displays "Add the following paper in cassette #." (# is
a cassette number) or "Add the following paper in the multi purpose tray.", and stops
printing.
Load the paper according to the paper source displayed to resume printing.
To print from the other paper cassette, select [Paper Selection]. Select the desired paper
source.
When selecting [On], the machine continues printing automatically when the other
cassette contains the same paper as the currently-used cassette.
Resolution Set the resolution used for printing.
Value: 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
NOTE
Settings that are received from the printer driver have priority over the operation panel
settings.
KIR Select the default KIR (smoothing) setting.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
8-34
System Menu > [Printer]
Gloss Mode Gloss Mode increases the effect of glossiness in printing. However, printing takes
longer time.
Value: Off, On
IMPORTANT
This function is not available when [Labels] or [Transparency] is selected as
the paper type setting.
[Cassette/MP Tray Settings] (8-9)
Depending on the paper used, printing in gloss mode may cause curl in paper. To
reduce curl, try using thicker paper.
Printing Job Terminator You can select the condition which regarded as a job termination if the print job could not
be processed until the end due to your environment and the other reason.
Value
EOJ (END of Job): Up to the detection of a command indicating the end of job data is
regarded as one job.
End of Network Session: The data included in a network session at network connection
is regarded as one job.
UEL (Universal Exit Language): The UEL included in the termination of the job data is
regarded as one job until it is detected.
Item Description
8-35
System Menu > [System/Network]
[System/Network]
Configures machine system settings.
[Network]
Configures network settings.
[Host Name]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Host Name]
[Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct Settings]
Configure Wi-Fi Direct settings.
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (2-44)
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
Item Description
Wi-Fi Direct Select whether to use Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
Device Name Configure the device name setting.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
This function is displayed when [On] is selected for the Wi-Fi Direct setting.
IP Address Use this to check the machine IP address.
[TCP/IP Setting] (8-41)
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
If [On] is selected, set the time until the job is skipped.
This function is displayed when [On] is selected for the Wi-Fi Direct setting.
Auto Disconnect Automatically disconnects devices connected by Wi-Fi Direct.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot
be entered.
8-36
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wi-Fi Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Settings]
Configure Wi-Fi settings.
[Wi-Fi]
[Setup]
NOTE
This function is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or service
representatives for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
Item Description
Wi-Fi Select whether to use Wi-Fi.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
Connection Status This can be used to check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless
network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect. Select a desired access
point from the list.
WEP Key Index Select the key index value that is set on the access point.
Value: 0 to 3
Push Button Method If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be
configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the
connection is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method
(Device) Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access
point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
8-37
System Menu > [System/Network]
Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine
connects.
NOTE
Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Network Authentication Select network authentication type.
Value: Open System, WPA2/WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, WPA2/WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP
Encryption Select encryption method. The setting values vary depending on the [Network
Authentication] setting.
When [Network Authentication] is set to [Open]
Value: Disable, WEP
WEP Key: Up to 26 characters
WEP Key Index: 0 to 3
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA2/WPA-PSK]
Value: AES, Auto
Pre-shared Key: Up to 64 characters
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA2-PSK]
Value: AES (Fixed)
Pre-shared Key: Up to 64 characters
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA2/WPA-EAP]
Value: AES, Auto
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA2-EAP]
Value: AES (Fixed)
Item Description
8-38
System Menu > [System/Network]
[TCP/IP Settings]
Item Description
TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.
Value: Off, On
IPv4 Settings Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is
[On].
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.
Value: Off, On
IP Address Set the IP address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
DNS Server Select whether or not to automatically obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Value: Auto (DHCP), Manual
IP Address When [DNS Server] is set to [Manual], set the IP addresses of the primary and secondary
DNS servers.
Primary
Server Set the IP addresses of the primary DNS servers.
Value: ###.###.###.###
Secondary
Server Set the IP addresses of the secondary DNS servers.
Value: ###.###.###.###
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
[Restart Network] (8-51)
8-39
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item Description
IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is
[On].
IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the network.
Manual Setting Manual Setting (IPv6) Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address
of TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter [Default Gateway], set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the network.
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the network.
DNS Server Select whether or not to automatically obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Value: Auto (DHCP), Manual
IP Address When [DNS Server] is set to [Manual], set the IP addresses of the primary and secondary
DNS servers.
Primary
Server Set the IP addresses of the primary DNS servers.
Value: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit hexadecimal
digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Secondary
Server Set the IP addresses of the secondary DNS servers.
Value: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit hexadecimal
digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
IMPORTANT
After changing the se tt in g , restart the netwo rk or tu rn th e mach in e OFF an d the n ON .
[Restart Network] (8-51)
8-40
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wired Network Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Wired Network Settings]
Configure settings for the Wired Network Settings.
8-41
System Menu > [System/Network]
[TCP/IP Setting]
Item Description
TCP/IP Select whether to use TCP/IP Protocol.
Value: Off, On
IPv4 Set up TCP/IP (IPv4) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is
[On].
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv4) server.
Value: Off, On
Auto-IP Select whether to use Auto-IP.
Value: Off, On
IP Address Set the IP address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Subnet Mask Set the IP subnet mask.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
Default Gateway Set the IP gateway address.
Value: ###.###.###.###
NOTE
When DHCP is set to [On], this function will be grayed out and the value cannot be
entered.
DNS Server Select whether or not to automatically obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Value: Auto (DHCP), Manual
IP Address When [DNS Server] is set to [Manual], set the IP addresses of the primary and secondary
DNS servers.
Primary
Server Set the IP addresses of the primary DNS servers.
Value: ###.###.###.###
Secondary
Server
Set the IP addresses of the secondary DNS servers.
Value: ###.###.###.###
IMPORTANT
• When setting the Auto-IP, enter "0.0.0.0" in [IP Address].
• After changing the setting, restart the network or turn the machine OFF and then ON.
[Restart Network] (8-51)
8-42
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item Description
IPv6 Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. This setting is available when [TCP/IP] is
[On].
IPv6 Select whether to use IPv6.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Link Local)] after restarting the network.
Manual Setting Manual Setting (IPv6) Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address
of TCP/IP (IPv6).
Value
IP Address (Manual): 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Prefix Length: 0 to 128
Default Gateway: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit
hexadecimal digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
To enter [Default Gateway], set [RA (Stateless)] to [Off].
RA (Stateless) Select whether to use RA (Stateless).
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateless)] after restarting the network.
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP (IPv6) server.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function is displayed when [IPv6] is set to [On].
Selecting [On] displays IP address in [IP Address (Stateful)] after restarting the network.
DNS Server Select whether or not to automatically obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Value: Auto (DHCP), Manual
IP Address When [DNS Server] is set to [Manual], set the IP addresses of the primary and secondary
DNS servers.
Primary
Server Set the IP addresses of the primary DNS servers.
Value: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit hexadecimal
digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
Secondary
Server
Set the IP addresses of the secondary DNS servers.
Value: 128-bits address is expressed in eight groups consisting of four-digit hexadecimal
digits. The groups are separated by colon (:).
IMPORTANT
After changing the se tt in g , restart the netwo rk or tu rn th e mach in e OFF an d the n ON .
[Restart Network] (8-51)
8-43
System Menu > [System/Network]
[LAN Interface]
[Bonjour]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Bonjour]
[IPSec]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [IPSec]
Item Description
LAN Interface Specify the settings for the LAN interface to be used.
Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000BASE-T
IMPORTANT
After changing the se tt in g , restart the netwo rk or tu rn th e mach in e OFF an d the n ON .
[Restart Network] (8-51)
Item Description
Protocol Settings Select whether to use Bonjour.
Value: Off, On
Availab l e Network (Wi-
Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Availab l e Network (Wi-
Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
Item Description
IPSec Select whether to use IPSec.
Value: Off, On
8-44
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Protocol Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Protocol Settings]
Configure the protocol settings.
Item Description
NetBEUI ―
Protocol Settings Selects whether to receive documents using NetBEUI.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-FiDirect) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
LPD ―
Protocol Settings Selects whether to receive documents using LPD.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
SMTP (E-mail TX) Select whether to send E-mail using SMTP.
Value: Off, On
POP3 (E-mail RX) Select whether to receive E-mail using POP3.
Value: Off, On
FTP Client (Transmission) Select whether to send documents using FTP. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the
protocol to [On]. The default port number is 21.
Value: Off, On
FTP Server (Reception) ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to receive documents using FTP.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-FiDirect) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
SMB Client
(Transmission): Select whether to send documents using SMB. To use SMB, select [On] for this setting. The
default port number is 445.
Value: Off, On
8-45
System Menu > [System/Network]
WSD Scan ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to use WSD Scan.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
WSD Print ―
Protocol Settings Select whether or not each network is enabled.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
DSM Scan Select whether to use DSM scan.*1
Value: Off, On
LDAP Select whether to use LDAP.
Value: Off, On
SNMP ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to communicate using SNMP.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
SNMPv3 ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to communicate using SNMPv3.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
Item Description
8-46
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item Description
HTTP ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to communicate using HTTP.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
HTTPS ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to communicate using HTTPS.*1*2
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
IPP ―
Protocol Settings Selects whether to receive documents using IPP. To use the IPP protocol, set [IPP] to [On],
and set [SSL] to [Off]. In addition, select [Not Secure (IPP&IPPS)] for the security settings
from Command Center RX.*1
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Direct SMTP Port
Number Specifies the port number used. The default port number is 631.
Value: 1 to 32767
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
8-47
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item Description
IPP over SSL Select whether to use IPP to receive documents secured by SSL. To use the IPP protocol,
set [IPP] and [SSL] to [On]. The default port number is 443.*1*2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Protocol Settings Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1
Value: Off, On
Direct SMTP Port
Number Specifies the port number used. The default port number is 4000.
Value: 1 to 32767
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
Raw Port ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to receive documents using Raw Port.*1
Value: Off, On
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
8-48
System Menu > [System/Network]
Item Description
ThinPrint ―
Protocol Settings Select whether to use ThinPrint. To use the Thin Print protocol, set the protocol to [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
This function can only be used when the optional UG-33 is installed.
Direct SMTP Port
Number Specifies the port number used. The default port number is 4000.
Value: 1 to 32767
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Thin Print over SSL To use the Thin Print over SSL protocol, set [Thin Print Over SSL] and [SSL] to [On].
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Available Network
(Wi-FiDirect) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
8-49
System Menu > [System/Network]
Enhanced WSD ―
Protocol Settings Set whether to use our proprietary web services.*1*2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX
drivers.
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
Enhanced WSD over SSL ―
Protocol Settings Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1*2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Selecting [Off] will disable the functionality of WIA, TWAIN and Network FAX
drivers.
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Protocol Settings] is set to [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
5eSCL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL.*1
Value: Off, On
Protocol Settings Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.*1*2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. The default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Available Network
(Wi-Fi Direct) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
Item Description
8-50
System Menu > [System/Network]
*1 The setting will be changed after restarting the device or network.
*2 Use Security Settings to select [On] for [SSL].
[Security Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Security Settings]
[Ping]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Ping]
eSCL over SSL Selects whether to receive scanned documents using eSCL over SSL.* 1*2
Value: Off, On
Protocol Settings Set whether to use our proprietary web services over SSL.* 1*2
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When selecting [On], it also requires a certificate for SSL. the default certificate is
the self-certificate of the machine.
Available Network
(Wi-FiDirect) Select whether or not each network is enabled.
Value: Disable, Enable
NOTE
This setting is displayed when the [Protocol Settings] setting is [On].
Available Network
(Wi-Fi)
Available Network
(Wired Network)
Item Description
SSL Select whether to use SSL for communication.
Value: Off, On
IPP Security Select the IPP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].
Value: IPP/IPP over SSL, IPPoverSSL only
HTTP Security Select the HTTP security level. This setup is available when SSL is [On].
Value: HTTP/HTTPS, HTTPS Only
SMTP Security Select the communication protocol in accordance with the types of security supported
by the SMTP server. This setting is available when the [SMTP] setting is [On].
Value: Off, SSL/TLS, STARTTLS
POP3 Security
(User 1)
Select the communication protocol in accordance with the types of security supported
by the POP3 server. This setting is available when [POP3] is [On].
Value: Off, SSL/TLS, STARTTLS
POP3 Security
(User 2)
POP3 Security
(User 3)
Item Description
Ping Checks if communication with the destination by entering the host name or IP address
of the destination is possible.
NOTE
If [Network Interface (Send)] is set to [Optional NIC], this item is not displayed.
Item Description
8-51
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Restart Network]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Restart Network]
[Proxy]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Network] > [Proxy]
[Optional Network]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Network]
Configure settings for the optional Network Interface Kit.
Item Description
Restart Network Restarts the network.
Item Description
Proxy Set the proxy for connection to the Internet from an application.
Value: Off, On
Use Same Proxy Set whether the same proxy server is used for all protocols.
Value: Off, On
HTTP Proxy Server Set a proxy server (HTTP).
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
HTTPS Proxy Server Set a proxy server (HTTPS). This setup is available when "Use the Same Proxy Server
for All Protocols" is [Off].
Value: (Enter the proxy address and port number.)
No Proxy Domains Set domains for which no proxy is used.
Value: (Enter the domain name.)
NOTE
This menu is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or optional Wireless Interface Kit (IB-51)
is installed.
8-52
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Basic]
*1 The setting will be changed after the device or network is restarted.
Item Description
Host Name Check the host name of the machine. Host name can be changed from Command
Center RX.
Changing Device Information (2-44)
TCP/IP Setting For details on setting value.
[TCP/IP Setting] (8-41)
[IPSec] (8-43)
NetWare Use NetWare to receive documents.
Network Interface Kit Operation Guide
Value: Off, On
AppleTalk Selects whether to receive documents using AppleTalk.*1
Value: Off, On
LAN Interface Select the LAN interface.*1
Value: Auto, 10Base-Half, 10Base-Full, 100Base-Half, 100Base-Full, 1000BASE-T
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) is
installed.
MAC Address Filter Select whether to use MAC Address Filter.
Network Interface Kit Operation Guide
Value: Off, On
Restart Network Restarts the network card of the device.
8-53
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Wireless Network]
Configure settings for the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit.
*1 Not displayed if [Ad Hoc] is selected for [Connection Mode].
*2 Not displayed if [WPA2-PSK] was selected for [Network Authentication].
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
Item Description
Connection Status When the optional is installed, you can check the wireless LAN status.
Quick Setup Wizard If the machine will connect to an access point that supports the automatic wireless
network setup, connection settings can be configured by Quick Setup.
Available Network Displays access points to which the machine can connect. Select a desired access point
from the list.
Push Button If the access point supports the push button method, wireless settings can be
configured using the push button. This setting executes push button, and the connection
is started by pressing the push button on the access point.
NOTE
The push button method supports only the WPS.
PIN Code Method
(Device) Starts connection using the machine's PIN code. Enter the PIN code into the access
point. The PIN code of the machine is automatically generated.
PIN Code Method
(Terminal) Starts connection using the PIN code of the access point. Enter the PIN code of the
access point.
Custom Setup The detailed settings for wireless LAN can be changed.
Network Name (SSID) Set the SSID (Service Set Identifier) of the wireless LAN to which the machine connects.
NOTE
An SSID can contain up to 32 characters.
Connection Mode Set the connection mode.
Value: Ad Hoc, Infrastructure
NOTE
• Ad Hoc: Directly communicates with the device without going through an
access point. This method cannot be used to connect to two or more devices.
• Infrastructure: Performs communication through an access point.
Channel Set channel. Use [-] / [+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
Value: 1 to 11
Network Authentication Select network authentication type. To select other options, open the device home page
from a computer.
Value: Open System, Shared Key, WPA-PSK*1, WPA2-PSK*1
Encrypt Select encryption method. If the option other than [Disable] is selected, enter the WEP
key or the Preshared key. The setting values vary depending on the Network
Authentication setting. Select [Data Encryption].
When Network Authentication is set to [Open] or [Shared]
Value: Disable, WEP
When Network Authentication is set to [WPA-PSK] or [WPA2-PSK]
Value: TKIP*2, AES, Auto*2, Pre-shared Key
NOTE
• If [WEP] is selected, enter the WEP key. A WEP key can contain up to 26
characters.
• If [TKIP], [AES] or [Auto] is selected, enter the Preshared key. Enter the value
in 8 to 64 characters.
8-54
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Primary Network (Client)]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Primary Network (Client)]
[Interface Block Setting]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Interface Block Setting]
This allows you to protect this machine by blocking the interface with external devices such as USB hosts or optional
interfaces.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-
36 or IB-51) is installed.
The Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is an option for some models. Contact your dealer or our sales or
service representatives for detail.
IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit> (12-3)
Item Description
Primary Network (Client) This selects the network interface to be used when this machine is connected with a
sending device operating as a client or with an external Address Book.
Value: Wi-Fi, Wired Network, Optional Network
NOTE
• [Wi-Fi] is displayed when the Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-36) is
installed.
• [Optional Network] is displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit (IB-
50) or Wireless Network Interface Kit (IB-51) is installed.
• For the e-mail settings, you need to configure the equipped network interface
and the optional network interface separately.
Item Description
USB Host This locks and protects the USB port (USB host).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Device This locks and protects the USB interface connector (USB Device).
Value: Unblock, Block
USB Sto rage This locks and protects the USB memory slot.
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
This function is available when USB Host is set to [Unblock].
Optional Interface 1 This locks and protects the optional interface slots.
Value: Unblock, Block
NOTE
You can set this feature for each slot.
Optional Interface 2
IMPORTANT
After changing the se tt in g , restart the netwo rk or tu rn th e mach in e OFF an d the n ON.
[Restart] (8-55)
8-55
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Bluetooth Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Bluetooth Settings]
[Security Level]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Security Level]
[Optional Memory]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Memory]
[Restart]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Restart]
Item Description
Bluetooth Keyboard Use Bluetooth Keyboard
Value: Unblock, Block
Search Device Select the keyboard to be used.
Item Description
Security Level Specify the security level.
Value:
Low: This mode is used during maintenance. Do not use normally.
High: This is the security setting we recommend. Use this setting normally.
Very High: In addition to [High] setting, this setting disables the machine settings to be
changed from external command.
NOTE
The settings of this function can be configured by a user logged in with
administrator privileges.
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
Item Description
Optio nal Memory When optional memory is installed, you can select a memory allocation pattern in
accordance with specific needs.
Value: Printer Priority, Standard, Copy Priority
Item Description
Restart Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any
unstable operation by the machine. (Same as the computer restart.)
8-56
System Menu > [System/Network]
[RAM Disk]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [RAM Disk Setting]
NOTE
This function is displayed when an optional SSD is installed.
Item Description
RAM Disk Setting This creates a RAM disk and specifies its capacity.
Creating a RAM disk enables printing of print data from the Job Box.
Value
RAM Disk Setting: Off, On
Ram Disk Size: The size setting range depends on the size of the installed memory and
option memory usage settings.
IMPORTANT
After changing the se tt in g , restart the netwo rk or tu rn th e mach in e OFF an d the n ON .
[Restart] (8-55)
8-57
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Data Security]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Data Security]
Configure settings for data stored in the SSD.
Item Description
SSD Initialization This changes security function settings.
NOTE
• This function is displayed when the SSD is installed and the optional Data
Security Kit is activated.
• Input of the security password is required to change security function
settings. The initial setting for the Security Password is "000000".
Security Password You can customize the security password so that only the administrator can use the
security kit.
Enter a password that uses six to 16 alphanumeric characters and symbols.
You will need to enter the password again for confirmation.
IMPORTANT
Avoid any easy-to-guess numbers for the security password (e.g. 11111111 or
12345678).
System Initialization This can be used to delete all the data stored in the SSD. Overwrite all the data stored in
the SSD when disposing of the machine.
IMPORTANT
If you accidentally turn the power switch off during initialization, the SSD might
possibly crash or initialization might fail.
NOTE
If you accidentally turn off power during initialization, turn it back on.
Initialization will restart automatically.
Data Sanitization Return the following information registered in the machine to the factory defaults.
• Address Book
• Favorites
• System settings
• Fax transmission and reception / forwarding data
• Transmission histories
• Data saved in Custom Box
• Optional applications
NOTE
• Print a status page and make sure to completely delete security data.
[Report] (8-5)
• Once in progress, the processing cannot canceled.
• Before executing this function, disconnect modular, network, and other
cables.
• Do not turn off the main power switch while sanitizing the data. If the main
power is turned off during data erasing, erasing will be executed
automatically when the power is restored, however, complete erasure cannot
be guaranteed.
8-58
System Menu > [System/Network]
Information erased
*1 Only when the optional fax kit is installed.
[OCR Dictionary Installation]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [OCR Dictionary Installation]
[Optional Function]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Optional Function]
Category Data erased
Devices/jobs • Job settings configured by users
• Network settings
• Image data saved in Document Box, etc.
• Data registered in One Touch keys
• Job histories
• User information (user list, address book, Document Box registered by the user,
etc.)
• Account information of job accounting
• Network certificates
• Initial screen on machine changed by service representative
FAX*1 • Fax settings configured by users
• Communication restriction settings
• Encryption key settings
• Transmission histories
• Scheduled Job
• Conditional reception/forwarding settings
Application • Application/program added by a user or service representative
• Trial functions
Item Display
OCR Dictionary Installation Install the OCR Dictionary.
NOTE
• For information on dictionary data, consult your Service Representative.
• To install the OCR dictionary, an SSD or SD/SDHC memory card must be
inserted.
• If both an SSD and an SD/SDHC memory card are inserted, the OCR
dictionary will be installed on the SSD.
• If you will use an SD/SDHC memory card, a 32 GB SDHC memory card is
recommended.
Item Display
Optio nal Function You can use the optional applications installed on this machine.
Optional Applications 12-11
8-59
System Menu > [System/Network]
[Remote Services Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [Remote Services Settings]
[FAX Server Settings]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [FAX Server Settings]
[NFC]
Menu Transition: [System Menu/Counter] key > [System/Network] > [NFC]
Item Description
Remote Services Settings Select whether to use Remote Services Settings.
Value: Off, On
Item Description
FAX Server Select whether to use FAX Server.
Value: On, Off
Address Setting This specifies a prefix, suffix, and domain name to be attached to a destination.
NOTE
For information about the fax server, contact the fax server administrator.
File Format Set the default type of the files.
Value: PDF, TIFF, XPS
Address Book Defaults This specifies the External Address Book to be used.
NOTE
• This is displayed when [On] is selected by the fax server.
• This is not displayed if the External Address Book setting is not configured.
Command Center RX User Guide
Item Description
NFC Uses NFC (Near Field Communication).
Value: Off, On
8-60
System Menu > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
[Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver] Configure date and time settings.
Item Description
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send
as E-mail, the date and time set here will be displayed on the header.
Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31), Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00
to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Setting Date and Time (2-12)
NOTE
If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no
longer be able to use the application.
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western
notation.
Value: MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, YYYY/MM/DD
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest listed location from the list. If you
select a region that utilizes summer time, configure settings for summer time.
Setting Date and Time (2-12)
Auto Panel Reset If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to
the default setting. Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
Refer to the following for the time until reset.
Panel Reset Timer (8-60)
Panel Reset Timer If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel
Reset.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Panel Reset] is set to [On].
Low Power Timer Set amount of time before entering the Low Power mode.
Value
For Europe: 1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
NOTE
Low Power Mode (2-22)
Sleep Rules (mod els for
Europe)*1 Select whether to use the Sleep mode for the following functions individually:
• Card Reader*2
•FAX
*3
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
If the sleep condition is not turned off, the ID card cannot be recognized.
8-61
System Menu > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
Sleep Level (models except for
Europe)*1 Select the sleep level.
Set the Energy Saver mode to reduce power consumption even more than normal
Sleep mode.
Value: Quick Recovery, Energy Saver
NOTE
This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
Sleep Rules Select whether to use the Energy Saver mode for the following functions individually:
• Card Reader*2
• Application
Value: Off, On
NOTE
When the machine has entered sleep mode with Energy Saver setting, it does not wake
from sleep mode when it receives print data from a PC connected by USB cable. Also,
the ID card cannot be recognized.
Sleep Timer Set amount of time before entering Sleep.
Value
ECOSYS M8124cidn for Europe: 1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)
ECOSYS M8130cidn for Europe: 1 to 60 minutes (1 minute increments)
Except for Europe 1 to 240 minutes (1 minute increments)
Energy Saver Recovery Level Select the method of recovery from energy saver.
Value
Full Recovery: This mode enables the use of all functions immediately.However, this
mode saves less energy.
Normal Recovery: In this mode, you can select the method from the following: enabling
the use of all functions immediately or enabling the use of desired functions only.If you
want to use all functions immediately, select the [Energy Saver] key to execute recovery.
Power Saving Recovery: This mode enables the use of desired functions only. This
mode saves energy most effectively.
Auto Error Clear If an error occurs during processing, processing stops to wait for the next step to be
taken by the user. In the Auto Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set
amount of time elapses.
Value: Off, On
NOTE
For setting the automatic error recovery time, refer to the following item.
Error Clear Timer If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before
automatically clearing errors.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Auto Error Clear] is set to [On].
Item Description
8-62
System Menu > [Date/Timer/Energy Saver]
*1 This function will not be displayed when the optional Network Interface Kit is installed.
*2 Displayed when the optional Card Authentication Kit is activated.
*3 Displayed only when the optional fax function is installed.
Interrupt Clear Timer Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to
Interrupt Copy mode and then left unused.
Value: 5 to 495 seconds (in 5 second increments)
Unusable Time*3 FAX Operation Guide
Ping Timeout Set the time until timeout occurs when [Ping] is executed in [System/Network].
Value: 1 to 30 seconds (in 1 second increments)
Item Description
8-63
System Menu > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
[Adjustment/Maintenance]
Menu Transition: [System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.
Item Description
Density Adjustment Adjust density.
Copy Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment
can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
FAX*1 FAX Operation Guide
Sharpness Adjustment Adjusts the sharpness of image outlines.
Copy Sharpen or blur overall image outlines during copying. Adjustment can be made in 7
levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Send/Box Sharpen or blur overall image outlines when sending the scanned images to the
specified destination or storing them in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made
in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Blur), -2, -1, 0, +1, +2, +3 (Sharpen)
Contrast You can increase or decrease the overall contrast.
Copy Increases or decreases the overall contrast of copies.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Send/Box Increases or decreases the overall contrast when documents are sent or saved in a
document box.
Value: -3 (Lower), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Higher)
Background Density Adj. Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment.
Copy (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density adjustment during copying.
Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Send/Box (Auto) Darkens or lightens overall background density when sending images or storing them
in the Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels.
Value: -3 (Lighter), -2, -1, 0 (Normal), +1, +2, +3 (Darker)
Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint).
Copy Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) at the time of copying.
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Printer Select the default Toner Save Level (EcoPrint) at the time of use of the printer.
Value: 1 (Low) to 5 (High)
Raising the level reduces toner consumption, but image quality falls.
Auto Color Correction This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine
whether the original is color or black and white in Auto Color Selection Mode. Setting
a lower value will result in more originals being identified as color, while a larger value
will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and white.
Value: 1 (Color), 2, 3, 4, 5 (B & W)
8-64
System Menu > [Adjustment/Maintenance]
Correcting Black Line Correct fine lines (streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the
image, when the document processor is used.
Value: Off, On
Display Brightness Set the brightness of the touch panel.
Value: 1 (Darker), 2, 3, 4, 5 (Lighter)
Color Reg is t r ation When first installing the machine or moving it to a new location, color drift during
printing may occur. Use this function to correct the color position of each of cyan,
magenta and yellow to resolve color drift.
Color Registration (11-25)
Tone Curve Adjustment After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the
printed output tone may differ from the original.
Perform this function to ensure consistency with the original tone.
Tone Curve Adjustment (11-30)
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. It takes about 1 to 2 minutes.
The time required may vary depending on the operating environment.
Drum Refresh (11-32)
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh
after the printing is done.
Auto Drum Refresh Set the execution duration of auto drum refresh.
Value:
Short: Shortens the duration of execution of auto drum refresh.
Standard: Uses the standard time of execution of auto drum refresh.
Calibration Adjust color drift and hue of printed images.
Calibration (11-30)
NOTE
Perform Color Registration when the color drift is not adjusted even after performing
Calibration, and perform Gray Adjust if the color hue is not improved.
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
Perform the laser scanner cleaning. (11-30)
Service Settings Performs maintenance and inspection of the machine. This menu is primarily used by
service personnel for maintenance.
Item Description
9-1
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) >
9 User Authentication and
Accounting (User Login,
Job Accounting)
This chapter explains the following topics:
Overview of User Login Administration .............................................................................................................. 9-3
Managing the Job Account from PC .................................................................................................................. 9-4
Enabling User Login Administration ................................................................................................................... 9-5
Setting User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-6
Authentication Security ............................................................................................................................ 9-6
Adding a User (Local User List) ............................................................................................................... 9-7
Change the user properties .................................................................................................................... 9-11
Managing User Printing ......................................................................................................................... 9-13
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning .................................................................................. 9-14
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning ...................................................................................... 9-15
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC ..................................................................................... 9-16
Local Authorization Settings .................................................................................................................. 9-17
Group Authorization Settings ................................................................................................................. 9-17
Guest Authorization Set ......................................................................................................................... 9-20
Obtain NW User Property ...................................................................................................................... 9-22
Simple Login Settings ............................................................................................................................ 9-23
ID Card Settings .................................................................................................................................... 9-26
PIN Code Authorization ......................................................................................................................... 9-26
Using User Login Administration ...................................................................................................................... 9-28
Login/Logout .......................................................................................................................................... 9-28
User Login/Job Accounting .............................................................................................................................. 9-29
Enabling Job Accounting ................................................................................................................................. 9-30
Job Accounting Access .......................................................................................................................... 9-30
Setting an account. [Local] ............................................................................................................................... 9-31
Adding an Account [Accounting List] ..................................................................................................... 9-31
Restricting the Use of the Machine ........................................................................................................ 9-32
Setting Processing When the Limit is Exceeded ................................................................................... 9-33
Editing an Account ................................................................................................................................. 9-33
Deleting an Account ............................................................................................................................... 9-34
Managing the Account Printing Status ................................................................................................... 9-34
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN ................................................................................................. 9-35
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA ...................................................................................................... 9-36
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer ................................................................... 9-37
Using JOB Accounting ..................................................................................................................................... 9-39
Configuring the Job Accounting Default Settings .................................................................................. 9-39
Counting by Paper Size ......................................................................................................................... 9-40
Counting the Number of Pages Printed ................................................................................................. 9-41
Print Accounting Report ......................................................................................................................... 9-43
Setting the Counting Method for the Copier/Printer ............................................................................... 9-44
Login/Logout (Job Accounting) .............................................................................................................. 9-44
Setting Unknown Number Processing Method ................................................................................................ 9-46
Setting Unknown ID Job Processing ..................................................................................................... 9-46
9-3
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Overview of User Login Administration
Overview of User Login Administration
User login administration specifies how the user access is administered on this machine. Enter a correct login user
name and password for user authentication to login.
Access are in three levels - "User", "Administrator", and "Machine Administrator". The security levels can be modified
only by the "Machine Administrator".
1 Enable User Login Administration (9-5).
2 Set the user (9-6).
3 Enter the login user name and password and
execute the job (3-14).
UserA
9-4
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Managing the Job Account from PC
Managing the Job Account from PC
In addition to the above settings, the following are necessary to manage the job account from PC.
To Manage the Users to Print from PCs
Printer driver settings are necessary to manage the users that print on the machine from PCs.
To Manage the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
TWAIN driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use TWAIN for scanning.
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning (9-14)
To Manage the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
WIA driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that use WIA for scanning.
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning (9-15)
To Manage the Users to Send Faxes from a PC
FAX driver settings on the PC are necessary to manage the users that send faxes from a PC.
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC (9-16)
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
1 Set the User Login Administration on the
printer driver (9-13).
2 Print the document.
User A
User B
User C
9-5
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling User Login Administration
Enabling User Login Administration
Enable User accounting. Select the following authentication methods:
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Setting] > [User Login]
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Local Authentication] or [Network Authentication].
Select [Off] to disable user login administration.
If you select [Network Authentication], Select [NTLM], [Kerberos] or [Ext.] as the server type. Also, enter the host name (64
characters or less) and domain name (256 characters or less) for the Authentication Server.
When selecting [Ext.] as the server type, enter the port number.
2"Do you want to add a new function to the home screen?" screen appears. To display a new function on the
Home screen, select [Yes] and specify the position in which you want to display the icon of registered function.
Editing the Home Screen (3-8)
Item Description
Local Authentication User authentication based on user properties on the local user list stored in the machine.
Network Authentication User authentication based on Authentication Server. Use a user property stored in
Authentication Server to access the network authentication login page.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
Selecting [Domain Name] displays the domain registration list. Enter the domain name.
Up to 10 domain names can be registered.
NOTE
If the login user name and password are rejected, check the following settings.
• Network Authentication setting of the machine
• User property of the Authentication Server
• Date and time setting of the machine and the Authentication Server
If you cannot login because of the setting of the machine, login with any administrator registered in the local
user list and correct the settings.
9-6
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Setting User Login Administration
This registers, alters and deletes users and configures the settings for User Login Administration.
Authentication Security
If user authentication is enabled, configure the user authentication settings.
User Account Lockout Setting
You can prohibit the use of a user account if an incorrect password is entered repeatedly to login with that account.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [User Account Lockout Settings]
2Configure the settings.
The following settings can be set.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Item Description
Lockout Select whether or not account lockout policy is enabled.
Value: Off, On
Lockout Policy Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account lockout is applied.
Value:
Number of Retries until Locked: Specify the conditions and the extent to which the account
lockout is applied. (1 to 10 times)
Lockout Duration: Specify how long the account is to be locked out until it is unlocked. (1 to 60
minutes)
Lockout Target: Specify the extent to which the account lockout is applied. You can select
from [All] or [Remote Login Only]. Remote Login Only locks out all operations from outside the
operation panel.
Locked out Users List Displays a list of locked out users. You can unlock a user by selecting the user in the list, and
selecting [Unlock].
NOTE
This function is displayed when account lockout policy is enabled.
9-7
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Adding a User (Local User List)
This adds a new user.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Local User List] > [ ]
NOTE
• You can add up to 100 users (including the default login user name).
• By default, one of each default user with machine administrator rights and administrator privileges is already
stored. Each user's properties are: Upper case and lower case letters are distinguished (case sensitive).
Machine Administrator
User Name: DeviceAdmin
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Access Level: Machine Administrator
Administrator
User Name: Admin
Login User Name: Admin
Login Password: Admin
Access Level: Administrator
It is recommended to periodically change the user name, login user name and login password regularly for your
security.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-8
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
2Enter the user information.
Select [Next >].
The table below explains the user information to be registered.
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User Name Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be
registered.
Access Level Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
9-9
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3Check the user information.
Change or add information as needed.
*1 Required items for user registration.
Item Descriptions
User Name*1 Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
Login User
Name*1 Enter the login user name to login (up to 64 characters). The same login user name cannot be
registered.
Login Password Enter the password to login (up to 64 characters). Reenter the same password for confirmation and
select the [OK] key.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs. The user, who registered his/her account name, can login
without entering the account ID.
User Login/Job Accounting (9-29)
NOTE
Select [Name] or [ID] from the "Sort" to sort the account list.
Select [Search(Name)] or [Search(ID)] to search by account name or account ID.
E-mail Address The user can register his/her E-mail address. The registered address will be automatically selected
for subsequent operations that need any E-mail function.
Access Level*1 Select "Administrator" or "User" for user access privileges.
ID Card
Information Register ID card information.
Place the ID card on the ID card reader, and select [Read].
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) <Card Authentication Kit> (12-3)
9-10
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
*1 Displayed when Local Authorization is enabled.
Local Authorization Settings (9-17)
*2 Displayed only on products with the fax function installed.
Item Description
My Panel You can register the language selection, initial screen, and shortcut settings for each user.
Settings registered here can be applied simply by logging in.
Local Authorization*1 Set usage authority for each user.
The following restriction items are available:
Printer:
Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Printer (Full Color):
Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for the printer.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Copy:
Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Copy (Full Color):
Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color copy functions.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Res tric t io n:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send:
Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission*2:
Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Stori ng in Box:
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing Restr. in Memory:
Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
If you selected [Send] in the Default Screen for "My Panel", select the screen to display from [Destination],
[Address Book], or [Ext Address Book].
9-11
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
4Select [Save].
A new user is added on the local user list.
Change the user properties
User properties can be changed. Types of user properties that could be changed may be different depending on user
access privilege.
For a user with Administrator rights who logs in
User properties can be changed and users can be deleted. The items, which can be added, are all able to be changed.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Local User List]
2Change the user properties.
Changing us e r prop ert ies
NOTE
If simple login is enabled, a confirmation screen appears when new registration is finished asking if you will
configure simple login settings. To configure simple login settings, select [Yes]. If you select [No], you will return
to the user list screen.
For the procedure for configuring simple login settings, refer to the following:
Simple Login Settings (9-23)
NOTE
To change the user information of the machine administrator, you must log in with machine administrator
authority. You can only view user information if you log in as a regular user.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-12
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1Select [ ] for the user whose information you want to modify.
2Refer to step 3 of "Adding a User (Local User List)" to change a user property.
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
3[Save] > [Yes]
The user information is changed.
Deleting a user
1Select the user to delete.
2Select [ ] > [Yes].
The selected user will be deleted.
To change the user information of logged in user (User Property)
These users can partially change their own user properties. The items can be changed are, “User Name”, “Login
Password”, “E-mail Address”, “Simple Login”, and “My Panel”.
Although "Login User Name", "Access Level", or "Account Name" cannot be changed, the users can check the present
status.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Property]
2Change the user properties.
Change or add information as needed.
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
NOTE
• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (Login User Name)].
• Select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search (Login User Name)] to search by account name or account ID.
NOTE
The default user with machine Administrator rights cannot be deleted.
Item Description
User Name Changes the name shown on the user list. Up to 32 characters can be entered.
Login User Name Displays the login user name that is entered at login.
Login Password Changes the password that is entered at login. Up to 64 characters can be entered.
Account Name Displays the department to which the user belongs.
10:10System Menu/Counter.
Admin
Menu
1/1
End
Admin
DeviceAdmin 5000
User A User A
User Login S... - Local User List
9-13
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3Select [Save].
The user information is changed.
Managing User Printing
To manage the users that print on this machine from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the printer driver.
Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1From the desktop, click [Settings] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
E-mail Address Changes the user's e-mail address. Up to 128 characters can be entered.
NOTE
If the user logs in with user authority and [New Destination Entry] is set to [Prohibit], only the e-
mail address can be checked.
Access Level Displays the user's access level.
Authorization Ru les Displays the usage restriction that is set for the logged in user.
NOTE
This function appears when Local Authorization is set to [On], Group Authorization is set to
[On], or Guest Authorization Setting is set to [On].
[Authorization Rules] shows the account name set for the logged in user and the usage
restrictions that are set for that account.
This function appears when job accounting is set to [On]. For information on job accounting,
refer to the following:
Enabling Job Accounting (9-30)
Simple Login When simple login is enabled, changes associated settings.
NOTE
This function does not appear when Simple Login is set to [Off] or the user is not registered in
Simple Login.
ID Card Information Displays the ID card information of the logged in user.
NOTE
This function is displayed when the optional ID Card Authentication Kit is activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) <Card Authentication Kit> (12-3)
This function does not appear when the server type is set to [Ext.] in Network Authentication,
and logged in with the user account certificated in the server specified as the [Ext.] server type.
My Panel Register the language and default screen for each user. Once registered, the setting will be
applied simply by login.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click the [Start] button in Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
Item Description
9-14
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
2Configure the settings.
1Select [User Login] on the [User Login] tab.
2Set the User Login Administration.
[Use specific name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same User login for every
print job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and password for each print job.
[Prompt for name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a printing. The
user name and password must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Prompt for name and validate]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a
printing. The user name and password stored in the Login user name list needs to be entered. The user name and
password must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Validate user name (computer) or prompt for login user name]: When printing, the Windows user name is searched in the
"Login user names" and printing is possible if the name is registered. If the name is not registered, the printing will be
canceled for users with only user authority. If the user has administrator privileges, the screen to enter the user name and
password will appear.
3Click [OK].
Managing the Users to Use TWAIN for Scanning
To manage the users that scan using TWAIN, the following settings are necessary in the TWAIN driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in
the search list. TWAIN Driver screen appears.
2Select the machine, click [Edit].
NOTE
For other settings of user accounting, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
NOTE
Select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].
1
2
9-15
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
2Configure the settings.
1Click [User Authentication Settings].
2Select the checkbox beside [Authentication], and enter Login User Name and Password.
3Click [OK].
Managing the Users to Use WIA for Scanning
To manage the users that scan using WIA, the following settings are necessary in the WIA driver. Instructions are based
on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box. Click [View scanners and
cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and File Search]. Click [View
scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
1
2
9-16
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
2Configure the settings.
1Select the checkbox beside [Authentication] on the [Settings] tab, and enter Login User Name and Password.
2Click [OK].
Managing the Users to Send Faxes from a PC
To manage the users that send faxes from a PC, the following settings are necessary in the FAX driver. Instructions are
based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1From the desktop, click [Settings] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select [Printing preferences] from the
resulting pull-down menu.
3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [User Login] on the [Authentication] tab.
2Set the User Login Administration.
[Use Specific Login User Name]: This option can be used to specify a user name and password to use the same User login
for every FAX job. If this option is selected, the user does not have to type the name and password for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Login User Name]: A screen for entering the user name and password will be displayed when attempting a
transmission. The user name and password must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click the [Start] button in Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
1
2
9-17
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3Click [OK].
Local Authorization Settings
Select whether or not to use Local Authorization.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Local User Authorization]
2Configure the settings.
Select [Off] or [On].
Group Authorization Settings
Set restrictions of the machine usage by each individual group registered in the authentication server.
Group Authorization
Use the group authorization.
NOTE
When using Local Authorization, the user authentication type must be set to [Local Authentication].
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
To use the group authorization settings, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the authentication
method in "User Login Settings". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
LDAP (8-45)
9-18
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Group Authorization Set.] > [Group Authorization]
2Configure the settings.
Select [Off] or [On].
Adding a Group List
Register the groups that are restricted the machine usage. Other users and groups belong to "Others".
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Group Authorization Set.] > [Group List] > [ ]
2Configure the settings.
1Enter the group ID (number between 1 and 4294967295) > [Next >]
2Enter the group name (up to 32 characters) > [Next >]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
䜾䝹䞊䝥ㄆྍタᐃ 㻙 䜾䝹䞊䝥䝸䝇䝖
㻝㻜㻦㻝㻜䝅䝇䝔䝮䝯䝙䝳䞊㻛䜹䜴䞁䝍䞊⏬㠃䛷䛩䚹
䛭䛾
䝯䝙䝳䞊
㻝㻛㻝
⤊
Group
Authorization Set. - Group List
10:10
System
Menu/Counter.
Others
Menu
1/1
End
9-19
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3Change or add information as needed.
*1 For "Group ID", specify PrimaryGroupID assigned by Active Directory of Windows. If you are using Windows Server 2008,
check Attribute Editor tab of user properties.
*2 Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
3Select Access Level > [Next >]
4Checks the content. Change or add information as needed.
5Registering
Select [Save].
A new group is added on the group list.
Item Description
Group ID*1 Enter the ID displayed on the group list (between 1 and 4294967295).
Group Name Enter the name displayed on the group list (up to 32 characters).
Access Level Select [Administrator] or [User] for group access privileges.
Printer Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Printer (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of full-color print functions for the printer.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Copy Select whether or not to reject usage of copy functions.
Copy (Full Color) Select whether or not to reject usage of only full-color print functions for copies.
Duplex Restriction Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restriction Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Select whether or not to reject usage of the send functions.
FAX Transmission*2 Select whether or not to reject usage of the FAX transmissions.
Storing in Box Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the document boxes.
Storing Restr. in Memory Select whether or not to reject usage of storing in the removable memory.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
9-20
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
Guest Authorization Set
When User Login Administration is enabled, set the functions that guest users who cannot log in to the machine are
allowed to use.
Enabling Guest Authorization
Enable the guest authorization.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Guest Authorization Set.] > [Guest Authorization]
2Configure the settings.
Select [Off] or [On].
Configuring Guest Property
Register guest user information and functions that are restricted.
NOTE
To use Guest Authorization Set., User Login Administration must be enabled in "User Login Settings".
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
If the guest authorization setting is enabled, the [Authentication / Logout] key must be selected when logging in.
In the guest user default settings, only monochrome copying can be used. If you wish to use a different function,
log in as a user who can use that function, or change the settings in the guest properties.
9-21
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Guest Authorization Set.] > [Guest Property]
2Configure the settings.
Change or add information as needed.
*1 Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Item Descriptions
User Name Enter the name displayed on the user list (up to 32 characters).
The default setting is "Guest User".
Access Level The authority of the user appears. This cannot be changed.
Account Name Add an account where the user belongs.
If the user does not belong to any account, select [Other Account].
Authorization Ru les Set usage authority for each user.The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.
Print Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the print function of the printer is prohibited.
Print Restriction (Color):
Select whether or not use of the print function (color) of the printer is prohibited.
Copy Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the copy print function is prohibited.
Copy Restriction (Full Color):
Select whether or not use of the copy print function (full color) is prohibited.
Duplex Restriction:
Select whether only duplex printing is allowed.
Combine Restrict.:
Specify whether only Combine is allowed.
EcoPrint Restriction:
Specify whether only EcoPrint is allowed.
Send Restriction:
Select whether or not use of the send function is prohibited.
FAX TX Restriction*1:
Select whether or not use of the fax send function is prohibited.
Storing Restr. in Box:
Select whether or not use of the box store function is prohibited.
Storin g Re s tr. in Memory:
Select whether or not use of the removable memory store function is prohibited.
9-22
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3Registering
Select [Save].
Obtain NW User Property
Set the required information to obtain the network user property from the LDAP server. The user name and E-mail
address obtained with this setting is shown in the user information, the status confirmation screen, and the header of E-
mail.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Obtain NW User Property] > [On]
2Configure the settings.
Add information on each item > [OK]
*1 If using Active Directory of Windows, the server name may be the same as the server name entered in the network au-
NOTE
To obtain the network user property from the LDAP server, [Network Authentication] must be selected for the
authentication method in "User Login Settings". Select "On" for "LDAP" in "Protocol Settings".
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
LDAP (8-45)
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Item Description
Server Name*1 Enter the LDAP server name or the IP address (up to 64 characters). If a server name is not
entered, user information will be acquired from the server set for Network Authentication.
Port Port number for LDAP server. The default port number is 389.
Name 1*2 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the user name to be displayed from the LDAP server (up to
32 characters).
Name 2*3
E-mail Address*4 Enter the LDAP Attribute to obtain the E-mail address from the LDAP server (up to 128
characters).
Authentication Type*5 Set the authentication method. Select [Simple] or [SASL]. After changing the setting, restart
the system or turn the power off and then on.
Search Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds (from 5 to 255 seconds).
LDAP Security (User
Property) Select the type of encryption according to the type of security employed by the LDAP server.
The value is [Off], [SSL/TLS] or [STARTTLS].
9-23
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
thentication.
*2 If using Active Directory of Windows, displayName of Attribute may be used as "Name 1".
*3 Name 2 can be left out. When you assign displayName in "Name 1" and department in "Name 2", and if the value of dis-
playName is "Mike Smith" and the value of department is "Sales" in Active Directory of Windows, the user name appears
as "Mike Smith Sales".
*4 If using Active Directory of Windows, mail of Attribute may be used as E-mail Address.
*5 Appears when the server type is set to "Kerberos" in "Network Authentication".
Simple Login Settings
The simple login function allows users to log in simply by selecting a user name. Users must be registered in advance to
use this functionality.
Enabling Simple Login
Select whether or not simple login is enabled.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Simple Login Settings] > [Simple Login]
2Configure the settings.
Select [Off] or [On].
Simple Login Key
Register users to use simple login. You can add up to 20 users.
NOTE
• For user registration, refer to the following:
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
• To use Simple Login, User Login Administration must be enabled in "User Login Settings".
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
• When the guest authorization setting is enabled, the Simple Login screen is not displayed.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-24
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [Simple Login Settings] > [Simple Login Setup]
2Enter the user information.
1Select the key to which you want to register a user.
2Select [ ] for the user whose information you want to modify.
\
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
10:10
Menu
System Menu/Counter.
01
04
07
02
05
08
03
06
09
1/3
Simple login settings - Simple Login Setup
End
None None None
None None None
None None None
9-25
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
3To specify the user from local users, select [Local User]. To specify from network users, select [Network User].
The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.
Specifying the user from local us ers
Select the user to be set for simple login.
Specifying the user from network users
Select [Keyboard] of [Login User Name] and [Login Password], enter the information of the user to be registered, and
select [OK].
If you are specifying a user for whom a domain is set in network authentication, select the "Domain Name" and select the
domain where the user is registered.
Select [Next >].
4Enter the user name to be displayed, select [Next >].
5[Password Login] > [On] or [Off] > "Icon"
6Select the user icon to be displayed.
3Registering
Select [Save].
NOTE
• To sort the user list, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (Login User Name)].
• Select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search (Login User Name)] to search by account name or account ID.
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
Add - Network User
10:10
Keyboard
Login Password
Keyboard
Login User Name
< Back Next >Cancel
System Menu/Counter.
9-26
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
ID Card Settings
If ID card authentication is enabled, select the authentication type.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [ID Card Settings]
2Configure the settings.
The following settings can be set.
*1 This function does not appear when the server type is set to [NTLM] or [Kerberos] in "Network Authentication".
PIN Code Authorization
Select whether or not to use PIN Code Authorization.
NOTE
• This functions appears when the Card Authentication kit is activated.
Card Authentication Kit(B) <Card Authentication Kit> (12-3)
• This function does not appear when the user logs in as a network authentication user.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Item Description
Keyboard Login When ID card authentication is enabled, select whether or not login by keyboard is allowed.
Value: Permit, Prohibit
Additional
Authentication*1 Select whether or not to require password entry after authenticating by ID card.
Value: Off, Use Password, Use PIN Code
NOTE
To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for server type.
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
9-27
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting User Login Administration
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[User Login Settings] > [PIN Login]
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Off] or [On].
2Select [OK].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-28
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using User Login Administration
Using User Login Administration
This section explains procedures while setting job accounting.
Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, the login user name and login password entry screen appears each time you use
this machine.
Login
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Login (3-14)
Logout
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication / Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
9-29
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > User Login/Job Accounting
User Login/Job Accounting
Job accounting manages the copy/print/scan/FAX count accumulated by individual accounts by assigning an ID to each
account.
To Manage the Number of Sheets Used on Jobs Printed from a PC
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need to configure settings by using the
printer driver on the PC.
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using TWAIN
To manage the scan job account by using TWAIN, you need to configure the TWAIN driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN (9-35)
Managing the Scan Job Account by Using WIA
To manage the scan job account by using WIA, you need to configure the WIA driver settings on the computer
connected to the machine.
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA (9-36)
Managing the FAX Job Transmitted from a PC
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the PC, you need to configure the settings by using the FAX Driver
on the PC.
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer (9-37)
The optional FAX Kit is required in order to make use of fax functionality.
1 Enable job accounting. (9-30)
2 Configure account settings. (9-31)
3 Enter the assigned account ID when
executing the job. (9-44)
4 This counts the number of sheets used.
1 Set Job Accounting for the PC on the
network by using the printer driver. (9-
34)
2 Print the document.
3 Count the number of pages printed.
100 400 200
A: 00000001
A: 00000001
B: 00000002
C: 00000003
100 400 200
9-30
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Enabling Job Accounting
Enabling Job Accounting
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Settings]
2Select [On].
Job Accounting Access
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Job Accounting Access]
2Configure the settings.
Select [Local] or [Network].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
• To disable job accounting, select [Off].
• When the display returns to System Menu default screen, logout is automatically executed and the screen to
enter the Account ID appears. To continue the operation, enter the Account ID.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
To select [Network], network authentication must be enabled and [Ext.] must be selected for server type.
Enabling User Login Administration (9-5)
9-31
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
Setting an account. [Local]
You can add, change and delete an account and set the restriction for each account.
Adding an Account [Accounting List]
The number of accounts that can be registered: Up to 100 accounts
The following entries are required.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List] > [ ]
2Enter the account information.
1Enter the account name > [Next >]
2Enter the account ID > [Next >]
3Activate or deactivate restriction.
Restricting the Use of the Machine (9-32)
4Select [Save].
A new account is added on the Account List.
Item Description
Account Name Maximum number of characters that can be entered: Up to 32
Account ID Input range: 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
For details on entering characters, refer to the following:
Character Entry Method (12-13)
NOTE
Any "Account ID" that has already registered cannot be used. Enter any other account ID.
9-32
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
Restricting the Use of the Machine
This section explains how to restrict the use of the machine by account or the number of sheets available.
The items that can be restricted differ depending on whether "Individual" or "Total" is selected for "Copy/Printer Count".
Setting the Counting Method for the Copier/Printer (9-44)
Restriction Items
[Individual] selected for Copy/Printer Count
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Applying Restriction
Restriction can be applied in the following modes:
Item Description
Copy (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for copying.
Copy (Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color copying.
Printer (Total) Limits the number of sheets used for printing.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Printer (Full Color) Limits the number of sheets used for color printing.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Scan (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission Restricts the number of fax sheets that can be sent. Displayed only on products with
the fax function installed.
Item Description
Print (Total) Limits the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print Restr.(Full Color) Limits the number of pages used for full-color printing.
Scan (Others) Limits the number of sheets scanned (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission Restricts the number of fax sheets that can be sent. Displayed only on products with
the fax function installed.
Item Description
Off No restriction is applied.
Default Counter Limit Restricts the print counter in one-page increments up to 9,999,999 copies.
Reject Usage Restriction is applied.
9-33
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
Setting Processing When the Limit is Exceeded
This specifies how the machine behaves when the counter has reached the limit of restriction.
*1 The next job will be prohibited in sending or in storing in the box.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Default Setting] > [Apply Limit]
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Immediately], [Subsequently], or [Alert Only].
2Select [OK].
Editing an Account
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List]
Item Description
Immediately*1 Job stops when the counter reaches its limit.
Subsequently Printing/scanning of the job continues but the subsequent job will be rejected.
Alert Only Job continues while displaying an alert message.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-34
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
2Edit an account.
1Select [ ] for the user whose information you want to modify.
2Select the account information to be changed and change the account information.
3[Save] > [Yes]
The account information is changed.
Deleting an Account
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Accounting List]
2To delete
1Select the account name you wish to delete.
2Select [ ] > [Yes]
The account is deleted.
Managing the Account Printing Status
To manage the number of jobs to be printed from the PC on the network, you need configure the following settings by
using the printer driver on the PC. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
NOTE
• To perform a name or ID search, select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search(ID)].
• To sort the account name, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (ID)].
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Job
Accounti... - Accounting List
10:10
System
Menu/Counter.
AAA
EndMenu
1/1
00000001
9-35
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
1Display the screen.
1From the desktop, click [Settings] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
2Right-click the printer driver icon of the machine, and click the [Printer properties] menu of the printer driver.
3Click [Administrator] on the [Device Settings] tab.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Job accounting] on the [Job Accounting] tab.
2Set the Job Accounting.
[Use specific account ID]: Enter the Account ID. Printing will be performed using the entered Account ID. If this option is
selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each print job.
[Prompt for account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a printing. The Account ID
must be entered each time a printing is attempted.
[Prompt for account ID and validate]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a printing. The
Account ID stored in the Account ID list needs to be entered. The Account ID must be entered each time a printing is
attempted.
[Display account ID list]: The Account ID list is displayed when printing. The Account ID to be used needs to be selected
from the list.
[Validate account ID for each user (host)]: When printing, the Windows user name is searched in the "Account ID list" and
printing is possible if the name is registered. If the user is not registered, a screen for entering the account ID is displayed.
3Click [OK].
Job Accounting for Scan Using TWAIN
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using TWAIN, you need to configure the following settings by using the
TWAIN Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click the [Start] button in Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
NOTE
For other settings of job accounting, refer to the following:
Printer Driver User Guide
1
2
9-36
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "TWAIN Driver Setting" in the search box. Select [TWAIN Driver Setting] in
the search list.
2Select the machine, click [Edit].
2Configure the settings.
1Click [User Authentication Settings].
2Select the checkbox beside [Account], and enter the account ID.
3Click [OK].
Job Accounting for Scan Using WIA
To manage the number of jobs scanned by using WIA, you need to configure the following settings by using the WIA
Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1Click [Search] in charms, and enter "View scanners and cameras" in the search box.
NOTE
Select [Start] button on the Windows, [All Programs], [Kyocera] and then [TWAIN Driver Setting].
NOTE
In Windows 7, click [Start] button on the Windows and enter [Scanner] in [Program and File Search]. Click [View
scanners and cameras] in the search list then the Scanners and Cameras screen appears.
9-37
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
2Select the same name as this machine from WIA Drivers, and click [Properties].
2Configure the settings.
1Select the checkbox beside [Account ID] on the [Settings] tab, and enter the Account ID.
2Click [OK].
Job Accounting for the FAX Transmitted from a Computer
To manage the number of FAX jobs transmitted from the computer, you need to configure the following settings by using
the FAX Driver on the computer. Instructions are based on interface elements as they appear in Windows 8.1.
1Display the screen.
1From the desktop, click [Settings] in charms, [Control Panel], and then [Devices and Printers].
2Right click the name of the machine to be used as the FAX Driver and select [Printing preferences] from the
resulting pull-down menu.
3Click [FAX TX Setting] in the [Printing Preferences] window.
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Job Accounting] on the [Authentication] tab.
NOTE
In Windows 7, click the [Start] button in Windows, and then click [Devices and Printers].
1
2
12
1
2
9-38
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting an account. [Local]
2Set the Job Accounting.
[Use Specific Account ID]: This option can be used to specify an account ID to use the same Account ID for every FAX job.
If this option is selected, the user does not have to enter the Account ID for each FAX job.
[Prompt for Account ID]: A screen for entering the Account ID will be displayed when attempting a transmission. The
Account ID must be entered each time a transmission is attempted.
3Click [OK].
9-39
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
Using JOB Accounting
Configuring the Job Accounting Default Settings
Select the item in Default Setting.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Default Setting] > [Default Counter Limit]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-40
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
2Configure the settings.
1Select the item whose maximum sheets default setting you want to configure. > Use the [ ], [ ] or use the
numeric keypad to enter the default value of the limit.
*1 FAX functions are available only on products with the fax function installed.
2Select [OK].
3To set the default restriction on other number of sheets, repeat steps 1 and 2.
Counting by Paper Size
This counts the number of pages by paper size (e.g. Letter).
In addition to paper size, media type can also be specified (e.g. count the letter-size color paper used). If you do not
specify the media type, the number of used sheets will be counted for the specified sheet size, regardless of the media
type.
Item Description
Default Counter Limit When you add a new account, you can change the default restrictions on the number of
sheets used. You can set any number from 1 to 9,999,999.
The items that can be set differ depending on whether [Individual] or [Total] is selected for
[Copy/Printer Count].
Setting the Counting Method for the Copier/Printer (9-44)
[Individual] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Copy (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for copying.
Copy (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color copying.
Printer (Total) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for printing.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Printer (Full Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for color printing.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. Displayed
only on products with the fax function installed.
[Total] selected for Copy/Printer Count
Print (Total) Sets the default restriction on the total number of sheets used for copying and printing.
Print Restr.(Full
Color) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for full-color printing.
Scan (Others) Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for scanning (excludes copying).
FAX Transmission*1 Sets the default restriction on the number of sheets used for sending faxes. Displayed
only on products with the fax function installed.
NOTE
Paper size is available in four types, 1 to 5. These types are specified in accounting reports.
Print Accounting Report (9-43)
9-41
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Default Setting] > [Count by Paper Size] > [Paper Size 1(-5)]
2Configure the settings.
1Select [On].
2Select the paper size.
3Select [Media Type] to specify media type.
4Select the media type and select [OK].
5Select [OK].
Counting the Number of Pages Printed
This counts the number of pages printed. Counts are classified into Total Job Accounting and Each Job Accounting. A
new count can also be started after resetting the count data which was stored for a certain period of time.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Total Job Accounting] or [Each Job Accounting]
2Configure the settings.
The table below lists the item you can view.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-42
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
*1 FAX functions are available on products with the fax function installed.
Item Description
Printed Pages
Count by Paper Size
Displays the number of pages copied and printed, and the total number of pages
used. You can also use [FAX], [Count by Paper Size], [by Duplex] and [by
Combine] to check the number of pages used.
Copy(B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white copying.
Copy (Full Color) Displays the number of pages used for full-color copying.
Copy (Total) Displays the number of pages copied.
Printer (B & W) Displays the number of pages used for black and white printing.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Printer (Full Color) Displays the number of pages used for color printing.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Printer (Total) Displays the number of pages printed.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from Document Box
• Printing from removable memory
• Printing from PC
Copy/Printer (B/W) Displays the total number of pages used for black-and-white copying and printing.
Copy/Print. (Full Color) Displays the total number of pages used for full-color copying and printing.
Copy/Print.(Total) Displays the total number of pages used for copying and printing.
FAX*1 Displays the number of pages received.
Total Displays the total number of pages used.
by Duplex Displays the number of pages used in Duplex (1-sided) mode, Duplex (2-sided)
mode and the total for both.
by Combine Displays the pages used in Combine (None) mode, Combine (2in1) mode,
Combine (4in1) mode and the total for all three.
Count by Paper Size Displays the number of pages used in the selected paper size as well as the
number of pages used in other paper sizes.
Scanned Pages Displays the number of pages scanned for copying, faxing and other functions, as
well as the total number of pages scanned.
FAX TX Pages*1 Displays the number of pages faxed.
FAX TX Time*1 Displays the total duration of FAX transmissions.
Counter Reset Resets the counter.
Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
9-43
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages PrintedTot al Accounting
Counting the Number of Pages PrintedTotal Accounting
1Check the number of pages.
1Select [Check] at the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
2Confirm the count and select [Close].
Counting the Number of Pages Used for Each Account
This counts the number of pages for each account and resets the counts by account.
1Display the screen.
1Select the account to check the count.
2Select [ ] for the user whose information you want to modify.
3Select the function to check the count.
The results will be displayed.
4Confirm the count and select [End].
Print Accounting Report
The total pages counted of all relevant accounts can be printed as an accounting report.
Reports have different formats depending on how the count of copiers and printers is administered.
When "Individual" is selected for Managing the Copy/Printer Count.
1Prepare paper.
Check that A4 or Letter paper is loaded in the cassette.
NOTE
• To perform the Account ID select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search(ID)]. Select [Select Others] to search
by account name or account ID.
• To sort the account name, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (ID)].
ACCOUNT. REPORT
9-44
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
2Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting] > [Job Accounting Settings]
3Print the document.
[Print Accounting Report] > [Yes]
Accounting report is printed.
Setting the Counting Method for the Copier/Printer
You can select the management method for the number of pages used for the copier and printer, either combined or
individually. Depending on this selection, restrictions and collection method of the number of pages changes. Choose
the setting according to the usage environment of the machine.
If the login user name entry screen appears during operations, log in by referring to the following:
Restricting the Use of the Machine (9-32)
Counting the Number of Pages Printed (9-41)
Print Accounting Report (9-43)
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2[Job Accounting Settings] > [Default Setting] > [Copy/Printer Count]
2Configure the settings.
1Select [Total] or [Individual].
2Select [OK].
Login/Logout (Job Accounting)
If job accounting is enabled, an account ID entry screen appears each time you use this machine.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
9-45
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Using JOB Accounting
Login (Job Accounting)
When a screen for entering account ID appears as a result of operating the machine, perform the following operation.
1Enter the account ID using the numeric keys and select [Login].
When the screen to enter the login user name and password appears
If user login administration is enabled, the screen to enter the login user name and password appears. Enter a
login user name and password to login. If the user has already registered the account information, the account ID
entry would be skipped.
Adding a User (Local User List) (9-7)
2Proceed to complete the rest of the steps.
Logout (Job Accounting)
When the operations are complete, select the [Authentication / Logout] key to return to the account ID entry screen.
Return to the account ID entry screen.
NOTE
• If you entered a wrong character, select the [Clear] key and enter the account ID again.
• By selecting [Check Counter], you can refer to the number of pages printed and the number of pages
scanned.
9-46
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting Unknown Number Processing Method
Setting Unknown Number Processing Method
Setting Unknown ID Job Processing
This specifies the behavior for handling the jobs sent with unknown or unsent login user names or User ID. If user login
administration is disabled and job accounting is enabled, the processing method used for an unknown ID job is used.
The table below lists the items to be set.
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2Select [Unknown ID Job].
2Configure the settings.
Select [Reject] or [Permit].
Registering User Property for an Unknown ID User
When registering user property for an unknown ID user, you can check the user on the Job Status screen or Job Log
screen. Also, you can restrict the available functions.
Item Description
Permit Processes the job.
Reject Does not process the job.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
This function is displayed when [Unknown ID Job] is set to [Permit].
9-47
User Authentication and Accounting (User Login, Job Accounting) > Setting Unknown Number Processing Method
1Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [User Login/Job Accounting]
2Select [Unknown User Settings] > [User Property].
2Enter the user information.
Add information on each item > [OK]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges. The factory default login user name and login password
are set as shown below.
Login User Name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Item Description
User Name Enter the user name, up to 32 characters.
Account Name Register an account for the unknown ID user.
User Login/Job Accounting (9-29)
NOTE
• To perform the Account ID select [Menu] > [Search (Name)] or [Search(ID)].
• To sort the account name, select [Menu] > [Sort (Name)] or [Sort (ID)].
• This is displayed when job accounting administration is enabled.
Authorization Ru les Set usage restrictions.
The following restriction items are available:
Printer:
Select whether or not to reject usage of print functions for the printer.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from PC
Printer (Full Color):
Select whether or not use of the print function (full-color) of the printer is prohibited.
The relevant print functions are as follows.
• Printing from PC
10-1
Maintenance >
10 Maintenance
This chapter explains the following topics:
Regular Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning Glass Platen ........................................................................................................................... 10-2
Cleaning Slit Glass ................................................................................................................................ 10-2
Toner Container Replacement ............................................................................................................... 10-4
Waste Toner Box Replacement ............................................................................................................. 10-7
Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................... 10-9
Staple Cartridge Replacement (Document Finisher) ........................................................................... 10-10
10-2
Maintenance > Regular Maintenance
Regular Maintenance
Clean the machine regularly to ensure optimum printing quality.
Cleaning Glass Platen
Wipe the glass platen, the original holder, and the inside of the original feeder with a soft cloth moistened with alcohol or
a mild detergent.
Cleaning Slit Glass
When using the original feeder, clean the slit glass surface and the reading guide with the provided cleaning cloth.
1Take out the cleaning cloth.
CAUTION
For safety, always unplug the power cord before cleaning the machine.
IMPORTANT
Do not use thinner or other organic solvents.
NOTE
Dirt on the slit glass or the reading guide may cause black streaks to appear in the output.
10-3
Maintenance > Regular Maintenance
2Clean the slit glass and the reading guide.
10-4
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
Messages will appear when toner runs out or when a cassette runs out of paper. Replace or replenish as required in
accordance with the message.
Toner Container Replacement
The message shown below will appear when toner runs out. If this happens, replace the toner container.
"Toner is empty."
The message shown below will appear when toner runs low. Make sure you have a new toner container available for
replacement.
"Toner is low. (Replace when empty.)"
1Open the front cover.
2Remove the toner container.
NOTE
• For the toner container, always use a genuine toner container. Using a toner container that is not genuine may
cause image defects and product failure.
• The memory chip in the toner container of this product stores information necessary for improving customer
convenience, operation of the recycling system for used toner containers, and planning and development of
new products. The stored information does not include information that makes it possible to identify
individuals, and is only used anonymously for the above purposes.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
YCMK
10-5
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
3Put used toner containers into the plastic waste bag.
4Remove the new toner container from the box.
5Tap the toner container.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the points shown below.
10-6
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
6Shake the toner container.
7Install the toner container.
8Close the front cover.
IMPORTANT
Insert the toner container as far as it will go.
NOTE
• If the front cover does not close, check that the new toner container is installed correctly.
• Return the used toner container to your dealer or service representative. The collected toner container will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-7
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
Waste Toner Box Replacement
The message shown below will appear when the waste toner box is full. Replace the waste toner box.
"Check the waste toner box."
1Open the front cover.
2Remove the Waste Toner Box.
3Put used toner containers into the plastic waste bag.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to incinerate parts which contain toner. Dangerous sparks may cause burns.
10-8
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
4Remove the new Waste Toner Box.
5Install the Waste Toner Box.
6Close the front cover.
NOTE
Return the used waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The collected waste toner box will be
recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant regulations.
10-9
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
Loading Paper
The message shown below will appear when a cassette runs out of paper. Load paper.
Add paper in cassette #. (# stands for the cassette number.)
Add paper in Multi Purpose tray.
Loading in the Cassettes 1 (to 3) (3-19)
Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray (5-7)
NOTE
When [On] is selected for the [Show Paper Setup Message], the paper setting confirmation screen will appear.
If you changed to a different paper type, select [Change] and then configure the paper settings as required.
[Cassette 1 (to 3)] (8-9)
[Multi Purpose Tray] (8-10)
10-10
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
Staple Cartridge Replacement (Document Finisher)
The message shown below will appear when staples run out. When this happens, replace the staple cartridge.
"Staple is empty."
1Open the Staple Cover of the Document Finisher.
2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
3Replace the staples.
NOTE
If staples run out, contact your dealer or service representative.
10-11
Maintenance > Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
5Close the staple cover.
11-1
Troubleshooting >
11 Troubleshooting
This chapter explains the following topics:
General Troubles .............................................................................................................................................. 11-2
Solving Malfunctions ............................................................................................................................... 11-2
Machine Operation Trouble .................................................................................................................... 11-3
Printed Image Trouble ............................................................................................................................ 11-6
Color printing trouble .............................................................................................................................. 11-9
Responding to Messages ............................................................................................................................... 11-10
Responding to Send Error .................................................................................................................... 11-22
Adjustment/Maintenance ................................................................................................................................ 11-25
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance .................................................................................................. 11-25
Color Registration Procedure ............................................................................................................... 11-25
Calibration ............................................................................................................................................. 11-30
Perform the laser scanner cleaning. ..................................................................................................... 11-30
Tone Curve Adjustment ........................................................................................................................ 11-30
Drum Refresh ....................................................................................................................................... 11-32
Clearing Paper Jams ...................................................................................................................................... 11-33
Jam Location Indicators ........................................................................................................................ 11-33
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray .......................................................................... 11-34
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1 ....................................................................................... 11-35
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1, 2 and 3 .............................................................................. 11-36
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2, 3 ................................................................................... 11-37
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Finisher ......................................................................... 11-39
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit ..................................................................................... 11-40
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor ..................................................................... 11-41
Clearing a Staple Jam ..................................................................................................................................... 11-43
Clearing a staple jam of the Document Finisher ................................................................................... 11-43
11-2
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
General Troubles
Solving Malfunctions
The table below provides general guidelines for problem solving. If a problem occurs with your machine, look into the
checkpoints and perform procedures indicated on the following pages.
If the problem persists, contact your Service Representative.
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary.
To check the serial number, refer to the following.
Display for Device Information (3-11)
11-3
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
Machine Operation Trouble
Mechanical operation trouble includes the following phenomena. Implement appropriate procedures.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
An application does
not start.
Is the Auto Panel Reset time short? Set the Auto Panel Reset time to 30
seconds or more.
8-60
The screen does not
respond when the
power switch is
turned on.
Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord
securely.
2-9
Pressing the [Start]
key does not produce
copies.
Is there a message on the screen? Determine the appropriate response
to the message and respond
accordingly.
11-10
Is the machine in Sleep mode? Select any key on the operation
panel to recover the machine from
Sleep mode.
2-23
Blank sheets are
ejected.
Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen,
place them face-down and align them
with the original size indicator plates.
5-3
When placing originals in the
document processor, place them
face-up.
5-4
―Check that the settings of the
application software.
―
Paper often jams. Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. 3-19
―Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
3-19
Is the paper of the supported type? Is
it in good condition?
Remove the paper, turn it over, and
reload it.
3-19
Is the paper curled, folded or
wrinkled?
Replace the paper with new paper. 3-17
Are there any loose scraps or
jammed paper in the machine?
Remove any jammed paper. 11-33
2 or more sheets are
overlaps when
ejected. (multi feed)
―Load the paper correctly. 3-18
Printouts are
wrinkled.
Is the paper loaded correctly? Load the paper correctly. 3-17
―Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
3-17
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-19
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-5
11-4
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
Printouts are curled. ―Turn the orientation 180 degrees
around in which the paper is
positioned.
3-19
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-17
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-5
This completes the
printer driver
installation.
Is the driver installed with the host
name while Wi-Fi or Wi-Fi Direct
function is available?
Specify the IP address instead of the
host name.
2-28
Cannot print. Check the power cord. Connect both ends of the power cord
securely.
2-9
Is the machine powered on? Turn on the power switch. 2-10
Are the USB cable and network cable
connected?
Connect the correct USB cable and
network cable securely.
2-9
2-9
Is the print job paused? Resume printing. 7-9
When the wired or Wi-Fi network is
configured using the name
resolution, does the IP address
(private address) of the other
network which can not access
coexists?
The number of host name and
domain name which can be used
with the machine is one respectively.
Configure the network under this
restriction. Configure the network
under this restriction.
―
Change the settings of name
resolution such as NetBEUI and
DNS, or network environment
settings.
Command
Center RX
User Guide
Select Wi-Fi, Wired Network or
Optional Network as an unlimited use
network on Primary Network (Client).
8-54
Set to [Wired Network] or [Wi-Fi]
either one of [Enable], and set the
other setting to [Disable].
8-44
Cannot print with
USB memory.
USB memory not
recognized.
Is the USB host blocked [Block]? Select [Unblock] in the USB host
settings.
8-54
―Check that the USB memory is
securely plugged into the machine.
―
While “On" is set to
[Auto-IP], the IP
address is not
assigned
automatically.
Is a value other than "0.0.0.0"
entered for the IP address of TCP/
IP(v4)?
Enter "0.0.0.0" for the IP address of
TCP/IP(v4).
2-13
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
11-5
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
*1 You can also enter a full computer name as the host name (Example: pc001.abcdnet.com)
*2 You can also enter login user names in the following formats:
Domain Name\User Name (for example, james.smith@\abcdnet)
User_name@domain_name (for example, james.smith@abcdnet)
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Cannot send via
SMB.
Is the network cable connected? Connect the correct network cable
securely.
2-9
Have the network settings for the
equipment been configured properly?
Configure the TCP/IP settings
properly.
8-41
Have the folder sharing settings been
configured properly?
Check sharing settings and access
privileges under the folder properties.
3-24
Is the “SMB Client (Transmission)”
[Local]?
Select [On] in the SMB Client
(Transmission).
8-44
Has [Port] been entered properly? *1 Check the name of the computer to
which data is being sent.
5-16
Has [FTP] been entered properly? Check the share name for the shared
folder.
5-16
Has [Search Folder by Host Name]
been entered properly?* 1*2
Check the domain name and login
user name.
5-16
Has the same domain name been
used for [Port] and [Search Folder by
Host Name]?
Delete the domain name and
backslash (\) from [Search Folder by
Host Name].
5-16
Has [Connection Test] been entered
properly?
Check the login password. 5-16
Have exceptions for Windows
Firewall been configured properly?
Configure exceptions for Windows
Firewall properly.
3-28
Do the time settings for the
equipment, domain server, and data
destination computer differ?
Set the equipment, domain server,
and data destination computer to the
same time.
―
Is the screen displaying “Send
error.”?
Refer to Responding to Send Error.11-22
Cannot connect to
this machine by
using Wi-Fi Dir ect.
Are three handheld devices
connected simultaneously?
Release the connection of handheld
devices being connected manually
or set a connection after setting the
connection time and releasing the
connection by automatic
disconnection.
8-35
Cannot send via the
e-mail.
Is the E-mail send size limit set in the
SMTP server registered on the
machine?
Check the limit value is entered to [E-
mail Size Limit] > "Address Book" of
Command Center RX and change
the setting as necessary.
2-45
The machine is
emitting steam in the
area around the
paper ejection slo t .
Check the room temperature to see if
it is low, or if damp paper was used.
Depending on the printing
environment and the paper's
condition, the heat generated during
printing will cause the moisture in the
paper to evaporate, and the steam
emitted may look like smoke. This is
not a problem, and you can continue
printing. If the steam concerns you,
raise the room temperature, or
replace the paper with a newer, dryer
paper.
―
11-6
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
Printed Image Trouble
When the following printed image trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures. Implement appropriate
procedures.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Printed images are
totally too light.
Is the paper damp? Replace the paper with new paper. 3-17
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-5
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. 6-16
8-63
Is the toner distributed evenly within
the toner container?
Shake the toner container from side
to side several times.
10-4
Is EcoPrint mode enabled? Select [EcoPrint] > [Off]. 6-18
―Run [Drum Refresh]. 11-32
―Make sure the paper type setting is
correct for the paper being used.
8-9
The white portion of
printed images look
gray as a whole.
Have you changed the density? Select appropriate density level. 6-16
8-63
Copies have a moire
pattern (dot s grouped
together in patterns
and not aligned
uniformly).
Is the original a printed photograph? Set [Original Image (Copy)] or [Org.
Image (Send/Store)] to [Photo].
6-17
Text s are not clearly
printed.
Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Choose the appropriate image for
[Original Image (Copy)] or [Org.
Image (Send/Store)].
6-17
Black spot s are in the
white porti o n of the
image.
Is the original holder or the glass
platen dirty?
Clean the original holder or the glass
platen.
10-2
11-7
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
Printouts are fuzzy. Is the device used in an environment
with high humidity or where the
temperature or humidity changes
suddenly?
Use in an environment that has
suitable humidity.
―
If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-5
―Run [Drum Refresh]. 11-32
Images are skewed. Are the originals placed correctly? When placing originals on the platen,
align them with the original size
indicator plates.
5-3
When placing originals in the
document processor, align the
original width guides securely before
placing the originals.
5-4
Is the paper loaded correctly? Check the position of the paper width
guides.
3-19
―[Perform center line adjustment. For
the adjustment method, contact your
Service Representative.
Printouts have
vertical lines.
Is the slit glass dirty? Clean the slit glass. 10-2
Dirt on the top edge
or back of the paper.
Is the interior of the machine dirty? Open the right cover. If the machine
interior is dirty with toner, clean it
using soft, dry, lint-free cloth.
―
Part of the image is
periodically faint,
blurred or shows
white lines.
Is the developing unit or drum unit set
correctly?
Set the developing unit or drum unit
set correctly.
―
―Open and then close the right cover. ―
―Run [Drum Refresh]. 11-32
―If you experience frequent problems,
turn the cassette heater switch on.
2-5
Print on the back of
the sheet is visible on
the front.
―Set [Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy)] or
[Prevent Bleed(Send/Store)] to [On].
6-26
The background
density is obtrusive.
―Run [Background Density Adj.]. 6-24
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
11-8
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
Colors appear
different than you
anticipated.
―Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. 11-30
The scanned image is
misaligned when
copying the ID card.
Is the ID card placed within A5 area
which is indicated on the platen?
Place the ID card on the platen within
the A5 indicated area.
―
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
11-9
Troubleshooting > General Troubles
Color printing trouble
When the following color printing trouble occurs, implement appropriate procedures. Implement appropriate procedures.
Symptom Checkpoints Corrective Actions Reference
Page
Skewed-color
printout.
―Run [Calibration]. 11-30
―Run [Color Registration]. 11-30
Colors appear
different than you
anticipated.
Did you choose appropriate image
quality for the original?
Select appropriate image quality. 6-17
Have you loaded color copy paper
into the paper tray?
Load color copy paper into the paper
tray.
―
―Run [Calibration]. 11-30
―Run [Tone Curve Adjustment] 11-30
―(When making copies)
Adjust the color balance.
6-20
―(When printing from a computer)
Adjust the color using the printer
driver.
―
"Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment in the
System Menu." is
displayed.
Over long periods of use, the effects
of the ambient temperature and
humidity can cause color output hues
to vary slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment] 11-30
The color toner is
empty.
Do you want to continue printing in
black and white?
If the black toner is remained, the
machine continues printing in black
and white by selecting [Print in Black
and White] of [Color Toner Empty
Action].
8-19
11-10
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
Responding to Messages
If the touch panel or the computer displays any of these messages, follow the corresponding procedure.
A
NOTE
When contacting us, the serial number will be necessary. To check the serial number, refer to the following:
Display for Device Information (3-11)
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Acceptable staple
count exceeded. Is the acceptable staple count exceeded? Select [Continue] to print without
stapling. Select [Cancel] to cancel
the job.
-
Access point was
not detected. - Check if the access point has been
set correctly.
2-15
Activation error. - Turn the power switch off and on. If
the error exists, contact
administrator.
2-9
Add staples. Has any of the document finisher run out
of staples?
If the staples are depleted, the
machine will stop and the location
of staple depletion will be indicated
on the screen. Leave the machine
on and follow the instruction to
replace the staple case.
Select [Continue] to print without
stapling. Press [Cancel] to cancel
the job.
10-10
Add the following
paper in cassette #. Is the indicated cassette out of paper? Load paper.
Select [Paper Selection] to select
the other paper source. Select
[Continue] to print on the paper in
the currently selected paper
source.
3-19
Add the following
pape r i n the
multipurpose tray.
Does the paper size set for the paper
source matches the paper size that was
actually loaded?
Select [Continue] to continue
printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
5-7
Is the indicated cassette out of paper? Load paper.
Select [Paper Selection] to select
the other paper source. Select
[Continue] to print on the paper in
the currently selected paper
source.
3-19
Adjusting... - The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
-
11-11
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
B
C
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Box is not found. - The specified box cannot be found.
Job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Box limit exceeded. Is [End] displayed on the screen? The specified box is full, and no
further storage is available; Job is
canceled. Select [End]. Try to
perform the job again after printing
or deleting data from the box.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Cassette is not
installed. - Cannot feed paper. Set the
cassette indicated on the screen.
-
Calibrating… - The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
-
Cannot connect to
Authentication
Server.
- Set machine time to match the
server’s time.
2-12
- Check the domain name. 9-5
- Check the host name. 9-5
- Check the connection status with
the server.
-
Cannot connect. - This appears when the Wi-Fi or Wi-
Fi Direct connection did not
complete. Check the settings, and
check the signal conditions.
-
Cannot duplex print
on the following
paper.
Did you select a paper size/type that
cannot be duplex printed?
Select [Paper Selection] to select
the available paper. Select
[Continue] to print without using
Duplex function.
-
Cannot offset the
following paper. Did you select a paper size/type that
cannot be offset?
Select [Paper Selection] to select
the available paper. Select
[Continue] to print without using
Offset function.
6-10
Cannot print th e
specified number of
copies.
- Only one copy is available. Select
[Continue] to continue printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
- Uncheck [RAM Disk] in the
"Device Settings" tab of the
printer's properties.
NOTE
If you unchecked the [RAM Disk],
check the [RAM Disk] again after
the printing is completed. If not,
print speed may be reduced.
8-55
11-12
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
Cannot print th e
specified number of
copies.
Do you want to print the data stored in the
USB memory?
Only one copy is available. Select
[Continue] to continue printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
-Reduce the number of copies to
be printed at once.
Furthermore, the machine may
reproduce the same originals by
arranging the following settings:
- Select [Copy Priority] of "Optional
Memory" in [System Menu].
NOTE
Before changing the "Optional
Memory" setting, contact your
administrator.
-
Cannot process this
job. - This job is canceled because it is
restricted by User Authorization or
Job Accounting. Select [End].
-
Cannot read data in
this ID card. - In registration process, the ID card
information was not read correctly.
Hold again the ID card over the ID
card reading part.
If the same message still appears,
the ID card may not be compatible
with this product. Change it to
another ID card.
9-9
Cannot recognize. - Make sure your ID card has been
registered.
9-26
Cannot staple at the
specified position. Have you selected a position that cannot
be stapled?
Select [Paper Selection] to select
the available paper. Select
[Continue] to print without using
Staple function.
-
Cannot staple the
following paper. Did you select a paper size/type that
cannot be stapled?
Press Select [Paper Selection] to
select the available paper. Press
Select [Continue] to print without
using Staple function.
-
Cassette is not
installed. - Cannot feed paper. Set the
cassette indicated on the screen.
-
Cassette # failure. - Contact your Service
Representative.
-
Check the document
processor. Is the document processor open? Close the document processor. 11-41
Check waste toner
box. - The waste toner box is not installed
correctly. Set it correctly.
10-7
Is the waste toner box full? Replace the waste toner box. 10-7
Cleaning the laser
scanner.... - The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
11-13
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
D
E
F
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Developer unit is not
installed.
[C][M][Y][K]
- Replace the developer unit (g).
See the leaflet supplied with the
developer unit.
-
Drum unit is not
installed.
[C][M][Y][K]
- Replace the drum unit. See the
leaflet supplied with the drum unit
for details.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Error occurred at
cassette #. - Remove the indicated cassette.
Select [Next >] to follow the
instructions.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Failed to send the
file information. Is the machine and the PC to which the
scanned image is to be sent connected to
the network?
Check the network and SMB
settings.
- The network cable is connected.
- The hub is not operating properly.
- The server is not operating
properly.
- Host name and IP address
- Port number
2-7
Is the account information (user ID,
password) used to access the shared
folder to which the scanned image is to
be sent incorrect?
Check the following settings of the
PC to which the scanned image is
to be sent.
- Host name
- Path
- Login user name
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user,
specify the domain name.
[Login User ID]@[Domain Name]
Example: sa720XXXX@km
- Login password
- Folder share permissions of the
recipient
-
Failed to specify Job
Accounting. - Failed to specify Job Accounting
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Failed to store job
retention data . - The job is canceled. Select [End].
Insufficient free space in the Job
Box. Try to perform the job again
after printing or deleting data from
the Job Box.
-
11-14
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
H
I
J
Finisher tray is full
of paper. Is the acceptable storage capacity
exceeded for the document finisher tray?
Remove paper from the document
finisher tray.
-
Fuser unit is not
installed. - Replace the fuser unit (h-1). See
the leaflet supplied with the fuser
unit for details.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
High temperature.
Adjust room te mp. - Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Incorrect account ID. - The account ID was incorrect when
processing the job externally. The
job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Incorrect box
password. - The box password was incorrect
when processing the job externally.
The job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Incorrect Login User
Name or Password. - The login user name or password
was incorrect when processing the
job externally. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
-
Inner tray is full of
paper. - Remove paper from the inner tray.
Printing then resumes.
-
Intermediate transfer
unit is not installed. - Replace the intermediate transfer
unit (r). See the leaflet supplied
with intermediate transfer unit.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Job Accounti ng
restriction exceeded. Is the acceptable printing count restricted
by Job Accounting exceeded?
The printing count exceeded the
acceptable count restricted by Job
Accounting. Cannot print any
more. This job is canceled. Select
[End].
-
Job sep ar ator tray is
full of paper. Is the maximum capacity of the job
separator tray exceeded?
Follow the instruction indicated on
the machine and remove paper
from the job separator tray.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
11-15
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
K
L
M
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
KPDL error. - PostScript error has occurred. The
job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Low temperature.
Adjust room te mp. - Adjust the temperature and the
humidity of your room.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Machine failure. - Internal error has occurred. Make a
note of the error code displayed on
the screen, and contact your
Service Representative.
-
Maximum number of
scanned pages. Is the acceptable scanning count
exceeded?
Only one copy of the scanned
pages is available. Send the
excess pages separately.
Press [Continue] to print, send or
store the scanned pages. Press
[Cancel] to cancel printing, sending
or storing.
-
Memory card error. - An error has occurred on the
memory card. Job is canceled.
Select [End].
The error cord is as follows.
04: Insufficient space on the
memory card to complete this
operation. Move data or delete
unneeded data.
-
Memory is full. Do you want to send the scanned image
to the PC, or store the image in the
machine?
The process cannot be performed
due to insufficient memory. If only
[End] is available, select [End]. The
job will be canceled.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
- Decrease [Image Quality] of [File
Format].
Furthermore, the machine may
reproduce the same originals by
arranging the following settings:
- Select [Normal] of "Optional
Memory" in [System Menu].
NOTE
Before changing the "Optional
Memory" setting, contact your
administrator.
8-55
11-16
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
N
O
Memory is full. Do you want to print data from the PC? Unable to continue the job as the
memory is used up. Select
[Continue] to print the scanned
pages. The print job cannot be
processed completely. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the job.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
- Select [On] of "RAM Disk Setting"
in [System Menu], and then
decrease the RAM disk size.
- Select [Printer Priority] of
"Optional Memory" in [System
Menu].
NOTE
Before changing the "RAM Disk
Setting" or "Optional Memory"
setting, contact your administrator.
8-55
MK near end. - It is almost time to replace the
parts. Obtain the maintenance kit
container. Contact your Service
Representative.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Non-genuine Toner. Is the installed toner container our own
brand?
We will not be liable for any
damage caused by the use of third
party supplies in this machine.
10-4
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Only one destination
is available for FAX
Polling RX. Enter the
destination again.
Did you specify multiple contacts
for polling reception?
Only one contact can be specified
at a time for polling reception.
Specify the contact again.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
11-17
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
P
R
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Paper is left. - Remove paper from the document
finisher.
-
Paper jam. - If a paper jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and follow
the instruction to remove the
jammed paper.
11-33
Perform Tone Curve
Adjustment. Over long periods of use, the effects of
the ambient temperature and humidity
can cause color output hues to vary
slightly.
Run [Tone Curve Adjustment]. 11-30
Performing Drum
Refresh... - The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
11-32
Preparing... - The machine is under the
adjustment to maintain its quality.
Please wait.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
RAM disk error. - An error has occurred on the RAM
disk. Job is canceled. Select [End].
The error cord is as follows.
04: Insufficient space on the RAM
disk. If the optional RAM dis is
installed, increase the RAM disk
size by changing "RAM Disk
Setting" in [System Menu].
NOTE
The range of RAM disk size can be
increased by selecting [Printer
Priority] in "Optional Memory".
8-55
Register with Google
Cloud Print. Are you
sure?
- The message is displayed when
this machine? receives the register
request for Google Cloud Print.
Select the [Yes] key to register the
printer as a Google Cloud Print
device. Select the [No] key to
cancel the registration.
5-45
11-18
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
Removable memory
error. Is writing to a removable
memory prohibited?
An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Select
[End].
The error cord is as follows.
01: Connect a removable memory
that can be written to.
-
- An error occurred in the removable
memory. The job stopped. Select
[End].
The error cord is as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Restart the system or turn the
power OFF/ON. If the error still
occurs, the removable memory is
not compatible with the machine.
Use the removable memory
formatted by this machine. If the
removable memory cannot be
formatted, it is damaged. Connect
a compatible removable memory.
7-10
Removable Memory
is full. - Job is canceled. Select [End].
Insufficient free space in the
removable memory. Delete
unnecessary files.
-
Remove originals in
the document
processor.
Are there any originals left in the
document processor?
Remove originals from the
document processor.
11-41
Replace all originals
and press
[Continue].
- Remove originals from the
document processor, put them
back in their original order, and
place them again. Select
[Continue] to resume printing.
Select [Cancel] to cancel the job.
-
Replace MK. - Replacement of the parts in the
maintenance kit is necessary at
every 200,000 pages of printing
and requires professional
servicing. Contact your Service
Representative.
-
Running security
function... - Running security function. Please
wait.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
11-19
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
S
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
Scanner memory is
full. - Scanning cannot be performed due
to insufficient memory of scanner.
Only one copy of the scanned
pages is available. Select
[Continue] to print, send or store
the scanned pages. Select
[Cancel] to cancel the printing job.
The machine may reproduce the
same originals by arranging the
following settings:
-Reduce the number of originals to
be scanned at once.
Furthermore, the machine may
reproduce the same originals by
arranging the following settings:
- Select [Copy Priority] of "Optional
Memory" in [System Menu].
NOTE
Before changing the "Optional
Memory" setting, contact your
administrator.
8-55
Scheduled sending
jobs exceeded. - The number of jobs has exceeded
the limit set for delayed
transmission. Select [End]. The job
is canceled.
Wait until the delayed transmission
is executed, or cancel the delayed
transmission and then perform the
job again.
-
Send error. - An error has occurred during
transmission. The job is canceled.
Select [End].
Refer to Responding to Send Error
for the error code and corrective
actions.
11-22
Set cassette. Have the paper width guide and paper
length guide been loaded properly?
Load the paper width guide and
paper length guide properly so that
there is no space between the
guides and the paper.
-
Shake the toner
container. - Open the front cover of the
machine and pull out the toner
container indicated on the screen.
Shake the toner container well and
reinstall it.
-
11-20
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
T
SSD error. - An error has occurred on SSD. Job
is canceled. Select [End].
The error cords are as follows.
01: The amount of data that can be
saved at once has been exceeded.
Turn the power OFF/ON. If the
error still occurs, divide the file into
smaller files. If the error occurs
after the file is divided, the
specified file may be damaged.
Delete the file.
04: Insufficient space on SSD to
complete this operation. Move data
or delete unneeded data.
NOTE
Please be aware that when you
carry out initialization of the
system, the data saved in SSD
will be erased.
-
Staple jam. - If a staple jam occurs, the machine
will stop and the location of the jam
will be indicated on the screen.
Leave the machine on and follow
the instruction to remove the
jammed staple.
-
System error. - System error has occurred. Follow
the instructions on the screen.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
The cover is open. Is there any cover which is
open?
Close the cover indicated on the
screen.
-
Is the top cover of the document
processor open?
Close the document processor
cover.
-
The device ca nnot
be connected
because allowed
connections would
be exceeded.
Are three handheld devices connected
simultaneously?
Cancel a connection to a portable
device that is not being used, or set
the machine's auto disconnect time
to break portable device
connections.
-
The manufacture r
assumes no
responsibility for
damage caused by a
non-genuine toner.
Is the installed toner container our own
brand?
We will not be liable for any
damage caused by the use of third
party supplies in this machine. If
you want to continue, select [Next
>].
10-4
The phone receiver
is off the hook. - Put down the receiver. -
The SD Card is not
formatted. Is the SD Card formatted by this
machine?
Select [Format] from [Common
Settings], under [System Menu].
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
11-21
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
U
W
The slit glass
requires cleaning. - Clean the slit glass using the
cleaning cloth supplied with the
document processor.
10-2
This ID card is
already registered to
another user.
- Your ID card has already been
registered. Change it to another ID
card.
-
This memory is not
formatted. This will
be formatted. Are
you sure?
Is the removable memory formatted by
this machine?
Perform [Format] on this machine. 7-10
This user account is
locked out. - Contact administrator.
Job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Toner container not
installed. - Install the toner container. 10-4
Toner [C][M][Y][K]
are empty. - Replace the toner container.
NOTE
If the color toner is empty but the
black toner is remained, the
machine continues printing in black
and white by selecting [Print in
Black and White] of "Color Toner
Empty Action".
10-4
Toner is low.
[C][M][Y][K]
(Replace when
empty.)
- It is almost time to replace the
toner container. Obtain a new toner
container.
10-4
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actio n s Reference
Page
Unknown Toner
Installed. PC
[C][M][Y][K]
Does the installed toner container's
regional specification match the
machine's?
Install the specified container. 10-4
Use MP tray to print
on the following
paper.
- Set paper displayed on the screen
and press [Continue].
-
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actio n s Reference
Page
Warning low
memory. - Cannot start the job. Try again
later.
-
Error Message Checkpoints C orre ct iv e Actio n s Reference
Page
11-22
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
Y
Responding to Send Error
The send error displayed on the screen are as follows.
Message Checkpoints Corrective Actio n s Reference
Page
You cannot use this
box. - You cannot use the specified box.
Job is canceled. Select [End].
-
Error
Code Message Corrective Actions Reference
Page
1101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the host name of the SMTP server on the
Command Center RX.
2-45
Failed to send via FTP. Check the host name of FTP. 5-18
Failed to send via SMB. Check the host name of SMB. 5-16
1102 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name.
• Host name
•Path
5-16
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following on the Command Center RX.
• SMTP login user name and login password
• POP3 login user name and login password
• E-mail size limit
2-45
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name.
•Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
5-18
1103 Failed to send via SMB. Check the SMB settings.
• Login user name and login password
NOTE
If the sender is a domain user, specify the domain name.
•Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
5-16
Failed to send via FTP. Check the FTP settings.
•Path
• Folder share permissions of the recipient
5-18
1104 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail address.
NOTE
If the address is rejected by the domain, you cannot send
the email.
5-14
11-23
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
1105 Failed to send via SMB. Check the following settings.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Function Key
Assignment] > [Menu] > [Store File] > [Quick Setup
Wizard] >
[SMB Client (Transmission)]
5-16
Failed to send the e-mail. Select [Submit] of the SMTP settings on the Command
Center RX.
2-45
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following settings.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Function Key
Assignment] > [Menu] > [Store File] > [Quick Setup
Wizard] >
[Function Type]
5-18
1106 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the sender address of SMTP on the Command
Center RX.
2-45
1131 Failed to send via FTP. Enable the SSL.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Function Key
Assignment] > [Menu] > [Report] > [Print]
5-18
1132 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the following of the SMTP server.
• Is SMTP over SSL available?
• Is the encryption available?
Refer to the
Command
Center RX
User Guide.
Failed to send via FTP. Check the following of the FTP server.
• Is FTPS available?
• Is the encryption available?
—
2101 Failed to send via SMB. Check the network and SMB settings.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
—
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network and FTP settings.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• Host name and IP address
• Port number
—
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network and Command Center RX.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
• POP3 server name of the POP3 user
• SMTP server name
2-45
Error
Code Message Corrective Actions Reference
Page
11-24
Troubleshooting > Responding to Messages
2102
2103
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
Check the following of the FTP server.
• Is FTP available?
• The server is not operating properly.
—
Failed to send the e-mail. Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
2201
2202
2203
2231
Failed to send the e-mail.
Failed to send via FTP.
Failed to send via SMB.
Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
2204 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the e-mail size limit of the SMTP settings on the
Command Center RX.
2-45
3101 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the authentication methods of both the sender and
the recipient.
—
Failed to send via FTP. Check the network.
• The network cable is connected.
• The hub is not operating properly.
• The server is not operating properly.
—
3201 Failed to send the e-mail. Check the SMTP user authentication method of the
recipient.
—
0007
4201
4701
5101
5102
5103
5104
7101
7102
7103
720f
— Turn the power switch off and back on. If this error occurs
several times, make a note of the displayed error code
and contact your service representative.
2-10
Error
Code Message Corrective Actions Reference
Page
11-25
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjustment/Maintenance
Overview of Adjustment/Maintenance
If there is an image problem and the message to run adjustment or maintenance menu appears, run Adjustment/
Maintenance in the system menu.
The table below lists the item you can Procedure.
Color Registration Procedure
Perform the color registration. However, if it is not resolved or to perform more detailed settings, use the manual
registration.
Menu Description Reference Page
Color Reg is t r ation Perform the color registration. 11-25
Tone Curve Adjustment Adjust the tone curve of the printed image. 11-30
Drum Refresh Remove image blur and white dots from the printout. 11-32
Calibration Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate
color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail.
11-30
Laser Scanner Cleaning Remove vertical lines from the printout. 11-30
IMPORTANT
Before performing color registration, be sure to perform Calibration. If color drift remains, perform color
registration. By performing color registration without performing Calibration, the color drift will be resolved once,
however, it may cause the serious color drift later.
11-26
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Auto Correction
1Load paper.
2Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] > [Auto]
3Print the chart.
Select [Start].
A chart is printed.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Af ter removing new p aper fro m it s p ackaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi-purp ose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (3-17)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
11-27
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Chart Example
4Correction
1As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with the arrows toward the
back.
2Select [Start] to scan the chart.
When scanning is finished, color printing position correction starts.
3Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
11-28
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Manual setting
1Load paper.
2Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] > [Manual]
3Print the chart.
Select [Print Chart].
A chart is printed. On the chart, for each of M (magenta), C (cyan) and Y (yellow), charts for H-1 to 7 and V-1/3/5
are printed.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Af ter removing new p aper fro m it s p ackaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi-purp ose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (3-17)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
11-29
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Chart Example
4Enter the appropriate value.
1Find the location on each chart where 2 lines most closely match. If this is the 0 position, registration for that
color is not required. For the illustration, B is the appropriate value.
From charts H-1 to H-7, read the values from H-1 to H-7.
From charts V-1/3/5, read only the values from V-3 (center).
2Select [Color Registration] [OK].
3Select [Start] of the chart to be corrected.
4Select [+] or [-] to enter the values read from the chart. Select [OK].
Select [+] to increase the value from 0 to 9. To decrease, select [-].
By selecting [-], the value changes from 0 to alphabetic letters, going from A to I. To move in the reverse direction, select
[+]. To decrease, select [-].
You cannot use the numeric keys to enter these values.
5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter the registration values for each chart. Select [OK]
6Select [Start] after all values have been entered. Color registration begins.
7Select [OK] after color registration is complete.
11-30
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
Calibration
Using this function enables printing in the most appropriate color by adjusting hue and color drift in detail.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Calibration]
2Perform adjustment.
Select [Start]. Calibration begins.
Perform the laser scanner cleaning.
Remove vertical white lines from the printout.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Laser Scanner Cleaning]
2Perform adjustment.
Select [Start]. Laser Scanner Cleaning begins.
Tone Curve Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the density of printed images may differ
from the original. If that is the case, use this function to ensure consistency in density between the printed image and the
original. If calibration does not improve the tones, perform this adjustment.
A total of 3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed during adjustment in [Copy/Print (600dpi)]. Also, in [Print (1200dpi)], 1
pattern page (No. 1) is printed out. The printed patterns are read sequentially during the adjustment.
NOTE
When correct toner overlapping is not ensured even after performing calibration, refer to the following:
Color Registration Procedure 11-25
11-31
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
1Load paper.
2Display the screen.
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Tone Curve Adjustment]
2Select [Copy/Print (600dpi)] or [Print (1200dpi)].
3Perform adjustment.
[Copy/Print (600dpi)]
3 pattern pages (No. 1 to 3) are printed out.
1Select [Start].
Check that the number "1" is printed at the bottom of the pattern.
2As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with the arrows toward the
back and close the original holder.
IMPORTANT
• Load the paper with the print side facing up.
• Af ter removing new p aper fro m it s p ackaging, fan the paper before loading it in the multi-purp ose tray.
Precaution for Loading Paper (3-17)
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the level indicator.
• If paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and paper width guide, the paper may
skew or become jammed.
123
11-32
Troubleshooting > Adjustment/Maintenance
3Select [Start].
The pattern is read and adjustment begins.
The second pattern is output.
4Check that the number is printed at the bottom of the pattern and repeat steps 2 to 3 twice to read patterns 2
and 3.
5Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
[Print (1200dpi)]
In [Print (1200dpi)], 1 pattern page (No. 1) is printed out.
1Start Select [Start].
2As shown in the illustration, place the printed side down on the platen with the edge with the arrows toward the
back and close the original holder.
3Select [Start].
The pattern is read and adjustment begins.
4Select [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation screen.
Drum Refresh
Remove image blur and white dots from the printout.
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Drum Refresh]
2Adjust as required.
Select [Start]. Drum Refresh begins.
NOTE
Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.
1
11-33
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Clearing Paper Jams
If a paper jam occurs, printing stops and the message below appears on the touch panel along with an indication of the
location of the paper jam.
Paper jam.
Refer to these procedures to remove the jammed paper.
Jam Location Indicators
If a paper jam occurs, the location of the jam will be displayed on the touch panel as well as the clearing instructions.
1 Shows the location of a paper jam.
2 Shows the previous step.
3 Shows the next step.
4 Shows the removal procedure.
5 Selecting the [Status/ Job Cancel] key will
cause [Hold] to become selected. Selecting
[Hold] displays the status screen, which
you can use to check the status of jobs.
6 Selecting [Display Error] returns to paper
jam guidance.
Paper Jam Location
Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference page
1Multipurpose Tray 11-34
2Right Cover 1 11-35
3Cassette 1 11-36
4Right Cover 3 11-37
5Cassette 2 11-36
10:10
JAM 0001
Paper jam.
< Back Next >
1/3
Clear the paper jammed in
Cassette 1.
Press [Next >] to follow
the instructions.
Status/Job Cancel.
Status
Print Job Status
10:10
Send Job Status
Store Job Status
Scheduled Job
Pause All
Print Jobs
1/5
CloseDisplay
Error
12
3
4
6
10:10
JAM 0001
⣬䛵䜎䜚䛷䛩䚹
< ᡠ䜛 ḟ䜈 >
1/3
䜹䝉䝑䝖1䛾⣬䛵䜎䜚䜢ฎ⌮䛧䛶
䛟䛰䛥䛔䚹
[ḟ䜈>]䜢ᢲ䛧䛶ᡭ㡰䛻ᚑ䛳䛶
䛟䛰䛥䛔䚹
10:10
JAM 0001
Paper jam.
< Back Next >
1/3
Clear the paper jammed in
Cassette 1.
Press [Next >] to follow
the instructions.
1
2
2
8
7
7
9
2
3
5
64
11-34
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
After you remove the jam, the machine will warm up again and the error message will be cleared. The machine resumes
with the page that was printing when the jam occurred.
Remove any jammed paper in the Multipurpose Tray
1Remove any jammed pa per.
2Remove all the paper.
3Reload the paper.
6Cassette 3 11-36
7Document Finisher 11-39
9Bridge Unit 11-40
8SpecificationsDocument Processor 11-41
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the
machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
Paper Jam Location
Indicator Paper Jam Location Reference page
11-35
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 1
1Open Right Cover 1.
2Remove any jammed pa per.
3Open the fuser cover (a) and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
The fixing unit is extremely hot. Take sufficient care when working in this area, as there is a danger of
getting burned.
11-36
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
4Open the duplex unit.
5Remove any jammed pa per.
6Push Right Cover 1.
Remove any jammed paper in Cassette 1, 2 and 3
Here, we'll explain the procedures for Cassette 1, as an example.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the
machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
11-37
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
1Pull Cassette 1 out toward you until it stops.
2Remove any jammed pa per.
3Push Cassette 1 back in.
Remove any jammed paper in Right Cover 2, 3
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the
machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
11-38
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
1Open Right Cover 3.
2Remove any jammed pa per.
3Open Right Cover 2.
4Remove any jammed pa per.
11-39
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
5Push Right Cover 2,3.
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Finisher
1Remove any jammed pa per.
2Open the top cover.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the
machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
11-40
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3Remove any jammed pa per.
4Push the top cover.
Remove any jammed paper in the Bridge Unit
1Open the Bridge Unit cover and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
• Do not reuse jammed papers.
• If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of paper from inside the
machine. Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
11-41
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
2Return the Bridge Unit cover to its original position.
Remove any jammed paper in the Document Processor
1Remove the originals from the Original Table.
2Open the front cover and remove any jammed paper.
CAUTION
If the paper tears during removal, be sure to remove any loose scraps of p aper from inside the machine.
Scraps of paper left in the machine could cause subsequent jamming.
11-42
Troubleshooting > Clearing Paper Jams
3Open Reverse Unit C and remove any jammed paper.
4Turn dial B clockwise to feed jammed paper and remove it.
5Push the top cover.
C
B
11-43
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
Clearing a Staple Jam
Clearing a staple jam of the Document Finisher
1Open the staple cover of the Document Finisher
2Remove the Staple Cartridge Holder.
3Remove the jammed staple.
4Install the Staple Cartridge Holder.
11-44
Troubleshooting > Clearing a Staple Jam
5Close the staple cover.
12-1
Appendix >
12 Appendix
This chapter explains the following topics:
Optional Equipment ......................................................................................................................................... 12-2
Overview of Optional Equipment ........................................................................................................... 12-2
Optional Applications ............................................................................................................................ 12-11
Starting Application Use ........................................................................................................................ 12-11
Checking Details of Application ........................................................................................................... 12-12
Character Entry Method ................................................................................................................................. 12-13
Entry Screens ...................................................................................................................................... 12-13
Entering Characters ............................................................................................................................. 12-14
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................. 12-23
Machine ............................................................................................................................................... 12-23
Copy Functions .................................................................................................................................... 12-25
Printer Functions .................................................................................................................................. 12-26
Scanner Functions ............................................................................................................................... 12-26
Document Processor ........................................................................................................................... 12-27
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2) .............................................................................................................. 12-27
Document Finisher ............................................................................................................................... 12-27
Glossary ......................................................................................................................................................... 12-29
12-2
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Equipment
Overview of Optional Equipment
The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(1)PF-470(2)PF-471
(3)DF-470
(9)IB-50
(8)HD-6/HD-7 (10)IB-51
(6)Fax System 13
(7)Expansion Memory
(4)IB-36
(5)Card Authentication Kit (B)
12-3
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(1)PF-470 <Paper Feeder (550-sheet×1)>
Two additional cassettes identical to the printer's cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
Loading in the Cassettes 1 (to 3) (3-19)
(2)PF-471 <Paper Feeder (550-sheet×2)>
Two additional cassettes identical to the printer's cassette can be installed in the printer. Paper capacity and loading
method are the same as the standard cassettes.
Loading in the Cassettes 1 (to 3) (3-19)
(3)DF-470 <Document Finisher> (ECOSYS M8130cidn)
This is a document finisher capable of holding large print runs and of separating and offsetting multiple copies of a
printout into individual copies. It can also staple the offset printouts.
(4)IB-36 <Wireless Network Interface Kit>
This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (max. 65 Mbps) and
IEEE802.11 g/b. In addition, network printing is possible without using the wireless LAN router because Wi-Fi Direct is
supported. This is standard in Inch Model.
(5)Card Authentication Kit(B) <Card Authentication Kit>
Option Card Authentication Kit User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to
register ID card information on the previously registered local user list.
Card Authentication Kit(B) Operation Guide
(6)FAX System 13 <FAX Kit>
By installing the FAX kit, fax send/receive is enabled. Also, it is possible to use it as a network fax, by using it with a
computer.
FAX Operation Guide
(7)Expansion Memory
Expanding memory enables more complex printing and speeds up print job processing. The optional Expansion Memory
provides an additional 2048 MB of memory, allowing expansion up to 3072 MB.
IMPORTANT
If PF-470 or PF-471 is installed, toppling prevention kit must be installed.
12-4
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Memory Handling Precautions
Electrostatic charge that builds up in the body through contact with clothing, carpeting, and other sources is a major
enemy of chip memory. To protect memory from damage caused by electrostatic charge, touch a water tap or some
metal object to discharge it from your body before loading the expansion memory. If possible, you should wear an anti-
static wristband or take other anti-static measures.
Installing or Replacing Memory
1Power Off.
Turn off power, and disconnect the power cord and any cables connected to the machine.
2Remove the covers.
3Install the memory.
1Remove the optional Expansion Memory from its package.
12-5
Appendix > Optional Equipment
2With the memory connection terminals pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part of the memory with the
tab of the socket and insert the memory at an angle.
3Carefully swing the inserted memory towards the machine.
4Replace the covers you removed at the beginning of this procedure.
Removing Expansion Memory
To remove Expansion Memory that has been installed, remove the machine's right cover. Carefully press the two
stoppers of the socket, and then remove the Expansion Memory from the socket.
Checking Expansion Memory
Improperly installed Expansion Memory will cause the following message to appear: "Machine Failure". Re-install the
memory to clear the error. You can check whether or not Expansion Memory is properly installed by printing a status
page.
[Print Report] (8-5)
IMPORTANT
Before inserting memory, check to make sure that the machine power switch is in the off
position.
12-6
Appendix > Optional Equipment
(8)HD-6/7 <Large Capacity Storage: SSD>
The Solid State Device (SSD) is used for storing print data. With Hard Disk installed in the machine, received data can
be rasterized and stored on this Hard Disk. Installation of an SSD enables use of Document Box functions.
Using Document Boxes (3-48)
Installing the SSD
1Power Off.
Turn off power, and disconnect the power cord and any cables connected to the machine.
2Remove the covers.
OPT2/
NETWORK
12-7
Appendix > Optional Equipment
3Install the SSD.
1Remove the SSD from its package.
2Insert straight into the Option Interface Slot.
3Fix it with the (2) screws.
12-8
Appendix > Optional Equipment
4Replace the covers you removed at the beginning of this procedure.
(9)SD/SDHC Memory Card
An SD/SDHC memory card is useful for storing fonts, macros, and overlays. The machine is equipped with a slot for an
SDHC memory card with a maximum size of 32 GB, and an SD memory card with a maximum size of 2 GB.
Reading the SD/SDHC Memory Card
Once inserted in the machine's slot, the contents of the SD/SDHC memory card can be read from the operation panel or
automatically when you power on or reset the machine.
Installing and Formatting the SD/SDHC Memory Card
To use an unused SD/SDHC memory card, you must first use the machine to format the SD/SDHC memory card. For
information on formatting an SD/SDHC memory card, consult your Service Representative.
1Power Off.
Turn off power, and disconnect the power cord and any cables connected to the machine.
12-9
Appendix > Optional Equipment
2Remove the covers.
3Install the SD/SDHC Memory Card.
1Insert the SD/SDHC memory card into the SD/SDHC memory card slot.
2Replace the covers you removed at the beginning of this procedure.
12-10
Appendix > Optional Equipment
3Insert the power cord into the socket and turn on the power switch.
(10)IB-50 <Network Interface Kit>
The Network Interface Kit provides a high-speed connection for the Gigabit-per-second interface. The IB-50 provides
support for AppleTalk, Netware, and similar conventional protocols.
Only supports minimum function of standard utilities.
(11)IB-51 <Wireless Network Interface Kit>
This is a wireless LAN interface card which supports the wireless LAN specifications IEEE802.11n (Max 300 Mbps) and
11 g/b. The IB-51 provides support for AppleTalk, Netware, and similar conventional protocols.
Only supports minimum function of standard utilities.
The IB-51 setup utility is compatible with a Windows OS and Mac OSX.
(12)Data Security kit(E) <Data Security Kit>
The Data Security Kit overwrites all unnecessary data in the storage area of the hard disk so that it cannot be retrieved.
Also, the kit encrypts data before storing it in the SSD. It guarantees higher security because no data cannot be decoded
by ordinary output or operations.
(13)UG-33 <ThinPrint Option>
This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(14)Scan extension kit(A) <OCR Scan Activation Kit>
This option enables the use of the OCR function in the applications of the machine.
To use this function, an SSD or SD/SDHC memory card must be inserted.
HD-6/7 <Large Capacity Storage: SSD> (12-6)
SD/SDHC Memory Card (12-8)
To use this function, the application and OCR dictionary must be installed.
Optional Applications (12-11)
OCR Dictionary Installation (8-58)
12-11
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Optional Applications
The applications listed below are installed on this machine.
*1 This can be used on a trial basis for a limited time.
Starting Application Use
1Display the screen.
[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Optional Function
2Select the desired application > [Activate].
You can view detailed information on the selected application by selecting [ ].
3[Official] > [Next >] > Input the license key. > [OK]
Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, go to
Step 4.
To use the application as a trial, select [Trial] without entering the license key.
4Select [Yes] in the confirmation screen.
Application
Data Security Kit
Card Authentication Kit*1
ThinPrint Option*1
OCR Scan Activation Kit*1
NOTE
• Restrictions such as the number of times the application can be used during the trial period differ depending
on the application.
• If you change the date/time while using the trial version of an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
• Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
NOTE
• If you started the Data Security Kit or ThinPrint Option and entered the license key, you need to turn power
OFF and then back ON again.
• Icons of activated application are displayed in the Home screen.
12-12
Appendix > Optional Equipment
Checking Details of Application
1[System Menu / Counter] key > [System/Network] > Optional Function
2Select [ ] for the application whose detailed information you want check.Select [+].
You can view detailed information on the selected application.
The table below lists the item you can view.
To extend the trial period, select [Print after Change Settings] > [Yes]
NOTE
If the user authentication screen appears, enter your login user name and login password and select [Login].
For this, you need to log in with administrator privileges.
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
• Login user name
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
• Login Password
ECOSYS M8124cidn:2400, ECOSYS M8130cidn:3000
Description
Function Name
License
Remaining Counts
Expiration Date
Operational Status
12-13
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Character Entry Method
To enter characters for a name, use the on-display keyboard in the touch panel following the steps as explained below.
Entry Screens
Lower-case Letter Entry Screen
NOTE
Keyboard Layout
"QWERTY", "QWERTZ" and "AZERTY" are available as keyboard layouts the same as a PC keyboard. Select
the [System Menu/Counter] key, [Common Settings] and then [Keyboard Layout] to choose the desired layout.
"QWERTY" layout is used here as an example. You may use another layout following the same steps.
No. Display/Key Description
1Display Displays entered characters.
2Keyboard Select the character to enter.
3[Cancel] Select to cancel entered characters and return to the screen before
the entry was made.
4[< Back] Select to return to the previous screen.
5[OK] / [Next >] Select to save the entered characters and move to the next screen.
6Enter Key Select to enter a line break.
7Space Key Select to insert a space.
8Delete Key Select to delete a character to the left of the cursor.
9[Input] / [Limit] Display Displays maximum number of characters and the number of
characters entered.
10 Cursor Key Select to move the cursor on the display.
11 [A/a] / [A/a] Select to switch between upper case and lower case.
12 [ABC] / [Symbol] Select the characters that are entered. To enter symbols or numbers,
select [Symbol].
Input:
Limit:
< Back Next >Cancel
Add - Name
poitrq
l
uyew
kgfajhds
.vc@xz
Abc
Del.
3
32
A/a
mnb
ABC
㻝
㻞
㻟㻠
㻢
㻝㻜㻝㻝 㻥 㻤
㻡
㻣
㻝㻞
12-14
Appendix > Character Entry Method
Upper-case Letter Entry Screen
Number/Symbol Entry Screen
Entering Characters
Follow the steps below to enter 'List A-1' for an example.
1Enter 'List', (sp ace).
To shift from lower case to upper case letters, select [A/a]. To shift from upper case to lower case letters, select [A/
a].
2Enter 'A-1'.
To enter numbers or symbols, select [ABC] to display [Symbol].
No. Display/Key Description
13 [ ]/[ ] To enter a number or symbol not shown in the keyboard, select the
cursor key and scroll the screen to view other numbers or symbols to
enter.
Input:
Limit:
< Back Next >Cancel
AB
Del.
2
32
ABC A/a
QW E R T Y U I O P
ASDFGHJ KL
_~ZX CV BNM
Add - Name
Input:
Limit:
Symbol Del.
3
32
<Back Next>Cancel
Add- Name
123
─
㻝㻟
Input:
Limit:
< Back Next >Cancel
L
Del.
1
32
ABC A/a
QW E R T Y U I O P
ASDFGHJ KL
_~ZX CV BNM
Add
- Name
Input:
Limit:
< Back Next >Cancel
Add - Name
poitrq
l
uyew
kgfajhds
.vc@xz
List
Del.
5
32
A/a
mnb
ABC
㻝㻘㻟
㻞
㻠
㻡㻢㻣
㻤
Input:
Limit:
< Back Next >Cancel
List A
Del.
6
32
ABC A/a
QW E R T Y U I O P
ASDFGHJ KL
_~ZX CV BNM
Add - Name
Input:
Limit:
Symbol Del.
8
32
<Back Next>Cancel
Add- Name
ListA-1
─
㻝
㻞㻠
㻟
12-15
Appendix > Character Entry Method
3Register the characters you entered.
Select [Next>]. The entered characters are registered.
Input:
Limit:
Symbol Del.
8
32
<Back Next>Cancel
Add- Name
ListA-1
─
12-16
Appendix > Paper
Paper
This section explains the paper sizes and types that can be used in the paper source.
For details on the sizes, types, and number of sheets of paper that can be loaded in each paper tray, refer to the
following.
Machine (12-23)
Paper Specifications
This machine is designed to print on standard copy paper as used in regular ('dry') copiers and page printers such as
laser printers. It also supports a variety of other types of paper that conform to the specifications given in this appendix.
Be careful when choosing paper. Paper unsuitable for the machine may cause jams or may be wrinkled.
Supported Paper
Use standard copy paper for regular copiers or laser printers. The printing quality will be affected by the quality of paper.
Poor quality paper may result in unsatisfactory output.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine
The following table lists the specifications of paper that is supported with this machine. Refer to the subsequent sections
for further details.
We are not responsible for the problems occurred from the use of paper that does not conform to our specifications.
Paper Appropriate Paper
This section describes guidelines for choosing paper.
Condition
Avoid using paper with bent corners or that is curled, dirty, or torn. Do not use paper that has a rough surface or paper
fiber lint, or that is especially delicate. Use of paper in any of these conditions will not only deliver poor copies but may
also cause jams and shorten the useful life of the machine. Choose paper with a smooth and even surface; however,
avoid coated paper or paper with a treated surface as it may damage the drum or fusing unit.
Criteria Specifications
Weight Cassettes: 60 to 256 g/m2
Multi purpose tray: 60 - 256 g/m2
Dimensio nal accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Moisture content 4 to 6%
Pulp content 80% or more
NOTE
Some recycled paper does not meet requirements for use with this machine as listed in the Basic Paper
Specifications shown below, such as moisture or pulp content. For this reason, we recommend purchasing a
small amount of recycled paper as a sample for testing prior to use. Choose recycled paper that gives the best
printing results and
contains low levels of paper dust.
12-17
Appendix > Paper
Ingredients
Do not use paper such as paper that has been coated or surface-treated or paper that contains plastic or carbon. Those
types of paper may produce harmful fumes from the heat of printing and may damage the drum.
Be sure to use the standard paper that contains at least 80% pulp, i.e., not more than 20% of the total paper content
consists of cotton or other fibers.
Smoothness
The paper surface should be smooth, but it must be uncoated. With paper that is too smooth and slippery, several
sheets may accidentally be supplied at once, causing jams.
Basis Weight
In countries that use the metric system, basis weight is the weight in grams of one sheet of paper one square meter in
area. Paper that is too heavy or too light may be supplied incorrectly or cause paper jams, which may cause excessive
wear of the machine. Mixed paper weight (i.e., thickness) may cause several sheets to be supplied at once accidentally
and may also cause blurring or other printing problems if the toner fails to adhere correctly.
Moisture content
Paper moisture content is the ratio of moisture to dryness expressed as a percentage. Moisture affects how the paper is
supplied, the electrostatic chargeability of the paper, and how the toner adheres.
Paper moisture content varies depending on the relative humidity in the room. High relative humidity causes paper to
become damp, making the edges expand so it appears wavy. Low relative humidity causes paper to lose moisture,
making the edges tighten and weakening print contrast.
Wavy or tight edges may cause the paper to slip when it is supplied. Try to keep the moisture content between 4 to 6%.
To maintain the right level of moisture content, bear in mind the following considerations.
• Store paper in a cool, well-ventilated place.
• Store paper flat and unopened in the package. Once the package is opened, reseal it if the paper is not to be used for
a while.
• Store paper sealed in the original package and box. Put a pallet under the carton to keep it raised above the floor.
Especially during rainy seasons keep the paper a sufficient distance away from wooden or concrete floors.
• Before using paper that has been stored, keep it at the proper moisture level for at least 48 hours.
• Do not store paper where it is exposed to heat, sunlight, or dampness.
Other Paper Specifications
Porosity
The density of the paper fibers.
Stiffness
Paper must be stiff enough or it may buckle in the machine, causing jams.
Curl
Most paper naturally tends to curl after the package is opened. When paper passes through the fixing unit, it curls
upward slightly. To deliver flat printouts, load the paper so that the curl faces towards the bottom of the paper tray.
Static electricity
During printing, paper is electrostatically charged so that the toner adheres. Choose paper that can be discharged
quickly so that copies do not cling together.
12-18
Appendix > Paper
Whiteness
Paper whiteness affects print contrast. Use whiter paper for sharper, brighter copies.
Quality
Machine problems may occur if sheet sizes are not uniform or if corners are not square, edges are rough, sheets are
uncut, or edges or corners are crushed. In order to prevent these problems, be especially careful when you cut the
paper yourself.
Packaging
Choose paper that is properly packaged and stacked in boxes. Ideally, the packaging itself should have been treated
with a coating to inhibit moisture.
Specially treated paper
We do not recommend printing onto the following types of paper, even if it conforms to the basic specifications. When
you use these kinds of paper, purchase a small amount first as a sample to test.
• Glossy paper
• Watermarked paper
• Paper with an uneven surface
• Perforated paper
Paper Sizes that can be Used with This Machine
Paper of the following sizes is supported by the machine.
Measurements in the table take into account a ±0.7 mm dimensional accuracy for length and width. Corner angles must
be 90° ± 0.2°.
• A3 (297 × 420 mm)
• A4 (297 × 210 mm)
• A5 (210 × 148 mm)
• A6 (148 × 105 mm) *1
• B4 (257 × 364 mm)
• B5 (257 × 182 mm)
• B6 (182 × 128 mm) *1
• 216 × 340 mm
• Ledger
•Letter
• Legal
• Statement
• Executive (7-1/4 × 10-1/2") *1
• Oficio II
• Folio (210 × 330 mm)
• 8K (273 × 394 mm)
• 16K (273 × 197 mm)
• ISO B5 (176 × 250 mm) *1
• Envelope #10 (4-1/8 × 9-1/2") *1
• Envelope #9 (3-7/8 × 8-7/8") *1
• Envelope #6 3/4 (3-5/8 × 6-1/2") *1
12-19
Appendix > Paper
• Envelope Monarch (3-7/8 × 7-1/2") *1
• Envelope DL (110 × 220 mm) *1
• Envelope C5 (162 × 229 mm) *1
• Envelope C4 (229 × 324 mm) *1
• Hagaki (Cardstock) (100 × 148 mm) *1
• Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (148 × 200 mm) *1
• Youkei 4 (105 × 235 mm) *1
• Youkei 2 (114 × 162 mm) *1
• Custom (Multi Purpose Tray: 98 × 148 to 297 × 432 mm) *1
*1 Can only be used with the multi purpose tray.
Special Paper
This section describes printing onto special paper and print media.
Special Paper that can be Used with This Machine
• OHP Transparencies
• Preprinted paper
• Bond paper
• Recycled paper
• Thin paper
• Letterhead
• Colored paper
• Prepunched paper
• Envelopes
• Hagaki (Cardstock)
• Thick paper
• Labels
• High-quality paper
• Coated Paper
When using these paper and media, choose those that are designed specifically for copiers or page printers (such as
laser printers). Use the multi purpose tray for transparencies, envelopes, cardstocks, and label paper.
Choosing Special Paper
Although special paper that meets the following requirements can be used with the machine, print quality will vary
considerably due to differences in the construction and quality of special paper. Thus, special paper is more likely than
regular paper to cause printing problems. Before purchasing special paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the
print quality is satisfactory. General precautions when printing onto special paper are given below. Note that we are not
responsible for any harm to the user or damage to the machine caused by moisture or specifications of special paper.
Select a cassette or multi purpose tray for special paper.
12-20
Appendix > Paper
OHP Transparencies
Transparencies must be able to withstand the heat of printing. Transparencies must meet the following conditions.
To avoid problems, use the multipurpose tray for transparencies and load transparencies with the long side facing the
machine.
If transparencies jam frequently at output, try pulling the leading edge of sheets gently as they are ejected.
Labels
Be sure to feed labels from the multi purpose tray.
For selecting labels, use extreme care so that the adhesive may not come in direct contact with any part of the machine
and that the labels are not easily peeled from the carrier sheet. Adhesives that stick to the drum or rollers and peeled
labels remaining in the machine may cause a failure.
When printing onto labels, you must be liable for the print quality and possible trouble.
Labels consist of three layers as shown in the illustration. The adhesive layer contains materials that are easily affected
by the force applied in the machine. The carrier sheet bears the top sheet until the label is used. This composition of
labels may cause more problems.
The label surface must be covered completely with the top sheet. Gaps between labels may cause peeling of labels,
resulting in a serious failure.
Some label paper has large margins on the top sheet. When using such paper, do not peel these margins from the
carrier sheet before completing output.
Use label paper that conforms to the following specifications.
Heat resistance Must withstand at least 190°C
Thickness 0.100 to 0.110 mm
Material Polyester
Dimensio nal accuracy ±0.7 mm
Squareness of corners 90° ±0.2°
Criteria Specifications
Top sheet weight 44 to 74 g/m²
Basis weight (overall paper
weight) 104 to 151 g/m²
Top sheet thickness 0.086 to 0.107 mm
Top sheet
Adhesive layer
Carrier sheet
Not allowedAllowed
Carrier sheet
Top sheet
12-21
Appendix > Paper
Hagaki (Cardstock)
Before loading Hagaki (Cardstock), fan them and align the edges. Hagaki (Cardstock) should be fed from the MP tray
with the print-side down or the cassette and the optional paper feeder with the print-side up. If the Hagaki (Cardstock)
paper is curled, straighten it before loading. Printing onto curled Hagaki (Cardstock) may cause jams.
Use unfolded Oufuku hagaki (Return postcard) (available at post offices). Some Hagaki (Cardstock) may still have rough
Envelopes
Envelopes should be fed from the MP tray with the print-side down.
Due to the structure of envelopes, printing evenly over the entire surface may not be possible in some cases. Thin
envelopes in particular may be wrinkled by the machine in some cases as they pass through. Before purchasing
envelopes in volume, try testing a sample to ensure the print quality.
Storing envelopes for a long period may cause them to become wrinkled. Thus, keep the package sealed until you are
ready to use them.
Keep the following points in mind.
• Do not use envelopes with exposed adhesive. In addition, do not use the type of envelope in which the adhesive is
exposed after the top layer is peeled off. Serious damage may be caused if the paper covering the adhesive comes
off in the machine.
• Do not use envelopes with certain special features. For example, do not use envelopes with a grommet for winding a
string to close the flap or envelopes with an open or film-covered window.
• If paper jams occur, load fewer envelopes at once.
Thick paper
Before loading thick paper, fan it and align the edges. Some thick paper may still have rough edges developed by a
paper cutter on the back side. Remove any such rough edges just as with Hagaki (Cardstock) by placing the paper on a
flat surface and rubbing the edges gently a few times with a ruler. Printing onto paper with rough edges may cause jams.
Colored paper
Colored paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine (12-16)
In addition, the pigments in the paper must be able to withstand the heat of printing (up to 200°C or 392°F).
0.115 to 0.145 mm 0.115 to 0.145 mm
Moisture content 4 to 6 % (composite)
NOTE
If the paper is not supplied correctly even after it is smoothed, load the paper with the leading edge raised a few
millimeters.
Criteria Specifications
Burrs
Burrs
12-22
Appendix > Paper
Preprinted paper
Preprinted paper must conform to the specifications.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine (12-16)
The colored ink must be able to withstand the heat of printing. It must be resistant to silicone oil as well. Do not use
paper with a treated surface such as glossy paper used for calendars.
Recycled paper
Recycled paper must conform to the specifications; however, its whiteness may be considered separately.
Basic Paper Specifications that can be Used with This Machine (12-16)
Coated Paper
Coated paper is created by treating the surface of the base paper with a coating that provides higher printing quality than
plain paper. Coated paper is used for particularly high quality printing.
The surface of high-quality or medium-quality paper is coated with special agents that improve ink adhesion by making
the paper surface smoother. These agents are used either to coat both sides of the paper or just one side. The coated
side appears slightly glossy.
NOTE
Before purchasing recycled paper in volume, try testing a sample to ensure satisfactory print quality.
IMPORTANT
When printing on coated paper in very humid environments, ensure that the paper is kept dry as
moisture may cause sheets to stick together when they are fed into the machine. If printing in very
humid environments, set coated paper for one sheet each.
12-23
Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
Machine
IMPORTANT
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE
For more information on using the FAX, refer to the following:
FAX Operation Guide
Item Description
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 256 g/m2
Multi Purpose
Tray 60 to 256 g/m2
Paper Type Cassette
Plain, Rough, Recycled, Vellum, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, High Quality, Envelope, Custom
(Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose
Tray Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond,
Cardstock, Coated, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, Envelope, Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,
8K,16K
Multi Purpose
Tray A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, B6, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement,
Executive, Oficio II, 8K, 16K, B5 (ISO), Envelope #10, Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/
4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock),
Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard), Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (98 × 148 mm to
297 × 432 mm),
Printable Area Print margin for top is 4.5 ± 1.5 mm, bottom is 3 ± 2.5 mm, both sides is 4 mm.
Wa rm-up Time
(23°C/73.4°F,
60%)
Power on ECOSYS M8124cidn 30 seconds or less
ECOSYS M8130cidn 30 seconds or less
Low Power ECOSYS M8124cidn 10 seconds or less
ECOSYS M8130cidn 10 seconds or less
Sleep ECOSYS M8124cidn10 seconds or less
ECOSYS M8130cidn10 seconds or less
Paper Cap a city Cassette 500 sheets (80 g/m2)*1
Multi Purpose
Tray 100 sheets (A4/Letter or smaller) (80 g/m2),
25 sheets (larger than A4/Letter) (80 g/m2)
Output Tray
Capacity Inner tray 250 sheets (80 g/m2)
Job separator 30 sheets (80 g/m2)
12-24
Appendix > Specifications
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
*2 This is standard in Inch Model.
*3 Use slot 2 for FAX system.
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography
Memory Standard: 1536MB(1.5GB), Maximum: 3072MB(3.0GB)
Interface Standard USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10BASE-T [IPv6IPv4IPSec], 802.3az
supported)
USB Host: 2 (USB memory slot)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-36 mounting)*2
Option eKUIO: 2
(For HD-6/HD-7/FAX System*3/IB-50/IB-51 mounting.)
Operating
Environment Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F
Humidity 10 to 80 %
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H)
(without Document Pr ocessor)
23.23" × 23.23" × 29.65"
590 × 590 × 753 mm
Weight ECOSYS M8124cidn: Approx. 169.8 lb/Approx. 77 kg (without toner container)
ECOSYS M8130cidn: Approx. 174.2 lb/Approx. 79 kg (without toner container)
Space Required (W × D)
(Using multi purpose tray)
34.37" × 23.23"
873 × 590 mm
Power Source 120 V Specification Model: 120 V 60 Hz, 7.2 A
220 V -240 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50 Hz, 3.5 A
The power consumption of the
product in networke d standby (If
all network ports are connected.)
The information is available at the website below.
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.eu/index/environment/
green_products/low_power_consumption.html
Options Optional Equipment (12-2)
Item Description
12-25
Appendix > Specifications
Copy Functions
Item Description
Copy Speed ECOSYS
M8124cidn
Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
A4/Letter 24 sheets/min 24 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B4/Legal 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
B5 24 sheets/min 24 sheets/min
B5-R 17 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
A5-R 12 sheets/min 12 sheets/min
ECOSYS
M8130cidn
Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
A4/Letter 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
A4-R/Letter-R 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
A3/Ledger 15 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
B4/Legal 15 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
B5 30 sheets/min 30 sheets/min
B5-R 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
A5-R 15 sheets/min 15 sheets/min
First Copy
Time (A4, place
on the platen,
feed from
Cassette)
ECOSYS
M8124cidn 7.6 seconds or less 9.8 seconds or less
ECOSYS
M8130cidn 6.5 seconds or less 8.3 seconds or less
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%, 1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet, Book, 3-dimensional objects
(maximum original size: Legal/Folio)
Original Feed System Fixed
12-26
Appendix > Specifications
Printer Functions
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
*2 This is standard in Inch Model.
Scanner Functions
*1 When the optional OCR Scan Activation Kit is installed.
*2 Microsoft Office 2007 or later
*3 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*4 This is standard in Inch Model.
*5 Available Operating System: Windows Vista, Windows Server 2008, Windows Server 2008 R2, Windows 7, Windows 8,
Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2012, Windows Server 2012 R2, Windows Server 2016
Item Description
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
First Print Time
(A4, feed from
Cassette)
ECOSYS
M8124cidn Black and White 7.5 seconds or less
Color 10.2 seconds or less
ECOSYS
M8130cidn
Black and White 6.5 seconds or less
Color 8.3 seconds or less
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 1200 × 1200 dpi*1
Operating System Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server
2008/R2, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server 2016, Mac OS X(10.5 or more)
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Network interface: 1 (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T [IPv6, IPv4, IPSec],
802.3a supported)
Optional Interface (Option): 2 (For IB-50/IB-51 mounting)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-36 mounting)*2
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6 (PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3 (PostScript3 compatible), PDF, XPS, OpenXPS
Item Description
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi, 400 x400 dpi, 200 x 400 dpi, 300 x 300 dpi, 200 x 200 dpi, 200 x
100 dpi
File Format TIFF, JPEG, XPS, OpenXPS, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression), MS Office*1*2,
Searchable PDF*1
Scanning
Speed*3
(A4 landscape,
300 dpi, Image
quality: Text/
Photo original)
ECOSYS
M8124cidn
ECOSYS
M8130cidn
Simplex:
B/W 50 Images/min, Color 50 Images/min
Duplex:
B/W 16 Images/min, Color 16 Images/min
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Wireless LAN (Option): 1 (For IB-36 mounting)*4
Transmission System SMB, SMTP, SMTP over SSL, FTP, FTP over SSL, TWAIN*5, WIA*5, WSD
12-27
Appendix > Specifications
Document Processor
*1Up to upper limit height line in the document processor.
Paper Feeder (500-sheet)
Paper Feeder (500-sheet x 2)
Document Finisher
Item Description
Original Feed Method Automatic feed
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: A3/ Ledger (Custom: 297 x 432 mm,
Long-sized: 297 x 1900 mm)
Minimum: A5-R/ Statement-R (Custom: 140 x 182 mm)
Paper Weight 1-sided: 45 to 160 g/m2
2-sided: 50 to 120 g/m2
Loading Capacity 50 sheets or less (50 to 80 g/m2)*1
Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 1 cassette)
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II, 216×340 mm,
Folio, 8K, 16K
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 23.23 x 23.19 x 13.86 "
590 × 589 × 352 mm
Weight Approx. 45.9 lb/ Approx. 20.8 kg
Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction roller feeder
(No. Sheets: 500, 80 g/m2, 2 cassettes)
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, Ledger, Letter, Legal, Statement, Oficio II, 216×340 mm,
Folio, 8K, 16K
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 256 g/m2
Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 23.23 x 23.19 x 13.86 "
590 × 589 × 352 mm
Weight Approx. 46lb/ Approx. 21 kg
Item Description
Number of Trays 1 tray
Paper Size
(80 g/m2)
Tray (No n-
stapling) A3, B4, Folio, 216 x 340 mm, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8K: 250 sheets
A4, B5, A5, Letter, Executive, Statement, 16K: 500 sheets
12-28
Appendix > Specifications
Supported Paper Weight 45 to 256 g/m2 (Stapling: 90 g/m2 or less)
Stapling Number of
Sheets A3, B4, Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 216 × 340 mm, 8K: 25 sheets
A4, B5, Letter, 16K: 50 sheets
(Paper weight 90 g/m2 or less)
Media types Plain, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead, High Quality,
Rough, Custom 1 to 8
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 16.38 x 20.51 x 10.85 "
416 x 521 x 275.5 mm
Weight Approx. 26.4lb/ Approx. 12 kg or less
Space Required (W × D)
(When pulling the tray)
24.09 x 20.51 "
612 x 521 mm
Item Description
12-29
Appendix > Glossary
Glossary
Accessibility
The machine is designed featuring good accessibility even for the elderly and those who are physically challenged or
visually impaired. Touch panel is adjustable in two angles.
Apple Talk
AppleTalk offers file sharing and printer sharing and it also enables you to utilize application software that is on another
computer on the same AppleTalk network.
Auto Form Feed Timeout
During data transmission, the machine may sometimes have to wait until receiving the next data. This is the auto form
feed timeout. When the preset timeout passes, the machine automatically prints output. However, no output is
performed if the last page has no data to be printed.
Auto-IP
Auto-IP is a module that enables dynamic IPv4 addresses to be assigned to a device on startup. However, DHCP
requires a DHCP server. Auto-IP is a server-less method of choosing an IP address. IP addresses between 169.254.0.0
to 169.254.255.255 are reserved for Auto-IP and assigned automatically.
Auto Paper Selection
A function to automatically select paper in the same size as originals when printing.
Auto Sleep
A mode designed for electrical power saving, activated when the machine is left unused or there is no data transfer for a
specific period. In Sleep mode, power consumption is kept to a minimum.
Bonjour
Bonjour, also known as zero-configuration networking, is a service that automatically detects computers, devices and
services on an IP network. Bonjour, because an industry-standard IP protocol is used, allows devices to automatically
recognize each other without an IP address being specified or DNS server being set. Bonjour also sends and receives
network packets by UDP port 5353. If a firewall is enabled, the user must check that UDP port 5353 is left open so that
Bonjour will run correctly. Some firewalls are set up so as to reject only certain Bonjour packets. If Bonjour does not run
stably, check the firewall settings and ensure that Bonjour is registered on the exceptions list and that Bonjour packets
are accepted. If you install Bonjour on Windows XP Service Pack 2 or later, the Windows firewall will be set up correctly
for Bonjour.
Custom Box
The Custom Box function stores print data for each individual user on the printer and allows the user to print single or
multiple copies of the stored data later using the printer's operation panel.
Default Gateway
This indicates the device, such as a computer or router, that serves as the entrance/exit (gateway) for accessing
computers outside the network that you are on. When no specific gateway is designated for a destination IP address,
data is sent to the host designated as the Default Gateway.
12-30
Appendix > Glossary
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) that automatically resolves IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses on a TCP/IP network. DHCP minimizes the load of network management employing a large number of client
computers because it relieves individual clients including printers from the IP address being assigned.
DHCP (IPv6)
DHCP (IPv6) is the next-generation of the Internet's Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol and supports IPv6. It extends
the BOOTP startup protocol that defines the protocols used for transferring configuration information to hosts on the
network. DHCP (IPv6) permits the DHCP server to use its expanded functionality to send configuration parameters to an
IPv6 node. Because the network addresses that can be used are allocated automatically, the IPv6 node management
workload is reduced in systems where the administrator has to exercise close control over IP address allocation.
dpi (dots per inch)
A unit for resolution, representing the number of dots printed per inch (25.4 mm).
EcoPrint Mode
A printing mode that helps save toner. Copies made in this mode are thus lighter than normal.
Emulation
The function to interpret and execute other printers' page description languages. The machine emulates operation of
PCL6, KPDL3 (PostScript 3 compatible).
Enhanced WSD
Proprietary web services.
FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
A protocol to transfer files on the TCP/IP network, whether the Internet or an intranet. Along with HTTP and SMTP/POP,
FTP is now frequently used on the Internet.
Grayscale
A computer color expression. Displayed images of this sort are typically composed of shades of gray, varying from black
at the weakest intensity to white at the strongest, without any other colors. Gray levels are displayed in numerical levels:
that is, white and black only for 1 bit; 256 gray levels (including white and black) for 8 bits; and 65,536 gray levels for 16
bits.
Help
A ? (Help) key is provided on this machine's operation panel. If you are unsure of how to operate the machine, would like
more information on its functions or are having problems getting the machine to work properly, press the ? (Help) key to
view a detailed explanation on the touch panel.
IP Address
An Internet protocol address is a unique number that represents a specific computer or related device on the network.
The format of an IP address is four sets of numbers separated by dots, e.g. 192.168.110.171. Each number should be
between 0 and 255.
12-31
Appendix > Glossary
IPP
IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) is a standard that uses TCP/IP networks such as the Internet to enable print jobs to be
sent between remote computers and printers. IPP is an extension of the HTTP protocol used to view websites and
enables printing to be carried out via routers on printers in remote locations. It also supports the HTTP authentication
mechanisms along with SSL server and client authentication as well as encryption.
Job Box
The Job Box function stores print data on the printer and allows users to print single or multiple copies of the stored data
later using the printer's operation panel.
KPDL (Kyocera Page Description Language)
Kyocera's PostScript page description language compatible with Adobe PostScript Level 3.
Multi Purpose (MP) Tray
The paper supply tray on the front side of the machine. Use this tray instead of the cassettes when printing onto
envelopes, Hagaki (Cardstock), transparencies, or labels.
NetBEUI (NetBIOS Extended User Interface)
An interface, developed by IBM in 1985, as an update from NetBIOS. It enables more advanced functions on smaller
networks than other protocols such as TCP/IP, etc. It is not suitable for larger networks due to lack of routing capabilities
to choose the most appropriate routes. NetBEUI has been adopted by IBM for its OS/2 and Microsoft for its Windows as
a standard protocol for file sharing and printing services.
Outline font
With outline fonts, character outlines are represented with numerical expressions and fonts can be enlarged or reduced
in different ways by changing the numeric values of those expressions. Printing remains clear even if you enlarge fonts,
since the characters are defined with outlines represented with numerical expressions. You can specify the font size in
steps of 0.25 points up to 999.75 points.
PDF/A
This is "ISO 19005-1. Document management - Electronic document file format for long-term preservation - Part 1: Use
of PDF (PDF/A)", and is a file format based on PDF 1.4. It has been standardized as ISO 19005-1, and is a
specialization of PDF, which has been mainly used for printing, for long-term storage. A new part, ISO 19005-2 (PDF/A-
2), is currently being prepared.
POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3)
A standard protocol to receive E-mail from the server in which the mail is stored on the Internet or an intranet.
PostScript
A page description language developed by Adobe Systems. It enables flexible font functions and highly-functional
graphics, allowing higher quality printing. The first version called Level 1 was launched in 1985, followed by Level 2 that
enabled color printing and two-byte languages (e.g. Japanese) in 1990. In 1996, Level 3 was released as an update for
the Internet access and PDF format as well as gradual improvements in implementation technologies.
PPM (prints per minute)
This indicates the number of A4 size printouts made in one minute.
12-32
Appendix > Glossary
Printer Driver
The software to enable you to print data created on any application software. The printer driver for the machine is
contained in the DVD enclosed in the package. Install the printer driver on the computer connected to the machine.
RA(Stateless)
The IPv6 router communicates (transmits) information such as the global address prefix using ICMPv6. This information
is the Router Advertisement (RA).
ICMPv6 stands for Internet Control Message Protocol, and is a IPv6 standard defined in the RFC 2463 "Internet Control
Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the Internet Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Specification".
RAM Disk
Using part of the printer's memory as a virtual disk, you can set any amount of memory from overall printer memory as a
RAM disk in order to use features such as electronic sorting (shortening print time).
Send as E-mail
A function to send the image data stored in the machine as an E-mail attachment. E-mail addresses can be selected
from the list or entered at each time.
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
A protocol for E-mail transmission over the Internet or an intranet. It is used for transferring mail between mail servers as
well as for sending mail from clients to their servers.
Status Page
The page lists machine conditions, such as the memory capacity, total number of prints and scans, and paper source
settings.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is a way of augmenting the network address section of an IP address.
A subnet mask represents all network address sections as 1 and all host address sections as 0. The number of bits in
the prefix indicates the length of the network address. The term "prefix" refers to something added to the beginning and,
in this context, indicates the first section of the IP address. When an IP address is written, the length of the network
address is indicated by the prefix length after a forward slash (/). For example, "24" in the address "133.210.2.0/24". In
this way, "133.210.2.0/24" denotes the IP address "133.210.2.0" with a 24-bit prefix (network section). This new network
address section (originally part of the host address) made possible by the subnet mask is referred to as the subnet
address. When you enter the subnet mask, be sure to set the "DHCP" setting to "Off".
TCP/IP (Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP is a suite of protocols designed to define the way computers and other devices communicate with each other
over a network.
TCP/IP (IPv6)
TCP/IP (IPv6) is based on the current Internet protocol, TCP/IP (IPv4). IPv6 is the next-generation Internet protocol and
expands the available address space, which resolves the problem of the lack of addresses under IPv4, while also
introducing other improvements such as additional security functionality and the capacity to prioritize data transmission.
12-33
Appendix > Glossary
TWAIN (Technology Without An Interesting Name)
A technical specification for connecting scanners, digital cameras, and other image equipment to computers. The
TWAIN compatible devices enable you to process image data on any relevant application software. TWAIN is adopted
on a large amount of graphic software (e.g. Adobe Photoshop) and OCR software.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) 2.0
A USB interface standard for Hi-Speed USB 2.0. The maximum transfer rate is 480 Mbps. This machine is equipped with
USB 2.0 for high-speed data transfer.
WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition)
A function to import images supported after Windows Me/XP from digital cameras and other peripheral devices. This
function replaces what TWAIN used to do. The feature is provided as a part of Windows functions and improves ease of
operation, so that you import images directly to My Computer without using any application.
Index-1
> Index
Index
A
Accessibility 12-29
Address Book 3-32
Assign 3-32
Deleting 3-37
Editing and Deleting 3-36
Individual 3-32
Private 3-35
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-63
Auto Color Correction 8-63
Calibration 11-30
Development Refresh 11-30
Drum Refresh 8-64, 11-32
Sharpness Adjustment 8-63
Tone Curve Adjustment 8-64
Adjustment/Maintenance Menu 11-25
AirPrint 5-45
AppleTalk 12-29
Application 2-54, 8-28
Auto Form Feed Timeout 12-29
Auto Image Rotation 6-36
Auto Paper Selection 12-29
Auto Sleep 2-23, 12-29
Auto-IP 12-29
Settings 8-38, 8-41
Automatic 2-Sided Print Function 1-18
B
Background Density Adjustment 6-24, 8-63
Bonjour 12-29
Settings 8-43
C
Cables 2-8
Cancel Printing 4-10
Canceling a Print Job 5-13
Canceling Scanning 5-26
Cassette
Paper Size and Media Type 8-9
Cassette 1 2-3
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-9
Cassettes
Loading Paper 3-19
Checking and Editing Destinations 5-30
Checking the Counter 3-16
By Paper Size 9-40
Each Job Accounting 9-43
Print Accounting Report 9-43
Total Job Accounting 9-43
Unknown User Settings 9-46
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner 7-12
Cleaning
Glass Platen 10-2
Slit Glass 10-2
Clearing a Staple Jam
Clearing a Staple Jam of the Inner Finisher 11-43
Clearing Paper Jams
Bride Unit 11-40
Jam Location Indicators 11-33
Multi Purpose Tray 11-34
Original Feeder (Reverse Automatic) 11-41
Right Cover 1 11-35
Right Cover 2, 3 11-37
Collate/Offset 6-10
Color
Background Density Adjustment 6-24, 8-63
Calibration 11-30
Color Balance 6-20
Hue Adjustment 6-21
Color Balance 6-20
Color Registration Procedure
Auto Correction 11-26
Manual Correction 11-28
Color Selection 6-19
Combine 6-29
Command Center RX 2-42
Common Settings 8-11
Default Screen 8-11
Display Status/Log 8-21
Error Handling 8-19, 8-20
Finish Documents by Job 8-20
Function Defaults 8-16
Function Key Assignment 8-21
Low Toner Alert Level 8-20
Measurement 8-19, 8-20
Number of Copies Limit 8-18
Offset One Page Documents 8-21
Original Settings 8-12, 8-13
Paper Output 8-19, 8-20
Show Power Off Message 8-21
Sound 8-11
Connecting
LAN Cable 2-9
Power Cable 2-9
USB Cable 2-9
Connection Method 2-12
Consumable Replacement and Replenishment
Loading Paper 10-9
Staple Cartridge Replacement (Document Finisher) 10-
10
Toner Container Replacement 10-4
Waste Toner Box Replacement 10-7
Contrast 6-23
Conventions Used in This Guide li
Copy 5-14
Counting the Number of Used Sheets
Counter 3-16
Custom Box 12-29
Creating a Box 3-49
Delete Box 3-53
Deleting Documents 5-37
Printing Documents 5-43
Send 5-37
Storing Documents 5-34
Index-2
> Index
D
Data Sanitization 8-57
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-60
Panel Reset Timer 8-60
Default
XPS Fit to Page 8-17
Default Gateway 12-29
Settings 8-41
Default Screen 8-11
Defaults
Background Density (Send/Store) 8-16
Continuous Scan (Send/Store) 8-17
Document Name Entry 8-17
FAX TX Resolution 8-16
File Format 8-16
File Separation File Separation
Default 8-16
Margin 8-17
Original Orientation (Copy) 8-16
Prevent Bleed-thru (Copy) 8-16
Scan (Except FAX) 8-17
Scan Resolution 8-16
Skip Blank Page (Send/Store) 8-16
Sort/Offset 8-16
Density 6-16
Density Adjustment 8-63
Destination
Add 3-32
Address Book 5-27, 5-29
Address Book Type 8-30
Checking and Editing 5-30
Checking/Editing 5-30
Confirmation Screen of Destinations 5-30
Destination Check before Send 5-30
Multi Sending 5-23
One Touch Key 3-37
Quick No. Specification 5-29
Recall 5-31
Search 5-28
Select from Address Book 5-27, 5-29
Selecting Using One Touch Keys 5-29
Sort 8-30
Device 7-10
DHCP 12-30
Settings 8-38, 8-41
DHCP (IPv6) 12-30
DHCP(IPv6)
Settings 8-39
Display for Device Information 3-11
Display Setting Screen 3-11
Display Status/Log 8-21
Displaying Job History Screen 7-7
Document Box
Custom Box 3-48
External Memory Box 3-49
Job Box 3-48
Document Box Settings 8-32
Document Box/Removable Memory
Custom Box 8-26
Polling Box 8-26
Document Name Entry
Default 8-17
Document Processor
Loading Originals 5-4
Originals Supported by the Document Processor 5-4
dpi 12-30
Drum Refresh 8-64
DSM Scan 5-22
Protocol Settings 8-45
Duplex 6-32
E
EcoPrint 6-18, 12-30
Edit Destination
Address book 3-32
Address Book Defaults 8-30
Edit Restriction 8-30
Group 3-35
Individual 3-32
One Touch Key 3-37
E-mail Settings 2-45
Emulation 8-32, 12-30
Encrypted PDF Password 6-55
Energy Saver Recovery Level 2-22
Energy Saving Control Function 1-17
Energy Star Program 1-21
Enhanced WSD 12-30
Protocol Settings 8-49
Enhanced WSD over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-49
Enter Key 3-12
Entry File Name 6-38
Entry Subject 6-50
Envelopes 12-21
Environment 1-3
Error Handling 8-19, 8-20
Finished Pages Exceeded 8-19
Paper Mismatch Error 8-19
Staples Empty 8-19
eSCL over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-50
F
Favorites
Add 3-43
Delete 3-45
Edit 3-45
Program Mode Execution 3-45
Wizard Mode Execution 3-44
FAX Settings 8-27
File Format 6-43
File Management Utility 5-22, 5-23
File Name Entry 6-38
File PDF 6-44
File Separation 6-48
Finish Documents by Job 8-20
FMU Connection 5-22
FTP 12-30
FTP Client (Sent)
Protocol Settings 8-44
Index-3
> Index
FTP Encrypted TX 6-51
Default 8-17
FTP Server (Receive)
Protocol Settings 8-44
Function Key Assignment 3-4, 8-21
Functions key 3-11
G
Google Cloud Print 5-45
GPL/LGPL 1-11
Grayscale 12-30
Group Authorization 9-17
Group List 9-18
Group Authorization Setting
Group Authorization 9-17
Guest Authorization Settings 9-20
Guest Authorization 9-20
Guest Properties 9-20
Guides Provided with the Machine -xlviii
H
Hagaki (Cardstock) 12-21
Help 12-30
Hold Name 8-35
Home 8-23
Home Customize Taskbar 3-8
Home Screen 3-6
HTTP
Protocol Settings 8-46
HTTPS
Protocol Settings 8-46
Hue Adjustment 6-21
I
ID Card Copy 6-3
Install
Mac 2-35
Software 2-27
Windows 2-28
Interface Block Setting 8-54
Internet 8-29
IP Address 12-30
Settings 8-38, 8-41
IPP 12-31
Protocol Settings 8-46
IPP over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-47
IPSec 8-43
J
Job
Available Status 7-2
Canceling 7-9
Checking History 7-10
Checking Status 7-2
Detailed Information 7-6
Detailed Information of Histories 7-8
Displaying Status Screens 7-2
Pause and Resumption 7-9
Sending the Log History 7-8, 8-7
Job Accounting 9-29
Accounting Report 9-43
Add 9-31
Checking the Counter 9-41
Defaults 9-39
Delete 9-34
Edit 9-33
FAX 9-37
Job Accounting Access 9-30
Logout 9-45
Print 9-34
Restrictions 9-32
TWAIN 9-35
WIA 9-36
Job Accounting Settings
Apply Limit 9-33
Copy/Print Count 9-45
Job Box 12-31
Private Print 5-40
Proof and Hold 5-43
Quick Copy Box 5-42
Quick Copy Job Retention 8-26
Specifying a Job Box from a Computer and Saving a
Job 4-11
Job Finish Notice 6-37
Job Finish Notice Setting 8-6
JPEG/TIFF Printing 6-57
K
KPDL 12-31
L
Labels 12-20
LAN Cable 2-8
Connecting 2-9
Laser Scanner Cleaning 11-32
LDAP
Protocol Settings 8-45
Loading Originals 5-14
Document processor 2-3
Loading Paper 10-9
Local Authorization 9-17
Login 3-14
Logout 3-15
Long Original 6-55
Low Power Mode 2-22
Low Toner Alert Level 8-20
LPD
Protocol Settings 8-44
Index-4
> Index
M
Mail Subject/Body
Default 8-17
Management 9-5
Manual Settings (IPv6) 8-39, 8-42
Margin
Default 8-17
Measurement 8-19, 8-20
Mixed Size Originals 6-7
Combinations 6-7
Mixed Size Stapling 6-13
Mopria 5-45
MP (Multi Purpose) tray 2-4
Multi Purpose Tray 12-31
Paper Size and Media Type 8-10
Multi Purpose tray
Loading Envelopes or Cardstock 5-9
Loading Paper 5-7
Multi Sending 5-23
N
NetBEUI 12-31
Protocol Settings 8-44
NetWare
Settings 8-52
Network
Preparation 2-13
Network Interface 2-8
Network Interface Connector 2-5
Network Settings
NFC Settings 2-21
Network settings
Wired Network Settings 2-13, 2-19
Wireless Network Settings 2-15
NFC
Printing 5-46
Setup 2-21
O
OCR Dictionary Installation xxxviii
OCR Output Format xxviii, 6-44
OCR Text Recognition xxviii, 6-44, 6-47, 8-18
OCR Text Recognition Action xxx, 8-25
Offset One Page Documents 8-21
One Touch Key
Assign 3-37
Delete 3-39
Modify 3-38
Operation panel 2-3
Option
Overview of Optional Equipment 12-2
Option Interface Slot 2-5
Option Network
Basic Settings 8-52
Wireless Network 8-53
Optional Function 8-58, 8-59
Original Image 6-17
Original Orientation 6-9
Original Preview 3-12
Original Size 6-4
Original Stopper 5-6
Original width guides 2-4
Original/Paper Settings 8-12
Outline font 12-31
Output Stopper 3-22
P
Panel Reset Timer 8-60
Paper
5-9
Cassette 8-9
Handling Precautions 3-4, 3-17
Loading an Original on the Multi Purpose Tray 5-14
Loading Paper into a Cassette 3-19
Multi Purpose Tray 8-10
Selecting Paper Feeder Units 3-18
Special Paper 12-19
Paper Length Guide 3-19
Paper Output 6-15, 8-19, 8-20
Paper Selection 6-7
Paper Settings 8-13
Paper Width Guide 3-20
PaperChecking the Remaining Amount of PaperPaper 7-12
PaperSize and Media Type 12-16
Part Names 2-12
PDF/A 12-31
PIN Code Authorization 9-26
Ping 8-50
Place the originals 5-3
Platen 5-3
POP3 12-31
POP3 (Mail Receive)
Protocol Settings 8-44
PostScript 12-31
Power Cable
Connecting 2-9
Power Management 1-20
Power OFF 2-10
Power On 2-10
Power switch 2-3
PPM 12-31
Preprinted paper 12-22
Prevent Bleed-thru 6-26
Default 8-16
Primary OCR Language xxviii, 8-18
Printer
Copies 8-32
Emulation 8-32
Print Setting 5-45
Printer Driver 12-32
Changing Defaults 3-48
Help 4-4
Print Settings 4-2
Printer Settings 8-32
Printing
Printing on Non-standard Size Paper 4-7
Printing on Standard Size Paper 4-6
Printing from PC 5-45
Printing from Removable USB Memory 5-47
Product Library xlviii
Index-5
> Index
Proxy 8-51
Q
Quick No. Search key 3-13
Quick Setup Wizard 2-25
R
RA (Stateless) 12-32
Setting 8-39, 8-42
RAM Disk 12-32
Raw Port
Protocol Settings 8-47
Recycled paper 12-22
Regular Maintenance 10-2
Resource Saving - Paper 1-19
Responding to Messages 11-10
S
Safety Conventions in This Guide 1-2
Saturation 6-25
Saving Documents to USB Memory 5-47
Scan Resolution
Default 8-16
Send
Using a FAX Server to Send 5-24
Send Result Report 8-6
Send to Folder (FTP) 5-14
Send to Folder (SMB) 5-14
Send to FTP 5-18
Sending 5-14
Sending Mail 5-14
Sending Size 6-42
Sending to a Shared Folder in a PC 5-16
Sending to an Folder on an FTP Server 5-18
Setting Date and Time 2-12
Sharpness 6-22
Shortcut
Editing Shortcuts 3-46
Shortcuts 3-46, 5-14
Delete 3-47
ShortcutsEditing and Deleting Shortcuts 3-46
Show Power Off Message 8-21
Simple Login 3-15
Simple Login Settings
Simple Login 9-23
Skip Blank Page 6-40
Sleep 2-23
Sleep Level
Energy Saver 2-24
Quick Recovery 2-24
Slit Glass 2-3
SMB Client (Send)
Protocol Settings 8-44
SMB Send 5-16
SMTP 12-32
SMTP (Mail Send)
Protocol Settings 8-44
SNMP
Protocol Settings 8-45
SNMPv3
Protocol Settings 8-45
Sort/Offset
Default 8-16
Sound 8-11
Specifications 12-23
Document Finisher 12-27
SSD Initialization 8-57
SSL
Security Settings 8-50
Staple 6-12
Staple Cartridge Replacement
Document Finisher 10-10
Status Monitor
Notification Settings 4-17
Quit 4-14
Startup 4-17
Status Page 12-32
Storing Size 6-54
Subnet Mask 12-32
Settings 8-38, 8-41
SuppliesChecking the Remaining Amount 7-12
Symbols 1-2
System Menu
Adjustment/Maintenance 8-63
Application 8-28
Cassette/MP Tray Settings 8-9
Common Settings 8-11
Copy 8-24
Date/Timer/Energy Saver 8-60
Document Box 8-32
Edit Destination 8-30
FAX 8-27
Home 8-23
Internet 8-29
Operation Method 8-2
Printer 8-32
Quick Setup Wizard 2-25
Report 8-5
Send 8-32
System/Network 8-35
User Information 9-12
User Login/Job Accounting 8-31
System Menu/Counter 8-8
System/Network 8-35
Bluetooth Settings 8-55
Data Security 8-57
Interface Block Settings 8-54
Network 8-35
OCR Dictionary Installation 8-58
Optional Function 8-58, 8-59
Primary Network (Client) 8-54
Restart Entire Device 8-55
Security Level 8-55
T
TCP/IP 12-32
TCP/IP (IPv4)
Settings 2-13, 8-38
TCP/IP (IPv6) 12-30
Index-6
> Index
Thick paper 12-21
Thin Print over SSL
Protocol Settings 8-48
ThinPrint
Protocol Settings 8-48
Toner Container 2-4
Touch Panel 3-6
Transmission Settings 8-32
Recall 8-25
Transparencies 12-20
Tray 1 to 5 2-6
Troubleshooting 11-2
Color printing Trouble 11-9
Machine Operation Trouble 11-3
Printed image Trouble 11-6
TWAIN 12-33
Scanning 5-19
U
USB 12-33
USB Cable
Connecting 2-9
USB Interface 2-8
USB Interface Connector 2-5
USB Memory
Checking Information 5-48
Printing 5-47
USB Memory Slot 2-3
USB MemoryRemove 5-48
USB MemorySave 5-47
Useful Sending Method 5-21
User Information 9-12
User Login Administration
Adding a User 9-7
Enabling 9-5
FAX 9-16
Group Authorization 9-17
Guest Authorization Settings 9-20
IC Card Settings 9-26
Local Authorization 9-17
Login 3-14
Logout 3-15
Modifying User Information 9-11
Obtain NW User Properties 9-22
Overview of User Login Administration 9-3, 9-5
PIN Code Authorization 9-26
Printing 9-13
Simple Login Settings 9-23
TWAIN 9-14
User Account Lockout Setting 9-6
WIA 9-15
User/Job Accounting
Unknown ID Job 9-46
Unknown User Settings 9-46
W
Waste Toner Box 2-4
WIA 12-33
Scanning 5-19
WIASetting WIA Driver 2-37, 2-39
Wi-Fi Direct
Printing 5-45
Setup 2-19, 8-35
Wireless Network Settings
Settings 2-15
WSD Print
Protocol Settings 8-45
WSD Scan 5-21
Protocol Setting 8-45
X
XPS Fit to Page 6-58
Default 8-17
Z
Zoom 6-27
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc.
Headquarters
225 Sand Road,
Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, USA
Phone: +1-973-808-8444
Fax: +1-973-882-6000
Latin America
8240 NW 52nd Terrace Dawson Building, Suite 100
Miami, Florida 33166, USA
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Fax: +1-305-421-6666
KYOCERA Document Solutions Canada
, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8,
Canada
Phone: +1-905-670-4425
Fax: +1-905-670-8116
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo,
Distrito Federal, C.P. 11560, México
Phone: +52-555-383-2741
Fax: +52-555-383-7804
KYOCERA Document Solutions Brazil, Ltda.
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás,
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba, State of São Paulo, CEP
06543-306, Brazil
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304
KYOCERA Document Solutions Chile SpA
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile
Phone: +562-2350-7000
Fax: +562-2350-7150
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde N.S.W, 2113,
Australia
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588
KYOCERA Document Solutions
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor, 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland,
New Zealand
Phone: +64-9-415-4517
Fax: +64-9-415-4597
KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
13/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,
New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-2496-5678
Fax: +852-2610-2063
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(China) Corporation
8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Shanghai,200003, China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
KYOCERA Document Solutions
(Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Bangkok 10800,
Thailand
Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Fax: +66-2-586-0278
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Singapore Pte. Ltd.
12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,
Luxasia Building, Singapore 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
Fax: +65-6748-3788
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Hong Kong Limited
16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road Tsuen Wan,
New Territories, Hong Kong
Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Taiwan Corporation
6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd.,
Zhongshan Dist., Taipei 104, Taiwan R.O.C.
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
KYOCERA Document Solutions Korea Co., Ltd.
#10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
Fax: +822-747-0084
KYOCERA Document Solutions
India Private Limited
Second Floor, Centrum Plaza, Golf Course Road,
Sector-53, Gurgaon, Haryana 122002, India
Phone: +91-0124-4671000
Fax: +91-0124-4671001
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Deutschland GmbH
Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch,
Germany
Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +49-2159-918100
KYOCERA Document Solutions Austria GmbH
Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien,
Austria
Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +43-1-86338-400
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nordic AB
Esbogatan 16B 164 75 Kista, Sweden
Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup,
Denmark
Phone: +45-70223880
Fax: +45-45765850
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Portugal
Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Fax: +351-21-849-3312
KYOCERA Document Solutions
South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park,
90 Bekker Road (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Fax: +27-11-466-3050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC.
Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow,
Russia
Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Fax: +7(495)741-0018
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai,
United Arab Emirates
Phone: +971-04-433-0412
KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
2-28, 1-chome, Tamatsukuri, Chuo-ku
Osaka 540-8585, Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
http://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
KYOCERA Document Solutions Europe B.V.
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-654-0000
Fax: +31-20-653-1256
KYOCERA Document Solutions Nederland B.V.
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31-20-5877200
Fax: +31-20-5877260
KYOCERA Document Solutions (U.K.) Limited
Eldon Court, 75-77 London Road,
Reading, Berkshire RG1 5BS,
United Kingdom
Phone: +44-118-931-1500
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Italia S.p.A.
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy,
Phone: +39-02-921791
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Belgium N.V.
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem,
Belgium
Phone: +32-2-7209270
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions France S.A.S.
Espace Technologique de St Aubin
Route de IOrme 91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX,
France
Phone: +33-1-69852600
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions Espana, S.A.
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2,
28290 Las Matas (Madrid), Spain
Phone: +34-91-6318392
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA Document Solutions Finland Oy
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki,
Finland
Phone: +358-9-47805200
Fax: +358-9-47805212
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Europe B.V., Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich,
Switzerland
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions
Turkey A.S.
Gülbahar Mahallesi Otello Kamil Sk. No:6 Mecidiyeköy
34394 ili stanbul, Turkey
Phone: +90-212-356-7000
Fax: +90-212-356-6725
© 2018 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
2018.3
2P3KDEN005